Roland VS-1680 Owner`s manual

Roland VS-1680 Owner`s manual
Cover.e
04.8.18 5:06 PM
Page 1
®
Concerning Copyright
SCMS (Appendices p. 64)
Disclaimer of liability
Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other damages” which may result from your use of the VS-1680.
These damages may include but are not limited to the following events which can
occur when using the VS-1680.
● Any loss of profit that may occur to you
● Permanent loss of your music or data
● Inability to continue using the VS-1680 itself or a connected device
OWNER'S MANUAL
OWNER'S MANUAL
The law prohibits the unauthorized recording, public performance, broadcast, sale,
or distribution etc. of a work (CD recording, video recording, broadcast, etc.) whose
copyright is owned by a third party.
The VS-1680 does not implement SCMS. This design decision was made with the
intent that SCMS should not restrict the creation of original compositions which do
not violate copyright law. Roland will take no responsibility for any infringement
of copyright that you may commit in using the VS-1680.
About the License Agreement
The VS-1680 and its CD-R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright, or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of music CDs or other copyrighted material without the permission of the copyright owner, other than for your
own personal use and enjoyment (private use) constitutes copyright infringement,
which may incur penalties. Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for
more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
* Windows® 95 is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system.”
* Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
* Iomega is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* ZIP is a trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* Cakewalk Pro Audio and Cakewalk Professional are trademarks of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
01349123
'99-10-AB2-61T
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p.
3, 4), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good
grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Quick Start,
Owner’s Manual, and Appendices should be read in its entirety. The
manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 1998 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Cover.e
04.8.18 5:06 PM
Page 2
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
For EU Countries
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read all the instructions before using the product.
2. Do not use this product near water — for example, near a
bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near
a swimming pool, or the like.
3. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is
recommended by the manufacturer.
4. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier
and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do
not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level
or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any
hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist.
5. The product should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
6. The product should be located away from heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce
heat.
7. The product should be connected to a power supply only of
the type described in the operating instructions or as marked
on the product.
8. The power-supply cord of the product should be unplugged
from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
9. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids
are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
10.The product should be serviced by qualified service
personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
product; or
C. The product has been exposed to rain; or
D. The product does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure
damaged.
11.Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described
in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
ADVARSEL!
VARNING
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
VAROITUS
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
For the USA
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a path of least resistance for
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock.
This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be
plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a
qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded.
Do not modify the plug provided with the product — if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
The product which is equipped with a THREE WIRE GROUNDING TYPE LINE PLUG must be grounded.
2
207
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers
other adverse effects
respect to the home
furnishings, as well
animals or pets.
to damage or
caused with
and all its
to domestic
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions below, and the Owner's Manual.
.........................................................................................................
• Do not open or perform any internal modifications
on the unit. (The only exception would be where
this manual provides specific instructions which
should be followed in order to put in place userinstallable options; see Quick Start p. 55, 57, 59.)
.........................................................................................................
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
.........................................................................................................
• Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not bend it
excessively, step on it, place heavy objects on it, etc.
A damaged cord can easily become a shock or fire
hazard. Never use a power cord after it has been
damaged.
.........................................................................................................
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the powercord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
• Do not force the unit's power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using extension
cords—the total power used by all devices you have
connected to the extension cord's outlet must never
exceed the power rating (watts/amperes) for the
extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt
through.
.........................................................................................................
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the "Information" page.
.........................................................................................................
• Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord
before attempting installation of the Hard disk drive
unit (HDP88 series: Quick Start p. 55) or Effect
expansion board (VS8F-2: Quick Start p. 57, 59).
• In households with small children, an adult should
provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation
of the unit.
.........................................................................................................
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
3
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
• Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
.........................................................................................................
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
.........................................................................................................
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
.........................................................................................................
• Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet
hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
.........................................................................................................
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet, and pull out all cords from external
devices.
.........................................................................................................
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 32).
.........................................................................................................
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in
your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the
outlet.
.........................................................................................................
• When installing the Hard disk drive unit (HDP88
series) or Effect expansion board (VS8F-2), remove
only the specified screws (Quick Start p. 55, 57, 59).
4
IMPORTANT NOTES
In addition to the items listed under “IMPORTANT
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” and “USING THE UNIT
SAFELY” on pages 2–4, please read and observe the
following:
Power Supply
● Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with
any device that will generate line noise (such as an
electric motor or variable lighting system).
● Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off
the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other
devices.
Placement
● Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other
equipment containing large power transformers)
may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change
the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away
from the source of interference.
● This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of
such receivers.
● Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it
near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an
enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
Maintenance
● For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry
cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with
water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent.
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly
with a soft, dry cloth.
the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as
when circuitry related to memory itself is out of
order), we regret that it may not be possible to
restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability
concerning such loss of data.
Memory Backup
● This unit contains a battery which powers the unit’s
memory circuits while the main power is off. When
this battery becomes weak, the message shown
below will appear in the display. Once you see this
message, have the battery replaced with a fresh one
as soon as possible to avoid the loss of all data in
memory. To have the battery replaced, consult with
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page.
fig.00-02(battery.eps)
Additional Precautions
● Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself
against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy
of important data you have stored in the unit’s
memory on a storage device (e.g., hard disk or Zip
disk), or DAT recorder.
● Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored on a storage device
(e.g., hard disk or Zip disk), or DAT recorder once it
has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
● Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of
any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration
and/or deformation.
● Use a reasonable amount of care when using the
unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when
using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can
lead to malfunctions.
Repairs and Data
● Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.)
● Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for
repairs. Important data should always be backed up
on a storage device (e.g., hard disk or Zip disk) or
DAT recorder, or written down on paper (when
possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid
● When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp
the connector itself—never pull on the cable. This
way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the
cable’s internal elements.
5
IMPORTANT NOTES
● A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit
during normal operation.
● To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the
unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer
to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it
is late at night).
● To transport the VS-1680, pack it in its original shipping carton, using the included packing or equivalent material. If an internal IDE hard disk (HDP88
series) is installed, then remove the hard disk. Place
the hard disk in its carton and set this in the specified place inside the VS-1680 shipping carton. The
unit is now ready to be transported. Moving the VS1680 with the hard disk installed may result in loss
of song data or damage to the hard disk.
Handling the Disk Drive
For details on hard disk handling, refer also to the
instructions that accompanied your hard disk.
● Before performing any of the following actions, be
sure to perform the shutdown procedure. Failure to
do so may result in loss of song data or damage to
the hard disk.
• Turning off the power of the VS-1680
• Turning off the power of the disk drive connected
with SCSI connector
• Removing a disk from a removable disk drive
connected with SCSI connector
Shutdown (Appendices p. 64)
Removable Disk Drive (Appendices p. 64)
When the VS-1680 MIDI/DISK indicator or disk drive
busy indicator is lit, it means that data is being written
to or from the hard disk. If you are using a removable
disk drive, confirm that this indicator is not lit before
removing disks.
● While using the VS-1680, be careful not to subject
the unit to vibration or shock, and avoid moving the
unit while the power is turned on.
● Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area
free from vibration. If the unit must be installed at
an angle, be sure the installation does not exceed
the permissible range.
● Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid
changes in the environment can cause condensation
6
to form inside the drive, which will adversely affect
the operation of the drive and/or damage removable disks. When the unit has been moved, allow it
to become accustomed to the new environment
(allow a few hours) before operating it.
Concerning Copyright
The law prohibits the unauthorized recording, public
performance, broadcast, sale, or distribution etc. of a
work (CD recording, video recording, broadcast, etc.)
whose copyright is owned by a third party.
The VS-1680 does not implement SCMS. This design
decision was made with the intent that SCMS should
not restrict the creation of original compositions which
do not violate copyright law. Roland will take no
responsibility for any infringement of copyright that
you may commit in using the VS-1680.
SCMS (Appendices p. 64)
Disclaimer of Liability
Roland will take no responsibility for any direct damages, consequential damages, or any other damages
which may result from your use of the VS-1680. These
damages may include but are not limited to the following events which can occur when using the VS1680.
● Any loss of profit that may occur to you.
● Permanent loss of your music or data.
● Inability to continue using the VS-1680 itself or a
connected device.
About the License
Agreement
The VS-1680 and its CD-R capability are designed to
allow you to reproduce material to which you have
copyright, or material which the copyright owner has
granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of music CDs or other copyrighted material
without the permission of the copyright owner, other
than for your own personal use and enjoyment (private use) constitutes copyright infringement, which
may incur penalties. Consult a copyright specialist or
special publications for more detailed information on
obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
CONTENTS
Preparations ............................................................................12
About the Package Contents ...................................................................................12
Main Features ..........................................................................................................12
Front and Rear Panels ............................................................14
Mixer Section ...........................................................................................................14
Recorder Section .....................................................................................................16
Rear Panel ...............................................................................................................18
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology).............20
Saving and Managing Data......................................................................................20
Managing Disk Contents (Partitioning).........................................................................20
The Location Where a Performance is Recorded (Song) .............................................21
Sources, Tracks, and Channels ........................................................................................21
Takes, Phrases, and Playlists ...........................................................................................21
About Events......................................................................................................................22
About Button Names ........................................................................................................22
Mixer Section ...........................................................................................................23
Signal Flow (Buses) ...........................................................................................................23
Input Mixer ........................................................................................................................25
Track Mixer ........................................................................................................................26
Switching the Fader Functions ........................................................................................26
Master Block.......................................................................................................................27
Recorder Section .....................................................................................................27
Differences with a Tape-Type MTR................................................................................27
Track Minutes and Recording Time ...............................................................................28
Auxiliary Tracks for Each Track .....................................................................................29
Effects Section .........................................................................................................30
About the Effect Expansion Board..................................................................................30
Connecting Effects.............................................................................................................30
Chapter 2 Basic Operation .....................................................31
Before You Begin .....................................................................................................31
Turning On the Power......................................................................................................31
If You Have Trouble Understanding Displays or Operations....................................31
Setting the Internal Clock.................................................................................................31
Before You Finish Operations ..................................................................................32
Saving the Performance to Disk (Song Store) ...............................................................32
Turning Off the Power......................................................................................................32
Restarting............................................................................................................................33
Basic Operations on the VS-1680............................................................................33
Display Each of the Condition Menus ...........................................................................34
Selecting Pages Contained in Functions and Settings .................................................35
Select the Setting You Want to Change..........................................................................35
Change the Settings Values .............................................................................................35
Execute the Operation ......................................................................................................35
Switching Track Conditions......................................................................................36
Changing the Current Time......................................................................................36
Moving to the Beginning or End of the Performance ..................................................36
Storing a Time Location ...........................................................................................36
Using the Locator ..............................................................................................................37
Using Markers ...................................................................................................................38
Storing Mixer Settings ..............................................................................................39
Recording the Current Condition of the Mixer (Scene)...............................................40
Making Mixer Settings Automatically (EZ Routing) ...................................................41
7
CONTENTS
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording ...........................................58
Recording.................................................................................................................58
Items Necessary for Multi-Track Recording ................................................................58
Creating a New Song (Song New) ..................................................................................58
General Course of the Recording Process ..............................................................60
Connecting Instruments ...........................................................................................60
Recording to the Tracks ...........................................................................................61
Saving a Recorded Performance (Song Store)........................................................63
Recording Over a Portion of a Performance (Punch-In/Punch-Out) ........................63
Using the RECORD Button (Manual Punch-In 1) ........................................................63
Using the Foot switch (Manual Punch-In 2)..................................................................64
Specifying Beforehand the Location for Rerecording (Auto Punch-In) ....................64
Repeatedly Recording Over the Same Area (Loop Recording)..................................66
Recording to Other Tracks (Overdubbing) ...............................................................68
Recording on V-Track 2....................................................................................................68
Using Effects ............................................................................................................69
Applying Effects to the Playback ....................................................................................69
Applying Effects While Recording (Send/Return) ......................................................71
Applying Effects While Recording (Insert) ...................................................................72
Recording Digital Signals .........................................................................................74
Items Necessary for Digital Recording ..........................................................................74
Make the Digital Connections .........................................................................................74
Match the Sample Rates ...................................................................................................74
In Order to Make a Digital Connection with Your CD Player ...................................74
Select the Master Clock.....................................................................................................75
Adjusting the Tone (Equalizer).................................................................................75
Combining the Contents of Tracks (Track Bouncing) ..............................................77
Applying Reverb While Track Bouncing.......................................................................78
Creating a Master Tape ...........................................................................................80
To Record to a Cassette Tape...........................................................................................80
Recording with DAT and MD Recorders ......................................................................80
Protecting Songs (Song Protect)..............................................................................81
Protecting Performances ..................................................................................................82
To Remove Song Protect ..................................................................................................82
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)....83
About Editing Operations .........................................................................................83
Track Edit ...........................................................................................................................83
Repeating Performance Data (Track Copy)...................................................................83
Moving Performance Data (Track Move) ......................................................................85
Exchanging Performance Data Between Tracks (Track Exchange) ...........................86
Inserting a Blank Space Into Performance Data (Track Insert)...................................87
Deleting Performance Data (Track Cut) ........................................................................88
Erasing Performance Data (Track Erase) .......................................................................89
Modifying the Playback Time of the Performance Data (Track Time Compression/Expansion)..90
Naming Tracks (Track Name) .........................................................................................91
Copying Performance Data from Other Songs (Track Import) ..................................92
Phrase Edit...............................................................................................................93
Repeating Phrases (Phrase Copy) ...................................................................................93
Moving Phrases (Phrase Move) ......................................................................................96
Adjusting the Beginning of the Phrase Sound (Trim In) .............................................97
Adjusting the Ending of the phrase Sound (Trim Out) ...............................................98
Deleting Phrases (Phrase Delete) ....................................................................................99
Dividing Phrases (Phrase Split).....................................................................................100
8
CONTENTS
Creating New Phrases (Phrase New) ...........................................................................101
Naming Phrases (Phrase Name) ...................................................................................102
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)....................103
Composition of the Effects .....................................................................................103
Connecting the Effects ...........................................................................................103
Changing the Source Sound Itself (Insert)...................................................................103
Inserting with Input and Track Channels....................................................................104
Inserting an Effect into the Master Block.....................................................................105
Adding the Sound with the Effect Applied to the Direct Sound (Send/Return) ..106
Adjusting the Balance of the Overall Effect Send Level ............................................108
Selecting Effects (Patch)........................................................................................108
Creating New Effects Sounds ................................................................................109
When Saving to User Patches ........................................................................................110
When Storing to a Scene.................................................................................................110
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive ............................................111
Connecting the Zip Drive........................................................................................111
Initializing the Disk (Drive Initialize)........................................................................111
Checking Disk Reliability...............................................................................................113
Saving Performance Data to a Zip Drive (Song Copy) ..........................................113
Saving a Song to a Single Disk (Playable)....................................................................114
To Load Data from Disks (Drive Select) ......................................................................116
When You Cannot Save a Song to a Single Disk (Archives).....................................117
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive .........................................120
Connecting the CD-R Drive....................................................................................120
Creating an Audio CD ............................................................................................120
Items Necessary for Creating an Audio CD................................................................120
Creating a Master Data...................................................................................................120
Writing Songs to CD-R Discs.........................................................................................121
Auditioning (Test Listening) Songs Written to CDs (CD Player Function)............123
Writing Additional Songs to the Disc ..........................................................................124
Arranging and Writing Multiple Songs to Disc..........................................................124
Saving Songs to CD-R Discs (CD-R Backup)........................................................125
Items Necessary for CD-R Backup................................................................................125
Saving Songs to CD-R Discs ..........................................................................................125
Loading Songs From CD-R Discs..................................................................................126
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices.........................................128
Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers ....................................................................128
Items Necessary for Synchronization...........................................................................128
Master and Slave .............................................................................................................128
Using MTC .......................................................................................................................128
Using the Sync Track (Master) ......................................................................................131
Using the Tempo Map (Master) ....................................................................................133
Various Operations Related to Synchronized Operation..........................................135
Use with a MIDI Controller .....................................................................................138
Switching Track Status ...................................................................................................138
Switching Scenes .............................................................................................................138
Switching Effects .............................................................................................................138
Adjusting Effects .............................................................................................................138
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup) ............140
Before Backing Up with DAT..................................................................................140
Items Necessary for DAT Backup.................................................................................140
About the Devices Used in DAT Backup.....................................................................140
9
CONTENTS
Saving Song Data to a DAT Recorder (Backup)....................................................141
Loading Performance Data from a DAT Recorder (Recover) ................................143
When Cancelling the Recover Operation ....................................................................144
Checking Names of Saved Performance Data (Name) .........................................145
Checking the Recording Condition of Saved Performance Data (Verify)...............146
Chapter 10 Compatibility ......................................................148
Disk Compatibility...................................................................................................148
VS-880 → VS-1680 ...........................................................................................................148
VS-1680 → VS-880 ...........................................................................................................148
VS-840 ↔ VS-1680 ...........................................................................................................148
Loading VS-880/840 Performance Data into the VS-1680 (Song Import) .............148
Converting VS-1680 Song Data for Use with the VS-880 (Song Export)...............150
How to Install the Hard Disk Which was Formatted with the VS-880EX to the VS-1680 ..151
How to Recover the Archived Song Data....................................................................151
Loading VS-880EX Performance Data into the VS-1680 (Song Import)................151
Converting VS-1680 Song Data for Use with the VS-880/VS-880EX (Song Export)....152
When VS-880, VS-1680 and VS-880EX Format Song Data are Existed in a Disk.......153
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions ............................154
Previewing Techniques (Preview)..........................................................................154
Using [TO] [THRU] [FROM] .........................................................................................154
Using [SCRUB] ................................................................................................................154
Recalling a Specific Location (Jump) .....................................................................156
Recording Mixer Settings (Auto Mix)......................................................................156
Preparations for Auto Mix .............................................................................................157
Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 1 (Snapshot) .................................................157
Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 2 (Gradation)................................................157
Recording Fader Operations (Realtime) ......................................................................158
If You Don’t Want to Record Fader Settings (Mask Fader) ......................................159
Playing Back the Auto Mix ............................................................................................159
Making Changes to Auto Mix (Micro Edit).................................................................159
Disabling Auto Mix Only on Specified Channels.......................................................160
Disabling Auto Mix on All Channels ...........................................................................160
Undoing Recordings and Edits (Undo)...................................................................160
Recording and Editing Operations Which Can Be Undone (Undo)........................161
Canceling the Last-Performed Undo (Redo)...............................................................161
Cancelling Only the Very Last-Performed Operation ..............................................162
Listening Only to a Specific Channel (Solo/Mute)..................................................162
About Solo Mode.............................................................................................................163
Simultaneously Adjusting a Stereo Source (Stereo Link) ......................................164
Adjusting the Faders.......................................................................................................164
Adjusting the Pan............................................................................................................165
Mixing In a Stereo Source (Stereo In)....................................................................165
Changing the Pitch During Playback (Vari-Pitch)...................................................166
Directly Inputting Alphanumeric Characters...........................................................167
Directly Entering Numerals (Numeric Keys)..............................................................167
Directly Entering Letters of the Alphabet....................................................................167
Sounding the Metronome.......................................................................................167
Using an External MIDI Sound Source to Play the Metronome...............................168
When the Disk Has Little Remaining Space ..........................................................169
Deleting Only Unneeded Performance Data (Song Optimize) ................................169
Deleting One Song of Performance Data (Song Erase)..............................................170
Changing the Name of Performance Data (Song Name).......................................171
Rearranging the Order of Song Data (Song Arrange)............................................171
10
CONTENTS
Dividing Performance Data Into Two Parts (Song Split) ........................................172
Connecting Performance Data (Song Combine)....................................................173
Adjusting the Levels for Each Track.......................................................................174
When Using Balanced Inputs.................................................................................174
Determining Output ................................................................................................175
MONITOR Jacks..............................................................................................................175
AUX Jacks.........................................................................................................................176
DIGITAL OUT Connectors ............................................................................................176
DIRECT OUT ...................................................................................................................177
Confirming That a Drive is Not Damaged (Drive Check) .......................................177
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions ....180
Switching the Display Content ...............................................................................180
Upper Part of the Display ..............................................................................................180
Center Part of the Display..............................................................................................180
Lower Part of the Display ..............................................................................................181
System Settings for Each Song (System Parameters) ..........................................184
Having the Volume Change as Soon as the Faders are Moved................................184
Holding Level Meter Peaks ...........................................................................................185
Checking the Remaining Disk Space............................................................................186
When Using the Foot Switch .........................................................................................186
Overall Settings for the VS-1680 (Global Parameters) ..........................................187
Holding the function of [SHIFT] ...................................................................................187
Using the Numeric Keys ................................................................................................187
Displaying Measures and Beats ....................................................................................188
Changing the VS-1680’s SCSI ID Number...................................................................188
When There Is No Hard Disk Installed........................................................................189
Changing the Level at Which the Peak Indicator Lights...........................................189
Searching Markers Using [PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] .................................................189
Adjusting the Button Sensitivity ...................................................................................190
Stopping the Cooling Fan ..............................................................................................190
Overall Settings for Playback and Recording (Play/Record Parameters) ..............191
Constantly Monitoring the Input Source.....................................................................191
Stopping Automatically .................................................................................................191
If Noise Between Segments is Obtrusive .....................................................................191
Scrolling the Waveform..................................................................................................192
Resetting Mixer and System Settings to Their Original State ................................192
To Have a Message Displayed at a Specified Time ..............................................193
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples) 194
Synchronizing the Operations of Two VS-1680 Units ............................................194
Settings for the Master VS-1680.....................................................................................194
Settings for the Slave VS-1680 .......................................................................................195
Synchronizing with Cakewalk Pro Audio (MMC)....................................................197
Settings for the VS-1680..................................................................................................198
Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio .................................................................................199
Making Digital Connections with Cakewalk ..............................................................199
Using an External MIDI Device to Adjust the Mixer (Compu Mix)..........................202
The Correspondence Between MIDI Channels and Controller Numbers ..............202
Preparations for Compu Mix.........................................................................................204
Recording with Compu Mix ..........................................................................................204
Synchronizing with Video Equipment.....................................................................206
Using External Effects Devices ..............................................................................207
Index .......................................................................................208
11
Preparations
About the Package Contents
The following items are included with the VS-1680.
Please check to make sure you have all the items.
• VS-1680
• AC cord
• Quick Start
• Owner’s Manual (this manual)
• Appendices
Main Features
The Latest in Compact Home Studio
Environments
The VS-1680 retains all of the features of Roland’s VS880 workstation; a revolution in the world of the home
studio, with the disk recorder, digital mixer, and multi
effects systematically and more organically integrated.
From when you start picking mics to when you actually record to mixdown, adding effects, and on to creating the master data for playing through a PA or mastering on a CD, you can get a handle on every aspect
of the recording process with the VS-1680 line in your
home studio.
Disk Recorder Section
The digital disk recorder section provides sixteen
playback tracks, and allows eight tracks to be recorded
simultaneously. Each track features sixteen virtual
tracks (V-tracks), providing a total of 256 tracks. This
means that you can record multiple takes, make temporary mixes when editing, and create songs that
require numerous tracks, all with room to spare.
The VS-1680’s recording functions were designed for
use with professional digital equipment (DAT
recorders, digital mixers, digital effects, etc.). You can
record and edit with top-quality sound, and lose none
of that quality in the playback.
You can instantly find the location of sections in a
song you want to hear repeatedly or places that you
wish to record over (Locator) by placing marks at such
points (Marker). These Markers are recalled by simple
procedure, and you will never wait for any rewinding
or fast-forwarding time.
12
Sounds are organized in Phrases, and copying, moving, and inserting these phrase units (with Phrase
Edit), and other editing processes are all possible with
the VS-1680. For example, you can create “break
beats” by copying a four-measure drum pattern any
number of times, or have the same chorus both at the
beginning and end of a song.
The VS-1680 uses “non-destructive editing.” This
allows you to cancel and recover up to 999 previous
recording and editing operations (Undo/Redo).
The internal clock runs battery power, so it continues
to function, even after the power is turned off. This
allows manage your songs by “time stamp,” the time
and date of recording that is registered in the song
data.
Digital Mixer Section
You can store all mixer settings, including fader levels,
pan, and effects. Stored settings can be recalled very
simply, making it convenient in adjusting balances
during mixdown and comparing mixes with effects.
Changes in settings over time, such as fader levels and
pan, can also be stored (Auto Mix), so you can realize
easy fade-ins and fade-outs in your mixes.
You can easily make the most appropriate mixer condition settings, including those for recording, track
bouncing, and mixdown (EZ Routing).
Effects Section
The VS-1680 features the optional VS8F-2 effect expansion board. Up to two of these effect expansion boards
can be installed in the VS-1680. With the VS8F-2 effect
installed in the VS-1680, up to 4 high-quality stereo
effects will be available for your use.
The VS8F-2 provides not only basic effects such as
reverb and delay, but also effects ideal for vocals and
guitar (such as guitar amp simulator) and even special
effects such as RSS. The way in which each of these
effects are organized by the 34 “algorithms” so that
you can create new sounds easily.
The VS8F-2 provides 210 read only effects setting
(Preset Patches) which designed for various uses. In
addition, the VS8F-2 provides 200 read and write
effects setting (User Patches) for changing and saving
that contents. You can instantly switch between a variety of effects simply by selecting a patch.
Preparations
Simple Operation
Substantial Options
The VS-1680 can be operated as easily as conventional
multi-track recorders. You will be able to enjoy the
advantages of home studio from the day that you purchase it.
HDP88 Serie’s:
An internal 2.5-inch IDE hard disk. Having this internal hard disk installed makes the VS-1680 system compact and easy to transport. Furthermore, there is no
need to make complex settings and no problems with
faulty connections (unlike those which could occur
when an external disk is used). We recommend that
you install an internal hard disk when using the VS1680.
The VS-1680 maintains the well-known graphics
(icons) made famous by Roland’s VG-8 and V-Drums.
The large, full-dot graphic display is backlit and
inclined, so it is easy to read when used on stage or
wherever high visibility is required.
Connectivity
A wide variety of connectors and jacks are provided,
including two balanced XLR connectors. It features a
wide input sensitivity range, from mic level (-50 dBu)
to line level (+4 dBu), and phantom power can be
applied, allowing you to plug in externally-powered
condenser mics.
There are six sets of balanced input jacks, handling a
wide input sensitivity range, from line level (+4 dBu)
to mic level (-50 dBu). Furthermore, you can choose
either the high-input (GUITAR (Hi-Z)) jack for directly
plugging in an electric guitar, or the INPUT 8 jack.
Besides the RCA phono type (stereo) MASTER jacks,
the (stereo) AUX A and AUX B jacks, and (stereo)
MONITOR jacks are provided. You can monitor the
effect send and other outputs without affecting the
MASTER Out in any way.
* For simultaneous recording or playback of a number of
tracks, for getting more out of the available hard disk
space, and in order to get the fullest performance in general from the VS-1680, we recommend using the
HDP88-2100.
CD-R Drive (designated by Roland):
A CD-R drive connected with a SCSI connector. With
this drive, you can write songs created on the VS-1680
as well as create your own original audio CDs.
Additionally, you can use it for backing up songs to
CD-R discs.
VS8F-2:
An effect expansion board that can be installed in the
VS-1680. You can install two of these boards, which
lets you add two stereo effects, for a total of up to four
stereo effects.
* The VS8F-1 effect expansion board is for use
with the VS-880. It cannot be used in the VS-1680.
The VS-1680 provides both coaxial and optical digital
I/O connectors. With these, you can make digital connections with popular consumer electronic devices
such as CD players, DAT recorders, MD recorders,
and so on.
A SCSI connector (DB-25 type) is also provided, allowing you to connect to external SCSI devices such as the
Zip drive and the CD-R drive.
MIDI IN and MIDI OUT/THRU connectors are also
provided. You can synchronize the VS-1680 with an
external MIDI sequencer, use the MIDI sequencer to
control the VS-1680’s mixer, sound an external MIDI
sound generator with the metronome, and more.
Besides tracks for recording audio signals, the VS-1680
has sync track for storing MIDI clock message. You
can even synchronize MIDI sequencers that are not
compatible with MTC (MIDI Time Code) or MMC
(MIDI Machine Control).
13
Front and Rear Panels
Mixer Section
fig.00-03(mixer.eps)
7 8
1
2
9
3
10
4
11
5
12
6
13
1.
PEAK Indicators
These indicators allow you to confirm the sound level
input at the input jacks (1–8). They help you to determine the correct input level when adjusting the
INPUT knobs. You will need to specify the level at
which the indicators light beforehand (p. 61). The indicators are set at the factory to -6 dB.
2.
INPUT Knobs
These knobs adjust the sensitivity of the input jacks
(1–8). Turn a knob fully to the right for mic level (-50
dBu), and fully to the left for line level (+4 dBu).
14
3.
SELECT/CH EDIT
(Select/Channel Edit) buttons
Use these buttons when you wish to change input
mixer settings and to change input channels. The currently selected channel’s indicators are lit.
1–8:
Each channel (1–8)
DIGITAL:
Digital input
ST IN:
Stereo in
EFFECT 1/3 RTN: Effect 1 Return
EFFECT 2/4 RTN: Effect 2 Return
When you press these buttons while holding down the
STATUS button, you can select which source to be
recorded and the channel on which that source is
recorded.
When numerics are combined with alphabetical characters ([NUMERIC/ASCII]), alphabetical characters
can be input directly (Song Name, etc.).
Front and Rear Panels
4.
SELECT/CH EDIT
(Select/Channel Edit) buttons
Use these buttons when you wish to change track
mixer settings and to change track channels. The currently selected channel’s indicators are lit.
1–15/16: Each channel (1–15/16)
When you press these buttons while holding down the
STATUS button, you can select a particular track to rerecorded to (Track Bouncing).
When numerics are combined with alphabetical characters ([NUMERIC/ASCII]), alphabetical characters
can be input directly (Song Name, etc.).
5.
STATUS Buttons
These buttons switch the status of each track. The current status is shown by the button indicator.
SOURCE (orange):
The input source or track assigned to the channel is
being output.
REC (blinking red):
Recording is selected for the track assigned to the
channel. During playback, the track data is normally output.
REC (blinking red and orange):
Recording is selected for the track assigned to the
channel. During playback, you will be able to listen to the track.
PLAY (green):
The track assigned to the channel will playback.
OFF (off):
The channel is muted (silent).
When pressed in combination with the SELECT/CH
EDIT button, this selects the source or track to be
assigned to a track for recording.
6.
11. EDIT/SOLO button
Press this button to make block settings for the master
section of the mixer.
To use the Solo function to monitor only a specific
channel, press this button while holding down the
SELECT/CH EDIT button.
12. FADER/MUTE Button
Pressing this button alternately assigns each channel’s
input mixer and track mixer to the fader for that channel. The button indicator shows the current status.
To mute the channel, press this button while holding
down the SELECT/CH EDIT button.
13. Master Fader
Use this fader to adjust the overall output level.
Channel Faders
Use these faders to adjust the volume level of each
channel or track.
7.
MONITOR Knob
This adjusts the volume level output from the MONITOR jacks.
8.
PHONES Knob
This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones.
9.
AUTOMIX Button
This button switches the Auto Mix function on and off.
The button indicator lights when Auto Mix is on.
10. EZ ROUTING Button
This button opens the EZ Routing screen.
15
Front and Rear Panels
Recorder Section
fig.00-04(recorder.eps)
7
1
9
2
8
10
11
12
3
4
13
14–17
18
5
19
6
1.
Graphic Display
4.
PREVIEW button
This displays various data related to the current status
of the VS-1680 during recording, playback, editing,
changing the setting, and so on.
Press this button to use the Preview function that
plays back a specific length before and after the current location.
2.
5.
Function Button
This button is used to switch the display screen and to
execute operations.
The function assigned to each button appears in the
bottom of the display.
3.
PAGE (JUMP) Button
This button switches pages on screens consist of several pages.
When the [SHIFT] button is held down at the same
time, the Locator Jump screen is displayed.
16
LOCATOR/SCENE Button
Pressing this button allows you to store or recall
Locators and Markers or to store or recall Scenes (the
mixer settings).
PREVIOUS:
Recalls the next start or end point of a phrase.
Pressed with [SHIFT], this button recalls the previous Marker.
NEXT:
Recalls the following start or end point of a phrase.
Pressed with [SHIFT], this button recalls the next
Marker.
TAP:
This button is pressed to set Markers.
Front and Rear Panels
BANK/9:
Pressing this with the LOCATOR buttons (1–8)
selects the Locator bank.
SCENE/0:
This is pressed when storing, recalling, and deleting Scenes.
CLEAR (Back Space):
This button deletes Locators, Markers, and Scenes.
NUMERICS/ASCII:
Press this when you want to use the STATUS and
LOCATOR buttons for 10-key entry of Western
numerals.
1–8:
These select the locator or Scene.
6.
Transport Control Buttons
These buttons are used to operate the recorder.
ZERO: This returns the current time to
“00h00m00s00” (zero return).
REW:
The current time is moved back only
while this button is held down. This corresponds to the rewind button on a tape
recorder.
FF:
While the button is held down, the current time is moved forward. This corresponds to the fast-forward button on a
tape recorder.
STOP: Stops recording or playback of the song.
PLAY: Starts recording or playback from the current time.
REC:
Press this button to record a song.
7.
CONTRAST Knob
Use this to adjust the brightness of the display screen.
8.
VARI PITCH button
Press this button when you wish to change the playback pitch (Vari Pitch function).
9.
MIDI/DISK Indicator
This indicator lights green when MIDI messages are
being received, and red when data is being written or
read on the disk drive. If both of these are occurring,
the indicator lights orange.
10. EXT SYNC (External Sync) Button
11. CURSOR Buttons
Normally (i.e. in Play Condition), this dial is used to
move the current time. When making settings (i.e. in
Edit Condition), this dial is used to modify parameter
values.
12. PLAY (DISPLAY) Button
Press this button to return to the screen that appears
when the VS-1680 is turned on (normal playback status).
13. TIME/VALUE Dial
In normal (playback) status, this dial adjusts the time
of playback.
This is used to change the settings values for each
parameter when settings are changed.
14. LOOP Button
This button turns Loop Recording on and off. Pressed
with the LOCATOR button, it specifies the range to be
recorded in Loop Recording.
15. AUTO PUNCH Button
This button turns Auto Punch-In Recording on and
off. Pressed with the LOCATOR button, it specifies the
range to be recorded in Auto Punch-In Recording.
16. UNDO (REDO) Button
Press this button to cancel a recording or editing step
that you have made (Undo function). Pressed with
[SHIFT], this button cancels the last performed Undo
function (Redo function).
17. SHIFT Button
This button is pressed in conjunction with other buttons to access additional functions of those buttons.
18. ENTER/YES Button
This is pressed to execute the current operation or
select the current screen.
19. EXIT/NO Button
This is pressed to cancel the current operation or exit
the current screen.
Press this button to select the device, whether the VS1680 or an external MIDI device, to act as the master or
main controlling device. With the VS-1680 selected as
the master, the external MIDI device functions as the
slave unit; with the external MIDI device selected as
the master, the VS-1680 functions as the slave unit.
17
Front and Rear Panels
Rear Panel
fig.00-05(rearpanel.eps)
13
1
1.
2
3
4
POWER Switch
This switch turns power of the VS-1680 on and off.
2.
AC IN (AC Inlet)
Connect the included power cable here.
3.
SCSI Connector
This is a DB-25 type SCSI connector for connecting
disk drives such as a Zip disk drive or a CD-R drive.
4.
MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT/THRU)
External MIDI devices (MIDI controllers, MIDI
sequencers, etc.) can be connected here.
IN:
This connector receives MIDI messages. Connect it to the MIDI OUT
connector of the external MIDI device.
OUT/THRU: This connector can be used either as a
MIDI OUT or as a MIDI THRU connector. With the factory settings, it will
function as a MIDI OUT connector,
which means it is set to transmit MIDI
messages.
5.
PHONES Jack
An optional set of headphones can be connected here.
The PHONES jack outputs the same sound as the
MONITOR jack.
18
6 8 10
5 7 9
6.
7.
8.
9.
14
11
15
12
MONITOR Jacks (L, R)
AUX A Jacks (L, R)
AUX B Jacks (L, R)
MASTER OUT Jacks (L,R)
These are output jacks for analog audio signals (RCA
phono type).
With the factory settings, all signals are output from
the MASTER OUT jacks, the output of MONITOR is
the same as that of the MASTER Out, and there is no
output from the AUX (A and B) jacks. The output is
determined by the block settings of the mixer’s master
section and the settings of each channel.
10. FOOT SWITCH Jack
An optional foot switch (such as the DP-2 or the BOSS
FS-5U) can be connected here when you want to control recorder operations, mark point settings, and
punch in/out operations, and so on with a foot switch.
With the factory settings, a foot switch is set to start
and stop the recorder.
Front and Rear Panels
11. DIGITAL Connectors (IN, OUT)
The VS-1680 features both coaxial and optical digital
I/O connectors (conforming to S/P DIF).
IN:
This inputs a digital audio signal (stereo).
You can select either the coaxial input
connection or the optical connection.
OUT:
This outputs a digital audio signal
(stereo). Here you can use both the coaxial connector and the optical connector
simultaneously, and each can carry a different signal.
S/P DIF (Appendices p. 64)
13. GUITAR (Hi-Z) Jack (Guitar)
14. INPUT Jacks (3–8)
15. INPUT Jacks (1–2)
These are input jacks for analog audio signals. INPUT
1 and 2 are XLR connectors, and INPUT 3–8 are 1/4”
phone jacks. On INPUT 8, the GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack, a
1/4” phone type high-impedance jack, can be used
instead of, but not at the same time as the regular
INPUT 8 jack; you may use either type of jack. If
cables are connected to both inputs, the GUITAR (HiZ) jack will take priority. Use the INPUT knobs to
adjust the input sensitivity of each input.
* To record a digital audio signal, it is not sufficient to simply connect a digital audio device to the DIGITAL IN
connector. When inputting a digital audio signal, refer to
“Recording Digital Signals” (p. 74).
* It is not able to input or output analog audio signals.
12. PHANTOM Switch
This turns phantom power (+48 V) on and off. When
the factory settings, it is set to “Off.”
Phantom Power (Appendices p. 64)
* Supplying phantom power to dynamic microphones or
audio playback devices may result in damage to your
equipment. Thoroughly read the owner’s manual of your
microphone, and make sure that the phantom
power switch is set to “Off” unless you are using
a condenser mic that requires phantom power.
* Switching the phantom power on or off while the VS1680 is turned on produces a loud noise that can damage
amps and speakers. Turn the phantom power on or off
only when the VS-1680 is turned off.
* When nothing is plugged into the INPUT 1–2 jacks, make
sure that the phantom power switch is set to “Off.” Also,
we recommend that turn the INPUT knob fully to the
“LINE” to recording with as high sound quality as possible.
19
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
This chapter explains basic concepts, internal structure, and basic operation that you will need to know in
order to operate the VS-1680. Please read this chapter
thoroughly to gain a better understanding of the VS1680.
Saving and Managing Data
Ex. 4: When the disk drive is 8.2 GB, and the partition size is 1000 MB.
fig.01-04(partition4.eps)
Disk Drive
(8.2GB)
Partition 1
(1000MB)
Partition 2
(1000MB)
Partition 3
(1000MB)
Partition 4
(1000MB)
Partition 5
(1000MB)
Partition 6
(1000MB)
Partition 7
(1000MB)
Partition 8
(1000MB)
Managing Disk Contents (Partitioning)
The VS-1680 saves all of the data such as — performance data, mixing data, system data, etc. — on the
disk drive. Thus, it cannot operate without either having an internal disk or being connected to a Zip drive
with a SCSI connector. Furthermore, the hard disk or
Zip drive used by the VS-1680 cannot be used by
another device.
The VS-1680 is able to manage which 500 MB, 1000 MB
or 2000 MB of disk space at once. If you use a disk
drive with a capacity that is larger than this, you will
need to divide it into two or more.
Each of these area is refered as the “partition.” Up to 8
partitions can be created in one disk drive. For creating songs in a enough space, we recommend you to
set the partitions to 2000 MB.
Ex. 1: When the disk drive is 810 MB, and the partition size is 1000 MB.
fig.01-01(partition1.eps)
Partition
(810MB)
Ex. 2: When the disk drive is 1.4 GB, and the partition size is 1000 MB.
fig.01-02(partition2.eps)
Disk Drive
(1.4GB)
Partition 2
(400MB)
Ex. 3: When the disk drive is 1.4 GB, and the partition size is 2000 MB.
fig.01-03(partition3.eps)
Disk Drive
(1.4GB)
Partition
(1.4GB)
20
Ex. 5: When the disk drive is 8. 2 GB, and the partition size is 2000 MB.
fig.01-05(partition5.eps)
Disk Drive
(8.2GB)
Partition 1
(2000MB)
Partition 2
(2000MB)
Partition 3
(2000MB)
Partition 4
(2000MB)
Partition 5
(200MB)
Disk Drive
(810MB)
Partition 1
(1000MB)
unusable
(200MB)
Each partition on the VS-1680’s disk drive is treated as
an independent drive, with each partition automatically given a partition number (0–7). When a single hard
disk has multiple partitions, you can specify which
partition of which drive will be used (p.116). This disk
drive partition currently used is referred to as the current drive.
* If you wish to use hard disks or song data on both the VS1680 and the VS-880, because of factors such as differing
partition sizes and numbers of tracks, there will be limitations as to what you can do. For more detailed information, please see “Compatibility” (p.148).
* The VS-1680 accepts installation of Roland HDP88
serie’s hard disks (hard disk drive units). For simultaneous recording or playback of a number of tracks, for getting more out of the available hard disk space, and in
order to get the fullest performance in general from the
VS-1680, we recommend using the HDP88-2100.
The Location Where a Performance is
Recorded (Song)
The location where a performance data is recorded is
refered to as the song. For example on a cassette MTR,
this would correspond to cassette tape. Up to 200
songs can be created in each partition. Normally, you
should set the partition size at 2000 MB. When dealing
with large numbers of songs at the same time, or when
you want to use the data on the VS-880 as well, setting
the partition size to 1000 MB is recommended. The
song currently being recorded, played back, or edited
is referred to as the current song. Following data are
included in a song.
Takes:
Phrases:
• All data recorded on V-tracks
• MIDI clocks of the sync track
• Points specified within songs (locator, marker,
punch-in/out points, loop-in/out points) (p. 36)
• Scenes (mixer settings)
The data recorded to the disk is simply
called a take. This recorded data includes
wave data and time stamp (time and date
imprint) information. With a new recording, each track consists of one take.
Additionally, even when you record
material onto tracks that already have
takes on them, the previous takes are not
deleted (overwritten).
The data that defines which take is
played back, including the start and stop
times of that playback is called a phrase.
The length of a phrase may just be the
length of a take, or a phrase may consist
of part of a take. Additionally, you can
use any number of phrases from the same
take, and have a phrase played back
repeatedly as a sort of “break beats.”
This is displayed as one box in the
playlist.
fig.01-06(phrase1.eps)
• Vari Pitch settings (p. 166)
Take 1
• System settings (system, MIDI, disk, sync, Scene) (p. 184)
• Effect settings
Phrase 1
Track 1
• Auto Mix Data
Sources, Tracks, and Channels
On the VS-1680, the recorder section and mixer section
use term sources, tracks, and channels. These terms
may appear similar to each other, and will be confusing unless their differences are clarified.
Source:
A signal which is input to the mixer section or recorded in the recorder section.
On the VS-1680, this term refers in particular to the signals of the analog input
jacks (1–8) and the digital in connector.
Track:
A signal that is being input to or output
from the recorder section. It also refers to
the location of a signal that is being
recorded onto or played back from the
hard disk.
Channel: A signal that is being input to or output
from the mixer section. This term refers in
particular to the faders and buttons of the
mixer section on the top panel.
Takes, Phrases, and Playlists
On the VS-1680, data is managed by groups called
takes, phrases, and playlists. Please take a moment
to make sure you understand the differences between
each of these terms.
00h00m10s00
00h00m20s00
Time
fig.01-07(phrase2.eps)
T a k e
Track 1
Phrase 2
00m10s00
2
Phrase 2'
00m20s00
00m30s00
Time
fig.01-08(phrase3.eps)
T a k e
Track 1
Phrase 3
00m10s00
3
Phrase 3'
00m20s00
00m22s00
00m30s00
Time
21
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Playlists:
Data that specifies “which phrases are played back and the order
in which they are played” is called a playlist. The VS-1680 features 256 V-tracks, and a maximum of sixteen tracks that can be
played back simultaneously. In the playlist, the phrases pasted
to each track are displayed as a number of boxes.
About Events
The smallest unit of memory used by the VS-1680 to store recorded results on
disk is called an event. A newly created song is provided approximately 18,000
events.
For each track, one recording pass uses two events. Operations such as punchin/out or track copy also use up events. The number of events that are used up
will fluctuate in a complex way. For example, auto mix (p.153) uses up six events
for each Marker.
Even when your disk has ample free space, one song can use up all the available
events, in which case no more data could be recorded to the song.
Remaining number of Events can be saved with the following procedures. Please
try the most appropriate one with your situation.
● Execute Song Store (p. 32)
Please Execute Song Store if in UNDO condition ([UNDO] indicator is lit.).
Events served for REDO will be released. But please note that you cannot cancel
(REDO) the last UNDO if you once execute STORE.
● Execute Song Optimize (p. 169)
Please execute Song Optimize if you have done a lot of Punch In recording.
Events served for unnecessary audio data will be released. But please note that
you can only do single level UNDO.
● Erase AutoMix data (p. 160)
If you have recorded AutoMix data, erase unnecessary data. Events served for
unnecessary AutoMix data will be released.
About Button Names
There are two groups of buttons referred to as SELECT/CH EDIT
(Select/Channel Edit) buttons. Indications of button groups that are hard to distinguish in the Owner’s Manual are described below.
fig.01-08a(select.eps)
Input Channel
Track Channel
Track
22
Mixer Section
The digital mixer specifies input or output status of the recorder section.
The VS-1680’s mixers include the input mixer, which, in the signal path, is situated before the recording section, the track mixer, which is placed after the
recording section, and the Master Block, which is used in determining which
jacks and connectors output the signals from each of the other mixers.
* For more detailed information about the mixer section, please refer to the “Mixer
Section Block Diagram” (Appendices p. 60).
Signal Flow (Buses)
On the VS-1680, signals flow through buses. buses are shared lines through
which multiple signals can be routed efficiently to multiple tracks or channels. It may be easier to understand this if we use the analogy of water pipes.
For example, the water that is supplied by the water company to your house is
branched to a variety of locations within the house (kitchen, bathroom, toilet,
etc.). The water that is used at each of these locations is then collected into the
sewer, and carried away.
fig.01-09(bus.eps)
Your House
Kitchen Sink
INPUTS
Toilet
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUTS
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT to house
from water line
Bathtub
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
to street
OUTPUT
INPUTS
Water Heater
Bath Sink
Cold Water (Bus)
Drain (Bus)
Hot Water (Bus)
If we think of the VS-1680 as the house, the water being supplied from the water
company corresponds to inputs such as mic or guitar. Some of these inputs are
sent to recording tracks and are recorded. Other portions are sent to the effects,
and reverb or chorus are applied before they are output.
The basic principle of the VS-1680 is that by specifying in this way from where
and to where the common lines run, you can determine which input signals will
be recorded on which track or sent to which effects, and where they will be output.
23
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
RECORDING Bus:
Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus are routed to the recorder section to be
recorded. There are eight channels which can be assigned to the output of the
input mixer, track mixer, and effects (Return). Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus cannot be routed to the MIX bus.
MIX Bus:
Signals assigned to the MIX bus are sent to the MASTER jacks for monitoring. It
has two channels (L and R), and can take output signals from the input mixer,
track mixer, and effects (Return). Signals assigned to the MIX bus cannot be routed to the RECORDING bus.
EFFECT Bus:
Signals assigned to the EFFECT bus are sent to the VS8F-2 to apply effects added
to them. It has four channels (EFX1 L/R, EFX2 L/R), and can process signals
from the input mixer and the track mixer. Signals assigned to the RECORDING
bus as well as the MIX bus can also be routed to the EFFECT bus.
AUX Bus:
Signals assigned to the AUX bus are routed to the AUX jacks to allow addition
mixes for monitoring. This bus features six channels (AUX1 L/R, AUX2 L/R,
AUX3 L/R), and can take signals from the input mixer and the track mixer.
Signals assigned to the RECORDING bus as well as the MIX bus can also be
routed to the AUX bus. This is convenient if, for example, you want to connect
an external effects device, or when you want an addition output separate from
that of the MASTER Out jacks (individual out).
EFFECT bus and AUX bus
If VS-1680 installed two VS8F-2s, AUX bus (AUX1 L/R, AUX2 L/R) works
as EFFECT bus (EFX3 L/R, EFX4 L/R).
24
Input Mixer
Input mixer is placed before the recorder section, and correspond to the external
input sources (INPUT 1–8, DIGITAL IN L/R).
fig.01-10(inpputmix.eps)
Input Mixer (Input channel 1–8, DIGITAL L/R)
INPUT 1
EQ1
Fader1
Pan1
INPUT 2
EQ2
Fader2
Pan2
INPUT 3
EQ3
Fader3
Pan3
REC 1 (Recorder)
INPUT 4
EQ4
Fader4
Pan4
REC 2 (Recorder)
INPUT 5
EQ5
Fader5
Pan5
REC 3 (Recorder)
INPUT 6
EQ6
Fader6
Pan6
REC 4 (Recorder)
INPUT 7
EQ7
Fader7
Pan7
REC 5 (Recorder)
INPUT 8
EQ8
Fader8
Pan8
REC 6 (Recorder)
EQ
DIGITAL
Fader
DIGITAL
Balance
DIGITAL
MIX L/R (MASTER)
REC 7 (Recorder)
DIGITAL IN L/R
REC 8 (Recorder)
The output of each channel is assigned to tracks to be recorded. Channels not
assigned to tracks are output directly from the MASTER jacks. Additionally, the
status of tracks with signals assigned to them when not in record standby (STATUS indicator blinking red), also are output from the MASTER jacks. At this
time, the following signals are assigned to the channel faders.
Channels 1–8:
DIGITAL:
ST IN:
EFFECT 1:
EFFECT 2:
INPUT jacks 1–8
DIGITAL IN connector L/R
Sources assigned to STEREO IN (p. 165)
EFX1 return level or EFX3 return level
EFX2 return level or EFX4 return level
25
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Track Mixer
Track mixer is placed after the recorder section, and correspond to the tracks
(1–15/16).
fig.01-11(trackmix.eps)
Recorder
Track Mixer (Track channel 1–15/16)
REC 1
Track1
EQ1
Fader1
Pan1
REC 2
Track2
EQ2
Fader2
Pan2
REC 3
Track3
EQ3
Fader3
Pan3
REC 1 (Recorder)
REC 4
Track4
EQ4
Fader4
Pan4
REC 2 (Recorder)
REC 5
Track5
EQ5
Fader5
Pan5
REC 3 (Recorder)
REC 6
Track6
EQ6
Fader6
Pan6
REC 4 (Recorder)
REC 7
Track7
EQ7
Fader7
Pan7
REC 5 (Recorder)
REC 8
Track8
EQ8
Fader8
Pan8
REC 6 (Recorder)
Track
9/10
EQ
9/10
Fader
9/10
Balance
9/10
MIX L/R (MASTER)
REC 7 (Recorder)
REC 8 (Recorder)
Track
11/12
EQ
11/12
Fader
11/12
Balance
11/12
Track
13/14
EQ
13/14
Fader
13/14
Balance
13/14
Track
15/16
EQ
15/16
Fader
15/16
Balance
15/16
All of the tracks are output from the MASTER jacks. Additionally, tracks can
also be routed back to the RECORDING bus for overdubbing, or re-rerecording.
In this status, the channel faders 1–15/16 correspond respectively to Tracks
1–15/16.
Switching the Fader Functions
On the VS-1680, it is able to adjust Input mixer or Track mixer by switching the
function of the channel faders on the top panel. Pressing [FADER] on the top
panel toggles between the input mixer and the track mixer. The button indicator
indicates which mixer is currently selected.
fig.01-12(fader.eps)
dark
lit (track mixer is currently selected)
26
Master Block
This selects the jacks or connectors connected to external equipment to which the
output of each mixer is sent.
fig.01-13(mstrblck.eps)
Masterblock
MASTER L, R
EFX1 L/R
EFX2 L/R
AUX1(EFX3) L/R
MASTER L/R
AUX A L/R
AUX B L/R
MONITOR L/R
AUX2(EFX4) L/R
PHONES L/R
AUX3(AUX) L/R
DIGITAL OUT 1
STEREO IN L/R
REC BUS 1–8
DIGITAL OUT 2
Recorder Section
Differences with a Tape-Type MTR
Unlike DAT recorders, which use tape, digital disk recorders record performances (sounds) on a disk, as do MD recorders. Music that is recorded on
disk can be recalled and played back immediately, no matter where it is located
on the disk. This is also obvious from the difference in speed at which you can
move to the beginning of a song on a DAT recorder and on an MD recorder.
The ability to freely move to data regardless of the time or sequence at which it
was recorded is known as random access. In contrast, having to move to data
in the order of the time or sequence at which it was recorded is known as
sequential access.
fig.01-14(random.eps)
27
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Track Minutes and Recording Time
With cassette tape recorders, the amount of time you can record on a tape is predetermined by the length of that tape. Moreover, any unused portion of the tape
is wasted.
fig.01-15(tape.eps)
available recording time
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
00h00m00s00
00h30m00s00
Time
In Case of Tape Recording (using 30-minute tape)
In contrast, with disk recording, although available recording time is determined
by the amount of disk space, only the disk space used in recording is taken, and
beyond that, has no affect on the disk’s remaining free space. Thus, depending
on how you use tracks and phrases, the amount of available recording time will
vary. Thus, this calls for a standard unit corresponding to the time of one continuous monaural signal recorded to one track. This unit is referred to as a track
minute.
fig.01-16(disc.eps)
available recording time
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
00h00m00s00
00h30m00s00
00h40m00s00
Time
In Case of Disk Recording
28
For example, 10 track minutes be used for 10 minutes of monaural recording, 5
minutes of stereo recording, 2 minutes and 30 seconds of recording on four
tracks, and so on.
fig.01-17(tr_min.eps)
Track 1
00h00m00s00
00h10m00s00
Time
Track 1
Track 2
00h00m00s00
00h05m00s00
Time
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
00h00m00s00
00h02m30s00
Time
Auxiliary Tracks for Each Track
The VS-1680 provides 16 playback tracks, and allows 8 tracks to be recorded
simultaneously. Each track is composed from the features 16 supplementary
tracks, each on of which can be used for recording or playback. In other words,
you can record performances containing up to 256 (16 x 16) tracks, and select any
of these auxiliary tracks to played back on a track. These auxiliary tracks are
called V-tracks.
fig.01-18(vtrack.eps)
Track
1
3
5
7
V-track
9
11
13
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 12
13 14
15 16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
* This Owner’s Manual provides a blank virtual track sheet to help you keep track of your
virtual track recordings (p. 72). Feel free to copy the sheet to use when you record.
29
Chapter 1
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Chapter 1 Before You Start (VS-1680 Terminology)
Effects Section
About the Effect Expansion Board
Up to two optional VS8F-2 effect expansion boards can be installed in the VS1680. With two VS8F-2s installed, 4 high-quality stereo effects will be available
simultaneously for your use.
With just one VS8F-2 installed, then you will only be able to use EFFECT A
(EFX1/2). With two VS8F-2s installed, you will be able to use both EFFECT A
(EFX1/2) and EFFECT B (EFX3/4).
EFFECTS
EFFECT A
EFX1
EFX2
EFFECT B
EFX3
EFX4
* To install VS8F-2, please refer to “Installing the Effect Expansion Board” (Quick
Start p. 57).
Connecting Effects
On the VS-1680, there are two ways to connect the effects devices. Please read
and understand these differences described below.
Insert:
The effect is directly added either between each channel’s equalizer and fader or
before the master fader. Connect the effect in this manner if you want to use
effects applied to change the output of the sound itself, such as when using distortion or overdrive effects.
When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the Master Block, that
effect cannot be used in another channel. For example, you insert EFX1 into
Channel 1, then no other channel can access EFX1.
EQ
Fader
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
EFX1
Send/Return:
Besides the RECORDING bus and the MIX bus, the output of each channel can
also be sent to the EFFECT bus. Use this routing with effects such as reverb and
delay, when you want to mix the sound without effects and the sound after
effects have been applied.
EQ
Fader
Pan
EFX Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
EFX1
EFX bus
* The VS8F-1 effect expansion board is for use with the VS-880. It cannot be
used in the VS-1680.
30
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
* The explanations in this manual include illustrations that
depict what should typically be shown by the display.
Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer,
enhanced version of the system (e.g., includes newer
sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not
always match what appears in the manual.
Before You Begin
Turning On the Power
* Once the connections have been completed (Quick Start p.
3), turn on power to your various devices in the order
specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you
risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and
other devices.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down
before switching on power. Even with the volume all the
way down, you may still hear some sound when the power
is switched on, but this is normal, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
1. Turn on the power with the POWER switch on the
rear panel of the VS-1680.
When the VS-1680 starts up properly, the following
display will appear.
* When you turn on the power of the VS-1680, the disk drive
must be recognized and certain required data must be
loaded. Thus, it takes a short while for the unit to start up.
fig.02-01(default.eps)
If You Have Trouble Understanding
Displays or Operations
If you are unfamiliar with what is displayed on a
screen or find you are having difficulty understanding
a certain procedure, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. This
allows you to return immediately to the screen that
appears when the power is turned on. Try whatever
procedure you were working on from the beginning
once more.
• If an operation has been performed incorrectly or
cannot be executed correctly, an error message
appears in the display. When this occurs, please
refer to “Error Messages” (Appendices p. 13), and
perform the specified measure.
• If even after you perform an operation using the prescribed procedure the result differs from that stated
in Quick Start or in the Owner’s Manual, please refer
to “Troubleshooting” (Appendices p. 6).
• If the above steps do not resolve your problem, contact t a nearby Roland Service Center, or authorised
Roland distributor.
Setting the Internal Clock
The VS-1680 features an internal clock. When you
record a performance, the “time stamp,” or the time,
day, and month of recording is entered automatically. This makes for more convenient management of
recordings by day/time and order. When you turn on
the power for the first time after purchase of your VS1680, use the following procedure to set the time and
date first.
* The internal clock is battery-powered. Once you set this,
then repeating this step no longer be necessary whenever
the VS-1680 is turned on. However, if for any reason the
time setting is ever in error, use the same steps to reset the
clock.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (DATE)]. If “DATE” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “DATE” is displayed, and then press [F2 (DATE)].
2. Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
3. Raise the volume of the audio devices to appropriate levels.
31
Chapter 2
This chapter explains the basic operation of the VS1680. This covers all of the fundamental processes,
including recording and editing, so please read and
understand this chapter.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the values for each of the settings.
fig.02-01a(date)
Before You Finish Operations
Saving the Performance to Disk (Song Store)
Song data that you recorded or edited will be lost if
you simply turn the power off. Thus, you must execute the Shutdown procedure before turning the
power off.
When you switch songs or change disks, a message
will ask you to confirm whether the song should be
saved (STORE Current?) (p. 33).
Additionally, the contents of a recorded performance
can be lost because of unforeseen accidents, or even if
there is an accidental power failure or power outage.
Once lost, the contents of a recorded performance
cannot be restored to the previous conditions. To
avoid this from happening, use the following procedure to save your songs to the disk drive.
Current Song (Appendices p. 63)
Date Edit
This sets the date — year, month, and day — in the
Western format.
Date Format
This selects the way the date is displayed.
mm/dd/yyyy:
Month/Day/Year
dd/mm/yyyy:
Day/Month/Year
yyyy/mm/dd:
Year/Month/Day
MMM. dd, ’YY:
Month/Day/Year
dd MMM ’YY:
Day/Month/Year
Time Edit
This sets the current time displayed in a 24-hour format.
At this point, the function buttons work as follows.
[F4 (Set)]:
Sets the date and time.
[F5 (Alarm)]:
Sets the alarm function (p. 193).
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen without setting
the date and time.
4. After setting the date and time, press [F4 (Set)] to
synchronize it with the time signal.
The set time becomes effective immediately.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
The initial display reappears.
* When handling important song data, or when using the
VS-1680 for extended periods, we strongly recommended
you to execute the Song Store procedure frequently.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
2. ”STORE OK?” appears in the display. Press [YES].
If the song is saved properly, the initial display
reappears. If you wish to cancel the saving, press
[NO].
Turning Off the Power
The contents of any recorded performance will be lost
if you simply turn the power off. This may also result
in damage to the hard disk. To safely turn off the
power and be sure that your recorded performances
are saved, always be sure to follow the shutdown
procedure when you finish working with the VS1680.
Shutdown (Appendices p. 64)
1. While holding down [SHIFT], press
[SHUT/EJECT (STOP)].
2. ”SHUTDOWN/EJECT?” appears in the display.
Press [YES].
3. ”STORE Current?” then appears in the display. If
you wish to save the current song, press [YES]. If
you do not wish to save it (if you want to undo
the contents of recording editing), press [NO]. If
you have selected a demo song, press [NO].
32
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
5. Turn down the volume of your audio equipment.
6. Turn off the power of the audio equipment.
7. Turn off the power of the VS-1680 with the
POWER switch on the rear panel.
* After the power is turned off, the momentum of the hard
disk causes it to continue spinning for a short while. Any
physical shock to the unit during this time may damage
the hard disk. Avoid moving the VS-1680 with a hard
disk installed for at least 30 seconds after turning off the
power.
If “STORE Current?” is Displayed
When you begin to execute the various operations
such as shutdown, the message “STORE Current?”
(Save the current song?) is displayed. This message
asks you whether you wish to save the currently
selected song to the disk drive. If you wish to save the
song before continuing with the shutdown, press
[YES]. If you want to proceed with the shutdown
without saving the song, press [NO].
If you press [YES] in response to the “STORE
Current?” message when Song Protect is on, or when
if you have selected a demo song, the message “Song
Protected” is displayed, and you will be unable to save
the song. Before editing a song, set Song Protect to
“Off” (p. 82). Otherwise, press [NO].
Restarting
You can restart the VS-1680 without turning off the
rear panel POWER switch. This is convenient when
switching disks in drives (such as the Zip drive) connected to the VS-1680’s SCSI connector. Use the following procedure.
1. Perform the shutdown procedure as described in
“Turning Off the Power” (p. 32).
2. Confirm that “PowerOFF/RESTART” appears in
the display.
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [RESTART
(PLAY)].
This restarts the VS-1680.
Chapter 2
4. When shut down has been completed properly,
“PowerOFF/RESTART” appears in the display.
Basic Operations on the
VS-1680
The VS-1680 features a wide variety of abilities (functions) and settings (parameters). These are organized
by type, function, operation, and so on. The major
organizational grouping within the song is referred to
as a condition. A list of the different conditions
described below.
Play Condition:
Here you can perform normal playback/recording.
The VS-1680 is put in Play condition whenever the
power is turned on.
Input Mixer Condition:
This is the condition in which input mixer-related settings are made.
Track Mixer Condition:
This is the condition in which settings related to the
track mixer are made.
Master Block Condition:
This is where you make settings for the mixer’s Master Block.
Song Condition:
Executes the operations related to each of the songs.
Track Condition:
Executes the operations related to each of the tracks.
Effect Condition:
In this status, you can make effects settings.
System Condition:
Here you can make settings that affect the entire environment of the VS-1680.
Utility Condition:
This is for executing other operations, including those
having to do with any connected devices.
Here is the general process used when executing the
functions and changing the settings included in each
condition. Please take a look.
1. Display the menu for each condition.
2. Select the page containing the desired function or
setting.
3. Select the setting to be changed.
4. Change the settings values.
5. Execute the operation.
33
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Function Buttons
The function buttons have various functions such as switching the display screen, executing operations, changing settings, and so on, and the function assigned to any function
button is displayed in bottom part of the display screen. White characters on a black background denote “screen switching functions,” and black characters on a white background
are used for “functions of executing operations and changing settings.” Function buttons
that do not appear cannot be used.
Depending on the screen, some function buttons may have six or more functions assigned to
them and be composed of a number of “pages.” These screens indicate page boxes and
page marks. The number of / indicates the total number of pages, with the currently
open page indicated by . To switch the display screen or the function of the function buttons, press [PAGE].
fig.02-01b(page.eps)
Page Boxes
Page Marks
Display Each of the Condition Menus
While holding down [SHIFT], press the function button ([F1]–[F6]) that corresponds to the condition you want to enter.
fig.02-01c(function.eps)
Track Condition
Song Condition
System Condition
Effect Condition
Utility Condition
* This step is unnecessary if you want to change settings related to each of the mixers.
34
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Select the Setting You Want to Change
The menu icon for each page is displayed. Press the
function button ([F1]–[F6]) that corresponds to the
page you want. When menu icons appear on several
pages, press [PAGE].
fig.02-01d(icons.eps)
Using [
], [
], [
], and [
], move the cursor
to the setting (parameter) you want to change. Use the
function button if there is more than one page.
The function buttons can be used to directly move the
cursor for the settings for each mixer.
fig.02-05(cursor2.eps)
Cursor
When Selecting System Condition
When selecting System condition, rather than
selecting a menu icon, the parameters themselves
may be displayed. This allows immediate selection
of previously changed parameters. If you want to
display the menu icons, press [F6 (EXIT)].
fig.02-02(exit.eps)
Change the Settings Values
Use the TIME/VALUE dial for this operation.
Rotating the dial counterclockwise decreases the values, rotating clockwise increases them. Although usually, increases and decreases in values are in single
unit steps, by holding down [SHIFT] while rotating
the TIME/VALUE dial, depending on the parameter,
you can make values increase or decrease ten times (or
one tenth) the normal rate.
Cursor
(previously changed parameters)
If you want the menu to be displayed
fig.02-06(dial.eps)
When you want to changes settings for each mixer,
press the corresponding button, as shown below.
decrease
increase
Input Mixer condition:
SELECT button for each input channel (1–8, DIGITAL,
ST IN, EFFECT 1 RTN, EFFECT 2 RTN)
Execute the Operation
Track Mixer condition:
SELECT button for each track channel (1–16)
After changing the value, to create the new song,
select the different song, or otherwise set or execute
the specified task or operation, press [YES]. A confirmation message will appear in the display. When the
message appears, press [YES]. If you want to cancel
the operation, then press [NO].
Master Block condition: [MASTER]
fig.02-03(mix_edit.eps)
Input Mixer
Track Mixer
Master Block
35
Chapter 2
Selecting Pages Contained in
Functions and Settings
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Switching Track Conditions
The condition for each track switches each time the
STATUS button is pressed. You can check the condition by looking at the button indicators.
SOURCE (orange):
Allows you to monitor the input source or track
assigned to each channel.
REC (blinking red):
Specifies what is recorded to each track. In playback,
tracks are monitored. You can directly specify what is
to be recorded by pressing the STATUS button while
holding down [REC].
Moving to the Beginning or End of the
Performance
You can move directly from within any of the V-tracks
in the currently selected track to the first or last location in the song that contains recorded sound. Use the
following procedure.
To go to the first location in the song containing
recorded sound:
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG TOP (REW)].
To go to the last location in the song containing
recorded sound:
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG END (FF)].
fig.02-06b(songtop.eps)
1
PLAY (green):
Plays back each track. You can directly specify what is
to be played back by pressing the STATUS button
while holding down [STOP].
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF (darkness):
The track is muted (silent).
8
9
* The VS-1680 can record up to eight tracks simultaneously. Thus, you cannot specify the track condition of
REC or SOURCE for more than eight tracks.
10
11
12
13
14
Changing the Current Time
The current playback time in the display is shown in
SMPTE time code. The current measure, beat, and
Marker number are also displayed. Use the following
procedure to change the current playback time.
SMPTE Time Code (Appendices p. 65)
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [
].
The time display is framed in bold lines.
fig.02-06a(smpte.eps)
Hour
Minute
Second
Frame
Sub Frame
Measure
Beat
Marker Number
Cursor
3. Use the [
] and [
] buttons and the
TIME/VALUE dial.
When using the TIME/VALUE dial, time playback
time moves according to the position of the cursor.
With the cursor moved to the subframe position, rotating the TIME/VALUE dial moves the time point in
increments of 1/10 of a frame. To move the time in
1/100-frame increments, hold down [SHIFT] while
rotating the TIME/VALUE dial.
36
15
16
Song Top
Song End
Storing a Time Location
With the VS-1680, there are two ways you can mark
and easily recall sections of a song that you want to
record over or listen to repeatedly. One is called the
Locator function, and the other one is referred to as
the Marker function. Use each method according to its
intended function.
Locator:
Store “locator,” or time locations to the LOCATOR
([1]–[8]) buttons on the top panel of the VS-1680. Each
button correspond to each time in a one-to-one correspondence, and you can move instantly to the location
with the press of the corresponding button. There are
eight banks for each button, providing you with up to
64 (8 x 8) locators.
Marker:
Up to 1000 locate points (000–999) can be set in rapid
succession in each song. You can also store Auto Mix
data (p. 157), and there is a sync track provided as well
(p. 136).
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Time locations are stored with the LOCATOR buttons
([1]–[8]) on the top panel of the VS-1680. Each button
correspond to each time in a one-to-one correspondence, and you can move instantly to the stored locations by pressing the buttons. There are eight banks
for each button, providing you with up to 64 (8 x 8)
locators. The locators are also a useful and convenient
way to define sections of a song to be repeated in Loop
Recording or for marking points in Punch-In
Recording.
fig.02-06c(locator.eps)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3. Press the LOCATOR button ([1]–[8]) corresponding to the desired bank number. For example, if
you wish to switch to Locator Bank 1, then press
[1].
4. After the locator bank is switched, return to Play
condition.
The [BANK] indicator goes out. If you wish to cancel
the operation, then press [BANK] once more.
5. Continue with the steps described in “Storing
Locate Points” and “Moving to a Stored Time
Location.”
Bank 8
.
.
.
Making Fine Adjustments to Stored
Locators
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
Bank 2
Bank 1
2. Press [F2 (Loc)]. If “Loc” does not appear in [F2],
first press [PAGE] until “Loc” is displayed, and
then press [F2 (Loc)].
00h00m00s00
Time
Storing Locators
1. Move to the location in a song where you want to
set a locator.
3. Each of the locators is displayed. Using [
],
[
], [
], and [
], move the cursor to the
LOCATOR you want to change. However, if no
locator is stored in the current LOCATOR,
“–h–m–s–f– —–” appears in the display.
fig.02-06d(loc_adj.eps)
Auxiliary Cursor
Cursor
2. Press a LOCATOR button ([1]–[8]). For example, if
you wish to set Locator 1, press [1].
These can be used in recording/playback or while the
song is stopped. When a locate point is set, the corresponding indicator lights.
Moving to a Stored Time Location
1. Press the LOCATOR button for the locate point to
which you want to move. For example, if you
wish to move to the Locator 1, then press [1].
Changing the Locator Bank
1. Press [BANK].
The button indicator lights.
2. Now the LOCATOR buttons function as buttons to
switch Locator Banks.
The indicator for the LOCATOR button ([1]–[8]) corresponding to the current locate bank will be blinking.
4. Enter the locator where you wish to change. Use
the TIME/VALUE dial.
At this point, the function buttons work as follows.
[F2 (NOW)]: Enters the current time where the
cursor is positioned.
[F3 (JUMP)]: Moves the current time where the
cursor is positioned.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen.
5. When you finished change settings, press [F6
(EXIT)].
The Utility menu icon is displayed.
Otherwise, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. Return to Play
condition.
37
Chapter 2
Using the Locator
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Deleting a Stored Time Location
Moving the Location of Markers
1. While holding down [CLEAR], press the LOCATOR button ([1]–[8]) for locate point that you wish
to delete. For example, if you wish to delete the
LOCATOR 1’s located point, then press [CLEAR]
and [1] simultaneously.
To move to the Marker immediately preceding the
current playback time, hold down [SHIFT] and press
[PREVIOUS]. You move ahead one marker at a time in
the order they are placed each time the button is
pressed. To move to the Marker immediately following the current playback time, hold down [SHIFT] and
press [NEXT].
Using Markers
fig.02-08 (movemarker.eps)
Along with the playback locate points, you can set up
to 1000 Markers in sequence. The Markers are also a
useful and convenient way to define sections of a song
to be repeated in Loop Recording or for marking
points in Punch-In Recording.
NEXT
PREVIOUS
0
1
2
* An interval of at least 0.1 seconds must left between markers. It will not be possible to add a new markers if a markers already exists at a location less than 0.1 seconds away.
Time
Marking a Time Location
Press [TAP], and a marker will be added to the current
location. This can be done during recording or playback of the song as well as when the song is stopped.
fig.02-06e(marker.eps)
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
TAP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00h00m00s00
Time
About Marker Numbers
Each marker is assigned a number 000-999, in the
order of its time location. This means that if you
add a new marker at a location earlier than an
existing marker, the numbers of the subsequent
markers will be incremented.
fig.02-07a(number1.eps)
1
2
Making Fine Adjustments to Marked
Locations
1. Move to the marker where you want to change.
Hold down [SHIFT] and press [PREVIOUS] or
[NEXT] to move the marker.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
TAP
0
Displaying Markers
The Marker number at any playback location is
indicated in the display. If there is no Marker
number in the current location, then the closest
preceding Marker number is displayed. If there
are no markers in the song, “—” is indicated. If
“***” is shown in the display, it indicates that
although there are markers placed in the song,
the current location is before the first marker.
3
3. Press [F1 (Mark)]. If “Mark” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “Mark” is displayed,
and then press [F1 (Mark)].
fig.02-08b(mk_adj.eps)
Time
Marker Number
Time
Measure Beat
Status
Before setting a Mark point
fig.02-07(number2.eps)
0
1
2
3
4
When saving Auto Mixes
Time
After setting a Mark point
38
When setting track number Markers
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
5. Set the marker where you wish to change. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial. The time of a marker can be
modified only within the range between the preceding and following markers.
To Delete All Markers Simultaneously
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and [CLEAR] and [TAP] at
the same time.
fig.02-11a(delallmark1.eps)
SHIFT
TAP
CLEAR
+
+
BACK
SPACE
0
1
2
3
4
fig.02-09(modmarler.eps)
0
1
1
1
2
Time
Before deleting a Marker
Time
fig.02-11(delallmark2.eps)
Possible range of change
6. When you finished change settings, press [F6
(EXIT)].
The Utility menu icon is displayed.
Otherwise, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. Return to Play
condition.
Deleting a Marked Location
Setting markers makes it much easier to search for
places within a song, but having too many of them
actually cam make it more difficult to find the location
you’re looking for. It is a good idea to delete unneeded
markers whenever you can.
1. Move to the marker you wish to delete.
2. While holding down [CLEAR], press [TAP].
Marker numbers for any markers after the deleted
mark point shift one number ahead.
fig.02-10a(delmarker1.eps)
TAP
CLEAR
+
BACK
SPACE
0
1
2
3
4
Time
Before deleting a Marker
fig.02-10(delmarker2.eps)
0
1
2
3
Time
After deleting a Marker
2. ”Clear All Tap Marker ?” appears in the display. If
you want to delete the markers, press [YES]. If
you want to cancel the procedure, the press [NO].
Storing Mixer Settings
With the VS-1680, there are two functions to recall
mixer settings easily. One is refered to as the Scene,
and the other one is referred to as the EZ Routing.
According to the circumstances, please use each function.
Scene:
A Scene stores the current mixer settings, include that
setting values in a song. For example, during mixdown, you can create a number of mixes with different
settings for volume, pan, equalizer, etc., and compare
those mixes, each one with all of its settings preserved.
This is a very convenient feature.
EZ Routing:
The VS-1680 can store settings related to its mixer connections. These include settings for routing of inputs
to tracks for recording, for determining where signals
are output, and for determining which output is to be
monitored. For example, these settings, which stay the
same, regardless of the song, include playback and
recording track settings during track bouncing, and
effects settings during mixdown. This makes EZ
Routing convenient in such situations.
Time
After deleting a Mark point
39
Chapter 2
4. Each of the mark points is displayed. Using [
],
[
], [
], and [
], move the cursor to the
Marker you want to change. However, if no mark
point is stored in the current Marker, “—:
–h–m–s–f– —–” appears in the display.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Recording the Current Condition of
the Mixer (Scene)
Up to 8 sets of settings, values included, that define
the total condition of the mixer can be stored for each
song, and can be recalled instantly at the touch of a
button. A stored set of mixer settings is called a
“Scene.” A Scene includes not only the volume and
pan settings, but also connections (e.g., the track to
which the source from the INPUT 1 jack is recorded),
V-track settings (the track to which each is recorded),
and effects (such as the selection of the effect to be
applied). This feature is convenient when you want to
compare different balances of volume, pan, equalizer,
and other settings during mixdown.
* If you have a VS8F-2 installed, effects settings can be also
recorded to Scenes.
Storing a Scene
1. Press [SCENE].
The button indicator lights.
2. At this point, the SCENE button act to store or
recall mixer conditions. Indicators are blinked for
any SCENE buttons ([1]–[8]) storing mixer conditions.
3. Press a SCENE button ([1]–[8]) whose button indicator is not blinked. For example, if you want to
record mixer conditions to Scene 1, then press [1].
4. When the Scene is stored, return to Play condition.
The [SCENE] indicator goes off. If you wish to
cancel the operation, then press [SCENE] once
more.
Recalling a Scene
1. Press [Stop].
* You cannot select a Scene during recording or playback.
2. Press [SCENE].
The button indicator lights.
3. At this point, the LOCATOR/SCENE buttons
function as buttons to store and recall mixer conditions. Indicators are blinked for any SCENE buttons ([1]–[8]) storing mixer conditions.
40
4. Press a SCENE button ([1]–[8]) whose button indicator is blinked. For example, if you want to recall
the mixer conditions in Scene 1, then press [1].
5. The Scene is recalled, and you are returned to Play
condition. The [SCENE] indicator goes off. If you
wish to cancel the operation, then press [SCENE]
once more.
Recalling a Scene Without Affecting
the Current Fader Values
When a Scene is recalled, the fader values will change
to the recalled settings. However, the positions of the
top panel’s faders themselves do not change. This
means that the locations of the faders will not match
their actual values.
If you want just the fader values to remain unchanged
when you recall a Scene, make the following settings.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Scene Mode,” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial. If “Scene Mode” does not
appear in the display, then press [F1 (Prm1)].
SYS Scene Mode
This setting determines the fader settings when a
Scene is recalled.
All:
This changes the mixer settings to those of
the Scene being recalled. In this case, when a
Scene is recalled, the location of the faders on
the top panel may no longer match the actual
fader settings.
KeepF: This changes the mixer settings to those of
the Scene being recalled, with the exception
of the fader settings. This means that even
when a Scene is recalled, fader settings will
still match the fader positions on the top
panel.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
1. Press [SCENE].
The button indicator lights.
2. The indicators for the [SCENE] buttons ([1]–[8]) to
which mixer settings are stored then light.
3. While holding down [CLEAR], press any LOCATOR buttons ([1]–[8]) storing Scene. For example,
if you wish to clear the settings stored in SCENE
1, then while holding down [CLEAR], press [1].
4. The mixer settings have been cleared. Press
[SCENE] again.
The button indicator goes off. If you wish to cancel the
operation, then press [SCENE] once more.
Making Mixer Settings Automatically
(EZ Routing)
Settings related to mixer connections, including settings for routing of inputs to tracks for recording, for
determining where signals are output, and for determining which output is to be monitored can be stored
and recalled easily with the VS-1680. This is referred
to as EZ Routing.
For example, when setting tracks to be played back or
recorded during track bouncing, or when dealing with
effects settings during mixdown there are settings
which remain the same, regardless of the song. In such
situations, by preparing stored mixer settings to be
recalled later, you can easily get the most effective and
appropriate mixer settings for each parameter.
At the time of purchase, your VS-1680 came with three
read-only EZ Routing settings (Preset Routings)
already configured. In addition to these, the VS-1680
offers 29 rewritable EZ Routing settings (User
Routings), allowing you to make changes to the settings provided and then save these to the User
Routings.
There are two types of EZ Routing: Template wherein
you can check and change the various settings from a
single list; and Step Edit, in which you can change the
settings in order using a question-and-answer dialog
type format. Furthermore, Step Edit features three different way to change the settings.
Recording:
Select this when you want to record the performance
input via the INPUT jacks.
Mixdown:
Select this when you want adjust the balance of each
track or to record a MD player or similar input in twochannel stereo.
Bouncing:
Select this when recording the performance data from
multiple tracks onto a number of other tracks.
Storing Routings as a Single List
(Template)
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F2 (INPUT)]. If “INPUT” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “INPUT” is displayed, and then press [F2 (INPUT)].
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F1 (COMMON)]: This displays the name of the current EZ Routing.
[F2 (INPUT)]:
This is for making input mixer settings.
[F3 (TRACK)]:
This is for making track mixer settings.
[F4 (EFX)]:
This is for making effects settings.
[F5 (MST)]:
This is for making Master Block
settings.
[F6 (SAVE)]:
This saves the current EZ Routing.
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to make
each of the different settigns values. Pressing
[ENTER] when the ENTER indicator is blinked
fixes the various level and pan settings. If the
level and pan settings are set, then press [EXIT
(NO)].
fig.02-13(tmp_input.eps)
41
Chapter 2
Deleting a Scene
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Input Mixer Settings
Cursor
Output destination (MIX bus or track)
Track to be recorded (up to two tracks)
Effect Send Switch
AUX Send Switch
Stereo Link
Pop-up Window
Mix Send Level
Mix Send Pan
fig.02-14(tmp_track.eps)
Track Mixer Settings
Cursor
Output destination (MIX bus or track)
Track to be recorded (up to two tracks)
Track Status
Effect Send Switch
AUX Send Switch
Stereo Link
V-track
Pop-up Window
Mix Send Level
Mix Send Pan
fig.02-15(tmp_efxt.eps)
Effect Settings
Cursor
Selecting Effects
Output destination (MIX bus or track)
Track to be recorded (up to two tracks)
fig.02-16(tmp_mst.eps)
42
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
Master Block Settings
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
4. When you are finished making the EZ Routing settings, press [F6 (SAVE)].
5. The Routing Save screen appears in the display. Rotate the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the destination routing number.
fig.02-17(ez_save.eps)
Routing Number
Routing Name
6. Press [
] to move the cursor. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] and
rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the User Routing name.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown below.
[F1 (Hist)]:
Pressing this button takes you through a register of the last 20
names entered, one at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]: Confirms the routing and exits the screen
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen without accepting the routing.
7. After entering the name, press [F5 (Write)].
The routing is saved.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
43
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Storing Recording Settings (Recording)
Select this when you want to record the performance input via the INPUT jacks.
If you wish to cancel the settings procedure, press [F6 (EXIT)].
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F4 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear in [F4], first press [PAGE] until
“Exec” is displayed, and then press [F4 (Exec)].
fig.02-18(ez_con(rec).eps)
3. Press [F1 (Rec)].
4. Specify which source is to be recorded on each track. First press the source
input channel SELECT button, then press the track channel STATUS button
for the track to which the source is to be recorded. With the EZ Routing, you
can assign a single source to be recorded on up to two tracks. Additionally,
by pressing the SELECT button when the input is not assigned to any track,
you can have the source assigned to the MIX bus (the signal is not recorded). Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the V-track to which you want the source recorded.
* Sources that have Stereo Link set to “On” cannot be recorded to tracks on which
Stereo Link is set to “Off” with the EZ Routing.
fig.02-19(rec_step1.eps)
44
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
Source assigned to the track
Source assigned to the MIX bus
Source
Track
V-Track
5. Press [F2 (STEP→)].
6. Only the source assigned to the track is indicated. Press [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each
of the values.
fig.02-20(rec_step2.eps)
Cursor
Pan/Balance
Level
Output destination
(MIX bus or track)
7. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
45
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
8. Make the settings for the effects. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
Press [F3 (EFX A)] to make settings to EFFECT A (EFX1/2); press [F4 (EFX
B)] to make settings to EFFECT B (EFX3/4).
fig.02-21(rec_step3.eps)
Effect Switch
Send Level
Cursor
Send Balance
9. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
10. Determine whether or not the effects are to be recorded. First press the
SELECT button for the input channel to which you are applying the effect,
then press the track channel STATUS button for the track to which you want
the effect to be recorded. When you want to assign EFX3/4, then hold down
[SHIFT] when you press the SELECT button. You can also assign one effect
for recording on up to two tracks.
fig.02-22(rec_step4.eps)
Track to be recorded
46
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
11. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
12. Determine whether or not the output is to be sent to the AUX bus. Press
[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-23(rec_step5.eps)
AUX Switch
AUX Send Switch
AUX Send Pan/Balance
Cursor
13. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
14. Determine how the output is to be sent. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
]
to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-24(rec_step6.eps)
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
47
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
15. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display. Press [YES] if you want to set
the selected routing.
fig.02-24a(apply.eps)
16. Press [F3 (SAVE)].
The Routing Save screen appears in the display. Save the routing using the procedure described in Steps 5–8 of “Storing Routings as a Single List (Template)”
(p. 41).
Storing Mixdown Settings (Mixdown)
Select this when you want adjust the balance of each track or to record a MD
recorder or similar input in two-channel stereo. Additionally, when playing back
all 16 tracks, by mixing the output of the VS-1680 along with the output of a synchronized MIDI sequencer or other such device, you can also record to MD
recorders or similar devices. If you want to cancel the settings procedure while
still in progress, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F4 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear in [F4], first press [PAGE] until
“Exec” is displayed, and then press [F4 (Exec)].
fig.02-18(ez_con(rec).eps)
3. Press [F2 (Mix)].
48
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
4. Specify which source or track is to be output to the MIX bus. Press the
selected source input channel SELECT buttons or the track channel SELECT
buttons for the tracks you want to play back. Press [
] and [
] to move
the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the V-track to which you
want to playback.
fig.02-25(mix_step1.eps)
Source assigned to the MIX bus
Track assigned to the MIX bus
Source
Track
V-Track
5. Press [F2 (STEP→)].
6. Only the sources or tracks assigned to the MIX bus are indicated. Press [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to
adjust each of the values.
fig.02-26(mix_step2.eps)
Cursor
Pan
Level
Input Channel
Track Channel
7. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
49
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
8. Make the settings for the effects. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
Press [F3 (EFX A)] to make settings to EFFECT A (EFX1/2); press [F4 (EFX
B)] to make settings to EFFECT B (EFX3/4).
fig.02-27(rec_step3.eps)
Effect Switch
Send Level
Cursor
Send Pan
9. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
10. Determine whether or not the output is to be sent to the AUX bus. Press
[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-28(mix_step4.eps)
AUX Switch
AUX Send Switch
AUX Send Pan/
Balance
Cursor
Input Channel
Track Channel
11. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
50
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
12. Determine how the output is to be sent. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-29(mix_step5.eps)
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
13. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display. Press [YES] if you want to set
the selected routing.
fig.02-24a(apply.eps)
14. Press [F3 (SAVE)].
The Routing Save screen appears in the display. Save the routing using the procedure described in Steps 5–8 of “Storing Routings as a Single List (Template)”
(p. 41).
51
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Storing Track Bouncing Settings (Bouncing)
Select this when recording the performance data from multiple tracks onto a
number of other tracks. If you want to cancel the settings procedure while still in
progress, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F4 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear in [F4], first press [PAGE] until
“Exec” is displayed, and then press [F4 (Exec)].
3. Press [F3 (Bounc)].
fig.02-18(ez_con(rec).eps)
4. Determine which tracks are to be recorded onto other tracks as well as
which tracks will have other tracks recorded onto them. First, press the
channel SELECT button for any track you want played back, then press the
track channel STATUS button for any track to which you will record. You
can assign a single playback track to be recorded on up to two tracks.
Additionally, by pressing the SELECT button for any playback track not
assigned to be recorded on another track, you can have the playback track
assigned to the MIX bus (the signal is not recorded). Press [
] and [
]
to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the V-track to
which you want the source recorded or played back.
* Playback tracks that have Stereo Link set to “On” cannot be recorded to tracks on
which Stereo Link is set to “Off” with the EZ Routing.
fig.02-31(bou_step1.eps)
52
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
Playback track assigned to be recorded on a track
Playback Track
Recording Track
V-Track
Playback Tracks and Recording Tracks
With the VS-1680, you can perform track bouncing on the same track.
However, when you do this, each record or playback track is counted as a
single track, with a limit of 16 tracks in total. For example, when you set the
routing so that Track 1 is bounced to Track 1, then the STATUS indicator for
Track 15/16 goes off, indicating the Track 16 is now not being played back.
5. Press [F2 (STEP→)].
6. Only the playback tracks assigned to recording tracks are indicated. Press
[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-32(bou_step2.eps)
Cursor
Pan
Level
Track to be recorded
Track Channel
53
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
7. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
8. Make the settings for the effects. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
Press [F3 (EFX A)] to make settings to EFFECT A (EFX1/2); press [F4 (EFX
B)] to make settings to EFFECT B (EFX3/4).
fig.02-33(bou_step3.eps)
Cursor
Effect Switch
Send Level
Send Pan
9. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
10. Determine whether or not the effects are to be recorded. First press the
SELECT button for the input channel to which you are applying the effect,
then press the track channel STATUS button for the track to which you want
the effect to be recorded. When you want to assign EFX3/4, then hold down
[SHIFT] when you press the SELECT button. You can also assign one effect
for recording on up to two tracks with the EZ Routing.
fig.02-34(bou_step4.eps)
54
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
Track to be recorded
11. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
12. Determine whether or not the output is to be sent to the AUX bus. Press
[
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-35(mix_step5.eps)
AUX Switch
AUX Send Level
AUX Send Pan/
Balance
Cursor
13. Press [F2 (STEP→)]. You can return to the previous screen by pressing [F1
(STEP←)].
55
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
14. Determine how the output is to be sent. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
]
to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the values.
fig.02-36(bou_step6.eps)
Monitor Select
Equalizer Mode
Direct Out
Effect Insert
15. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display. Press [YES] if you want to set
the selected routing.
fig.02-24a(apply.eps)
16. Press [F3 (SAVE)].
The Routing Save screen appears in the display. Save the routing using the procedure described in Steps 5–8 of “Storing Routings as a Single List (Template)”
(p. 41).
Recalling EZ Routing
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
]] or rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to
move the cursor to the routing you want to use.
3. Press [F4 (Exec)]. If “Exec” does not appear in [F4], first press [PAGE] until
“Exec” is displayed, and then press [F4 (Exec)].
fig.02-18(ez_con(rec).eps)
56
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Chapter 2
4. Press [
] and [
(Exec)] once more.
] to move the cursor to “Use Template,” and press [F4
5. A confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES].
The EZ Routing is recalled. If you wish to cancel the operation, the press [NO].
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Deleting EZ Routings
1. Press [EZ ROUTING].
The EZ Routing icon appears in the display.
2. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] or rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to
move the cursor to the routing you want to delete.
3. Press [F6 (Del)]. If “Del” does not appear in [F6], first press [PAGE] until
“Del” is displayed, and then press [F6 (Del)].
4. A confirmation message is displayed. Press [YES]. The EZ Routing is deleted. The following routing is advance one place. If you wish to cancel the
operation, the press [NO]. However, “Recording,” “Mix Down,” and
“Bouncing” are Preset Routings, they cannot be deleted.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
57
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
This chapter explains the operations necessary for
recording with the VS-1680. Try out each operation as
you read these instructions.
Recording
Items Necessary for Multi-Track
Recording
• VS-1680 (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
• Audio equipment for the Master Out signal, or
stereo headphones
• Recording source (electric guitar, synthesizer, CD
player, etc.) or microphone
IDE (Appendices p. 64)
Creating a New Song (Song New)
Recording cannot take place while a demo
song is selected. This is because the contents of the demo songs are protected from
being changed or overwritten (p. 81). Use the following procedure to prepare a new song. This process is
analogous to exchanging cassettes on a multi-track
tape recorder.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
2. Press [F2 (NEW)]. If “NEW” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “NEW” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (NEW)].
3. Press [F1 (Name)]
The Song Name screen appears in the display.
4. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the
TIME/VALUE dial, enter the name of the song.
At this point, the function buttons work as shown
below.
fig.03-02(sngname.eps)
[F1 (Hist)]:
[F2 (Clr)]:
58
Pressing this button takes you through
a register of the last 20 song names
entered, one at a time.
Clears all characters in the window.
Deletes the character where the cursor
is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]: Accepts/Confirms the song name and
removes the screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Removes the screen without accepting
the song name.
[F3 (Del)]:
5. After entering the name, press [F5 (Write)].
Song Names
When you create a song, it will automatically be
given a name like “InitSong 001.” However this
makes it difficult to remember what song it is. We
recommend that you assign a unique name to
your song so that data management will be easier. You can change the name of the song later, if
desired.
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Change each settings values by the the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Sample Rate
Select a sample rate (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48.0 kHz).
When you want to use a digital connection to a digital
audio device, much the sample rate to that of the connected device. Furthermore, when making an original
audio CD, select 44.1 kHz. You cannot change the
sample rate after the song is recorded. In addition, you
cannot mix different sample rates in the same song.
Record Mode (Recording Mode)
Select the sound’s quality and time based on the
recorded contents. Once a song is recorded, these settings cannot be changed.
MTP (Multi-Track Pro):
Compatible with professional-quality equipment (digital mixers, digital effects, processors, etc.). The highquality sound can be worked with — recorded and
edited — as is, with no loss of sonic quality when
played back or output.
MAS (Mastering):
With this setting, you can get the high-quality sounds
compatible to that’s quality of CD player or DAT
recorder. However, songs recorded with this selected
for recording work on 8-track recorders (Tracks 1–8).
Tracks 9–16 cannot be used. This mode is appropriate
when recording edited two-channel stereo songs.
MT1 (Multi-Track 1):
While maintaining high-quality sound, recording time
is approximately twice that available in “Mastering”
mode. This mode is good when doing a lot of track
bouncing.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Chapter 3
MT2 (Multi-Track 2):
While maintaining high-quality sound, recording time is longer than that available in “Multi-Track 1” mode. This mode is good for normal operations.
LIV1 (Live 1):
Recording time is longer than with “Multi-Track 2” mode. This mode is appropriate when your hard disk lacks much free space or when recording live performances.
LIV 2:
Provides the longest recording time.
Icon
Select icons (graphic images) that directly impart the feeling for each song.
Copy System PRM (Copy System Parameter)
When set to “On,” you can create a new song that has the current song’s system
parameters copied to it. Without remaking the previous settings such as preview
length (p. 154), metronome settings (p. 167), and so on, you can begin recording
or playback of the current song with the same environment (system parameters).
However, parameters included in the [F2 (GLOBL)] page are not recognized.
Copy Mixer/Scene PRM (Copy Mixer/Scene Parameter)
When set to “On,” you can create a new song that has the current song’s mixer
settings and stored Scenes copied to it.
7. Press [F4 (Exec)].
“Create New Song, Sure?” appears in the display.
8. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” appears in the display.
9. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not, press [NO]. If you
have selected a demo song, then press [NO]. When the new song is created, the Song menu icon reappears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
The initial display reappears. The created new song is now selected for recording and playback.
About Recording Time
The recording time (track minutes) of both sampling rate and recording mode are as shown below (for
one track, with 2.1 GB free space).
Track Minutes (Appendices p. 65)
Recording Mode 48.0 kHz
Multi-Track Pro 742 mins.
Mastering
370 mins.
Multi-Track 1
742 mins.
Multi-Track 2
990 mins.
Live 1
1188 mins.
Live 2
1484 mins.
(All times approximate)
Sample Rate
44.1 kHz
32.0 kHz
808 mins.
1114 mins.
404 mins.
556 mins.
808 mins.
1114 mins.
1078 mins.
1484 mins.
1292 mins.
1782 mins.
1616 mins.
2228 mins.
* The above chart is a general yardstick for estimating recording times. Actual times may be somewhat shorter
depending on your hard disk’s specifications or the number of songs created.
59
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
If “Drive Busy!” is Displayed
If this message appears during recording or playback, it means that the disk drive cannot catch up
with the data read/write speed. In such
instances, create a new song which lower the
sample rate or recording mode from their current
settings, and record over.
Song Numbers
On the VS-1680, management of song data is
accomplished by assigning a song number to
every song that is saved. Newly created songs are
given the lowest currently available number. For
example, if all numbers up to song number 5 are
already assigned, then the number 6 is taken by
the new song. Furthermore, even if song numbers
up to 5 are occupied, if Song 3 is deleted, then the
new song is given that now lowest vacant number.
fig.03-03(songnmbr.eps)
If song numbers up to 5 are occupied
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
InitSong 001
InitSong 001
InitSong 002
InitSong 002
InitSong 003
InitSong 003
Song New
General Course of the
Recording Process
The procedure for recording with the VS-1680 is
roughly as same as record process by multi-track
recorders as mentioned before. This general process of
recording a song is outlined below. Please take a
moment to read through the steps.
1. Connect instruments and microphones to the VS1680.
2. Record the basic part of the song; drums and bass,
etc.
3. Record other parts (electric guitars, synthesizers,
vocals, etc.) while playing back the basic part.
4. If there are any mistakes during the process,
record over the places where they occurred
(punch-in/punch-out).
5. Adjust the volume level, pan, equalization, and
other settings for each part.
6. If you run out of empty tracks, you can marge the
contents of two or more tracks onto a different
track (track bouncing).
7. Mix down the tracks to your recorder and make a
master tape.
Well, it’s time to try multi-track recording. This will be
explained using concrete examples.
InitSong 004
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
InitSong 005
Connecting Instruments
InitSong 006
1. Turn down the master fader as low as possible.
If Song 3 is deleted
Disk Drive
Disk Drive
InitSong 001
InitSong 001
InitSong 002
InitSong 002
InitSong 003
Song New
InitSong 004
InitSong 004
InitSong 005
InitSong 005
2. Connect instruments and microphones to the
INPUT jacks.
The INPUT 8 jack and the GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack cannot be used simultaneously. The GUITAR (Hi-Z)
jack takes precedence when connections are made to
both jacks at the same time. If you wish to use the
INPUT 8 jack, make sure that nothing is plugged into
the GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack.
GUITAR (Hi-Z) (Appendices p. 63)
* The pin assignment for the XLR type connectors is as
shown below. Before making any connections, make sure
that this pin assignment is compatible with that of all
your other devices.
fig.03-04(xlr.eps)
60
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
* Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
Chapter 3
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
Recording to the Tracks
1. Select a recording track. While holding down [REC], press the STATUS button for the track to which you want to record.
The button indicator blinks red.
2. Select source to be recorded to the track. While holding down the STATUS
button for the track to which you want to record, press the SELECT button
for the input channel whose source you want assigned to the track.
The button indicator blinks.
fig.03-05(select.eps)
Sources Assigned to Tracks
In a newly created song, sources are assigned to tracks as shown below.
fig.03-05a
3. Switch to the input mixer. Press [FADER] to light the IN indicator.
4. Determine the source volume. Since what is recorded is the sound after it
passes through the fader, the faders should normally be set to around 0 dB.
61
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
5. Adjust the input sensitivity, with the INPUT knob
of the channel input assigned as the source. Get a
strong input signal by having instrument volumes
as high as possible. At this time, raise the volume
level as much as possible without making the
PEAK indicator light up. Normally, this range is
adjusted that the level meter moves within -12 to
0 dB when the channel fader is set to 0 dB.
6. Press [REC].
The button indicator blinks red.
7. Press [PLAY].
The button indicator lights green, and recording starts.
Now begin playing.
8. When the performance is finished, press [STOP].
The song then stops.
9. Listen to the recorded performance. Press [ZERO]
to return to the beginning of the song.
10. Switch to the track mixer. Press [FADER] to light
the TR indicator.
When You Are Recording in Stereo
When recording to Tracks 9/10–15/16 (stereo
tracks), or when recording to tracks with Stereo
Link (p. 164) on, you can set the pan for each
input channel. After Step 5, perform the procedure described below.
5-1. Press the SELECT button for the input channel you want assigned as the source.
The button indicator lights, and the Input Mixer
screen appears in the display.
5-2. Press [F1 (Pan)]. If “Pan” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “Pan” is displayed, then press [F1 (Pan)]. Alternatively,
use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor to “Pan.”
fig.03-06(pan.eps)
Master Send Switch
Master Send Pan
11. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
12. Use the channel faders and the master fader to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
13. Does the recording sound as you though it
would? If you are satisfied with the results of
your recording, then save the song to the disk,
using the procedure described in “Saving a
Recorded Performance” (p. 63).
5-3. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor.
Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
(Master Send Switch)
When this is set to “On,” the source from each
input channel, rather than being assigned to the
RECORDING bus, is sent directly to the MIX bus.
Set this to “On” when, for example, you simply
want to mix the inputs without recording them.
However, the sources that are assigned to the
RECORDING bus are disabled.
(Master Send Pan)
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the
signal sent to the MIX bus and the RECORDING
bus.
5-4. Repeat Steps 5-1 through 5-3 for all input
channels to which you want to make pan
settings.
5-5. After making the pan setting, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
62
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Saving a Recorded
Performance (Song Store)
* When handling important song data, or when using the
VS-1680 for extended periods, we recommended that you
to perform this procedure frequently.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
2. ”STORE OK?” appears in the display. If you are
satisfied with the results of your recording, press
[YES]. If you wish to cancel the save, press [NO].
* The contents of the demo songs are protected from being
changed or overwritten (Song Protect (p. 81)). You cannot save operation with the demo songs. This means if you
press [YES] at Step 2 when a demo song is selected, the
message “Song Protected” will appear, and the procedure
cannot be continued.
Recording Over a Portion of
a Performance
(Punch-In/Punch-Out)
Sometimes, when listening to a recorded performance,
even if you don’t find it necessary to discard the entire
song, there may be sections containing mistakes or
lyrics that are hard to hear. In such instances, you will
find the following procedure convenient for rerecording only selected parts of a recording. The switching
from playback to recording status is called punch-in,
and the switch back from recording to playback is
referred to as punch-out.
2. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
song.
3. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
At this point, the performance that has already been
recorded on the track or tracks that you want to rerecord is monitored.
4. Press the STATUS buttons again.
The indicator alternately blinks red and orange. Now,
confirm that you can hear source you want recorded
to the track coming from the monitors.
5. During playback of the song, each time the button
is pressed, the monitor switches between source
and track. Using the input sensitivity knob, adjust
the volume of the source so that it matches that of
the prerecorded performance.
6. Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity, press
[STOP].
7. Move to previous located point where you want to
re-record.
8. Press [PLAY] again to playback the song.
9. When you reach the point in the performance you
want to re-record, press [REC].
The VS-1680 goes in to record mode; start rerecording
the song or performance.
10. When you have finished recording, press [REC]
once more (or press [PLAY] to playback the song).
11. Each time the [REC] button is pressed, the unit
alternately punches in and out. Repeat Steps 9
and 10 for any other tracks you wish to re-record.
12. Press [STOP] to stop the song.
13. Listen to the results of the rerecording. Return to
the beginning of the song and press [PLAY].
Using the RECORD Button
(Manual Punch-In 1)
Use Transport Control Buttons to punch in and out.
fig.03-07(punch1.eps)
Start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Recording
Stop
Playback
Time
63
Chapter 3
The contents of any recorded performance will be lost
if you simply turn the power off, or even if there is an
accidental power failure or power outage. Once lost,
the contents of a recorded performance cannot be
restored to the previous conditions. To avoid this
from happening, use the following procedure to save
your songs to the disk.
1. Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button
which you wish to re-record.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Using the Foot switch
(Manual Punch-In 2)
Use a foot switch to punch in and out. Using PunchIn/Punch-Out when both performing on an instrument and recording at the same time is difficult. In
such instances, it is convenient to use a foot switch
(such as the DP-2 or the BOSS FS-5U) to do your
switches.
fig.03-08(punch2.eps)
Start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Recording
Stop
Playback
Time
Connect an optional foot switch (such as the DP-2 or
the BOSS FS-5U) to the VS-1680’s FOOT SWITCH jack.
fig.03-09(ftsswconnec.eps)
FootSw (Foot switch icon)
Set the function of the foot switch connected to the
FOOT SWITCH jack.
Play/Stop: Repeats playback and recording each
time the foot switch is pressed.
Record:
Performs the same function as [REC].
This is used for switching between
recording and playback during manual
Punch-In Recording.
TapMarker: Performs the same function as [TAP].
Pressing the foot switch sets a Marker at
the mark point.
Next:
Performs the same function as [NEXT].
Moves to the beginning or end of the following phrase each time the foot switch is
pressed.
Previous: Performs the same function as [PREVIOUS]. Moves to the beginning or end of
the previous phrase each time the foot
switch is pressed.
GPI:
Controls playback and recording of the
song depending on the GPI trigger signal
received from the FOOT SWITCH jack.
GPI (Appendices p. 63)
4. Select “Record” with the TIME/VALUE dial.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Now, you can switch the setting of the FOOT SWITCH
jack between Punch-In and Punch-Out by the foot
switch. Carry out Manual Punch-In as described in
“Using the Record Button (Manual Punch-In 1” (p. 63).
However, use the foot switch instead of the [REC] button to perform the operation.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
], select “Foot
Sw.” If “Foot Sw” does not appear in the display,
the press [F2 (Prm 2)].
fig.03-10(footsw.eps)
64
Specifying Beforehand the Location
for Rerecording (Auto Punch-In)
You can automatically punch in and punch
out at previously specified locations. This
function is called Auto Punch-In. This is
convenient when you need to punch in or out at a precise time. Before you begin recording, set the times for
punch-in/punch-out. There are three ways to set these
times as described below. Use the method appropriate
for your situation.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Using Locators:
1. Preset locate points where you want to punch
in/punch out.
3. Then, without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], press
the LOCATOR button specifying the locate point
for the punch-out time.
fig.03-12(p_io_locate.eps)
Using Markers:
The space between two adjacent mark points can be
used to define the segment for Punch-In Recording.
1. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
2. When you reach the desired punch-in location,
hold down [AUTO PUNCH] and press [TAP].
3. Continue holding down [AUTO PUNCH], wait for
the desired punch-out location, and then press
[TAP] once again.
4. Press [STOP].
fig.03-14(p_io_tap.eps)
Making Fine Adjustments to the Punch-In
Segment:
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [AUTO PUNCH].
fig.03-15a(apunch_io.eps)
1. Preset Markers where you want to punch in and
then punch out.
2. Move to the mark point located at the desired
punch-in time.
3. While holding down [AUTO PUNCH], press
[NEXT].
4. Without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], press [PREVIOUS].
fig.03-13(p_io_mark.eps)
2. The punch-in and punch-out locations appears in
the display. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor to the mark point you want to adjust.
However, if no mark point is stored at the current
location, “–h–m–s–f– —–” appears in the display.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F1 (In)]:
Moves the cursor to the punch-in location.
[F2 (NOW)]:
Enters the current time as the punchin/out point.
[F3 (JUMP)]:
Moves the time to the punch-in/out point.
[F4 (Out)]:
Moves the cursor to the punch-out location.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
3. Enter the located point where you wish to change
with the TIME/VALUE dial.
4. When you are done making the changes, press [F6
(EXIT)].
The utility menu screen appears in the display.
Alternatively, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. Return to
Play condition.
65
Chapter 3
2. While holding down [AUTO PUNCH], press the
LOCATOR button specifying the locate point for
the time at which you want to punch in.
Specifying the Points While the Song Plays
Back:
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Recording Procedure:
1. Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button
for the track you wish to re-record.
2. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
song.
3. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
At this point, the performance that has already been
recorded on the track or tracks that you want to rerecord is monitored.
4. Press the STATUS buttons again.
The indicator alternately blinks red and orange. Now,
confirm that you can hear source you want recorded
to the track coming from the monitors.
5. During playback of the song, each time the button
is pressed, the monitor switches between source
and track. Using the input sensitivity knob, adjust
the volume of the source so that it matches that of
the prerecorded performance.
Repeatedly Recording Over the Same
Area (Loop Recording)
You can repeatedly play back a specified area
(the loop) and use Auto Punch-In Recording
in that area. This is called Loop Recording.
This is convenient for when you want to check the
results immediately after recording, or if you want to
record a number of takes of a guitar solo and compare
the different takes.
fig.03-16(looprec.eps)
Loop start
Punch-in
Playback
Punch-out
Recording
Loop end
Playback
Time
6. Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity, press
[STOP].
7. Press [AUTO PUNCH].
The button indicator lights, and Auto Punch-In
Recording is enabled.
8. Move to a previous locate point where you want to
re-record.
9. Press [REC] .
10. Press [PLAY] again.
Playback of the song begins.
11. The VS-1680 automatically goes into record mode
at the point where the punch-in is set. Start the
song or performance now.
12. When you reach the point where the punch-out is
set, the VS-1680 automatically returns to playback
mode. Press [STOP] to stop the song.
13. Listen to the results of the rerecording. Return to
the beginning of the song and press [PLAY].
66
Before you begin recording, specify the begin and end
times for the loop. There are three ways to specify the
loop times. Use the method appropriate for your situation.
* To specify the area re-recording (the punch-in point and
punch-out point), refer to the previous section “Auto
Punch-In.”
* Make settings so that the loop completely includes the
area to be rerecorded (i.e., from the punch-in point to the
punch-out point). If the area to be rerecorded is not completely within the loop, recording may not start at the
specified location, or may be interrupted in the middle of
the area for recording.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Using Locators:
1. First store locate points where you want to begin
and end the loop.
Chapter 3
2. While holding down [LOOP], press the LOCATOR
button for the locate point where you want the
loop to begin.
3. Without releasing [LOOP], press the LOCATOR
button which specified the end of the loop.
fig.03-18(lp_locate.eps)
Making Fine Adjustments to the Loop:
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [LOOP].
fig.03-21a
To Use Markers:
Adjacent mark points can be used to set the beginning
and end of the loop.
1. First, set mark points where you want to punch in
and punch out.
2. Move to the mark point at the beginning of the
loop.
3. While holding down [LOOP], press [NEXT].
4. Without releasing [LOOP], press [PREVIOUS].
fig.03-19(lp_mark.eps)
2. The loop start and loop end points appear in the
display. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor
to the point you want to adjust. However, if no
mark point is stored at the current location,
“–h–m–s–f– —–” appears in the display.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F1 (Start)]:
Moves the cursor to the loop start
point.
[F2 (NOW)]:
Enters the current time as the loop
start/end point.
[F3 (JUMP)]:
Moves the time to the loop start/end
point.
[F4 (End)]:
Moves the cursor to the loop end
point.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
3. Enter the mark point you want to adjust with the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Specifying The Points While the Song Plays
Back:
1. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
4. When you are finished making the changes, press
[F6 (EXIT)].
The utility menu icon appears in the display.
Alternatively, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. Return to
Play condition.
2. When you reach the desired location for the beginning of the loop, hold down [LOOP] and press
[TAP].
3. Continue holding down [LOOP], and when you
reach the desired location for the end of the loop,
press [TAP] once again.
4. Press [STOP].
fig.03-20(lp_tap.eps)
67
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Recording Procedure:
1. Hold down [REC] and press the STATUS button
for the track you wish to re-record.
2. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
song.
3. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
At this point, the performance that has already been
recorded on the track or tracks that you want to rerecord is monitored.
4. Press the STATUS buttons again.
The indicator alternately blinks red and orange. Now,
confirm that you can hear source you want recorded
to the track coming from the monitors.
5. During playback of the song, each time the button
is pressed, the monitor switches between source
and track. Using the input sensitivity knob, adjust
the volume of the source so that it matches that of
the prerecorded performance.
6. Once you have adjusted the input sensitivity, press
[STOP].
7. Press [LOOP].
The button indicator lights, and Auto Punch-In
Recording is enabled.
8. Press [AUTO PUNCH].
The button indicator lights. You are now set to do
Loop Recording.
9. Press [PLAY].
Playback of the song begins. The song is played back
until the end of the loop is reached, playback will
return to the loop start point, and repeat.
10. Press [REC] where you want to re-record. The VS1680 will then automatically go into record mode
at the point where the punch-in is set. Start the
song or performance then.
11. When you reach the point where the punch-in is
set, the VS-1680 automatically returns to playback
mode. Playback continues until the end of the
loop, and the loop repeats from the start point
once again.
12. With the next playback of the loop, listen to what
you recorded to check the result. If the recording
hasn’t turned out as you intended, repeat Steps 10
and 11.
13. Press [STOP] to stop the song.
14. Listen to the results of the recording once more.
Press [LOOP].
The button indicator goes off.
68
15. Press [AUTO PUNCH].
The button indicator goes off.
16. Return to the beginning of the song and press
[PLAY].
Recording to Other Tracks
(Overdubbing)
In multi-track recording, the normal process is to
record new tracks while listening to the performance
on previously recorded tracks played back. This is
referred to as “overdubbing.”
1. Select the tracks you want to play back. While
holding down [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for the tracks you want to play back (i.e., that you
want to hear while overdubbing).
The button indicators light green.
2. Select the tracks to which you want to record.
While holding down [REC], press the STATUS
buttons for the tracks to which you want to
record.
The button indicators blink red.
3. Select the sources to record to the tracks. While
holding down the STATUS buttons for the tracks
you want to record to, press the SELECT buttons
for the input channels whose sources you want
assigned to the tracks.
The button indicators blink.
4. Now you are ready for overdubbing. Follow the
Steps 4–17 of “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 61), to
record and then check the content.
Recording on V-Track 2
The VS-1680 features 16 tracks, each of which contains
16 auxiliary tracks. These subsidiary tracks are
referred to as “V-tracks.” By using all of these tracks
to their full potential, you can create recordings of up
to 256 (16 x 16) tracks.
1. Press the SELECT button for the track whose Vtrack you wish to switch.
The button indicator lights. The Track Mixer screen
appears in the display.
2. Press [F5 (V.Trk)]. If “V.Trk” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “V.Trk” is displayed,
and then press [F5 (V.Trk)].
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
3. Using the TIME/VALUE dial to set the V-track.
fig.03-21(vtrack.eps)
Track onto which performance data is recorded
Track to be recorded or played back
fig.03-22(effectsel.eps)
Cursor
Current Effect
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5. As described in “Recording to the Tracks” (p. 61),
record and check the contents.
Using Effects
If optional VS8F-2 effect expansion boards are
installed in the VS-1680, up to 4 high-quality stereo
effects will be available for your use. If you do have
the VS8F-2 installed in your VS-1680, try adding some
effects.
* For instructions on how to install the VS8F-2, please read
“Installing the Effects Expansion Board” (Quick Start p.
57).
Function Buttons
[F1 (Preset)]:
[F2 (User)]:
[F4 (Exec)]:
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Displays the Preset patch list.
Displays the User patch list.
Exits the screen after selecting the
effect.
Exits the screen without selecting the
effect.
5. After selecting the effect, press [F4 (Exec)].
The Effects1 settings screen reappears in the display.
Applying Effects to the Playback
Specify the Tracks for Playback:
When playing back a song, you can have effects such
as reverb and delay applied to the sound. Here is an
example of how to hear a song played back using the
VS8F-2 to add reverb to Track 8.
6. Hold down [STOP] and press the STATUS button
for the track you want played back.
The button indicator lights green.
Select an Effect:
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
The Effect A menu appears in the display.
If “No Effect Board” Appears in the
Display
This indicates there is no VS8F-2 installed. In this
case, you cannot use the internal effects.
If the message appears even when a VS8F-2 is
installed, it indicates that the effect expansion
board has not being recognized properly.
Perform the shutdown procedure and turn the
power off as described in “Turning Off the
Power” (p. 32), then reinstall the VS8F-2 correctly.
7. Press the SELECT button for the track to which
you want to apply reverb.
The button indicator lights, and the Track Mixer
screen appears in the display.
8. Press [F1 (EFX1)]. If “EFX1” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “EFX1” is displayed,
then press [F1 (EFX1)].
2. Press [F1 (EFX1)].
The Effects1 settings screen appears in the display.
3. Select the effect. Press [F2 (Sel)].
The effects list appears in the display.
69
Chapter 3
Tracks with no performance data recorded on them
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the effect you wish to use. Here, select “P000
RV:LargeHall.”
At this point, the function buttons work as shown
below.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
9. Press [F6 (PRM.V)].
The effect settings status for all tracks can be viewed.
fig.03-24(eff_prm.eps)
Track 1
Effect Switch
Send Level
Send Pan
10. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to set the effect switch, send level, and pan settings for
each track channel.
Sw (Effect Switch)
This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT bus. In this case, select “Pst.”
Off: The signal is not sent.
Pre: The sound before passing through the channel fader is sent.
Pst: The sound after passing through the channel fader is sent.
Lev (Send Level)
This adjusts the level (0–127) of the signal sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pan (Send Pan)
This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal (L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT
bus.
This will cause the reverb to be applied. With this section, the signal flow will be
follows.
fig.03-25(effloop.eps)
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Level
(Fader)
+
Pan
MIX bus
+
MASTER OUT (L, R)
EFX1 bus
EFX1
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX1
Return
Sw
Level
(Fader)
Balance
Track Channel
11. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Return to Play condition. Play back the song and check to see that the effect is
being applied to the sound.
70
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Return to Play condition.
Now we will see how to add affects to the source at
the INPUT 8 jack, and then record the direct sound
and the sound with effects to Track 8. This is convenient when you want to record vocals with reverb.
Specify the Input Channel to Which the Effect
is to be Applied:
Select the Effect:
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
The Effect A menu appears in the display.
If “No Effect Board” Appears in the
Display
This indicates there is no VS8F-2 installed. In this
case, you cannot use the internal effects.
If the message appears even when a VS8F-2 is
installed, it indicates that the effect expansion
board has not being recognized properly.
Perform the shutdown procedure and turn the
power off as described in “Turning Off the
Power” (p. 32), then reinstall the VS8F-2 correctly.
2. Press [F1 (EFX1)].
The Effects1 settings screen appears in the display.
3. Select the effect. Press [F2 (Sel)].
The effects list appears in the display.
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the effect you wish to use. Here, select “P000
RV:LargeHall.”
At this point, the function buttons work as shown
below.
fig.03-26(effectsel.eps)
Cursor
Current Effect
7. Press the Input Channel 8 SELECT button for the
track to which you want to apply reverb.
The button indicator lights, and the Input Mixer screen
appears in the display.
8. Press [F1 (EFX1)]. If “EFX1” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “EFX1” is displayed,
then press [F1 (EFX1)].
fig.03-27(eff.eps)
Effect Send Switch
Effect Send Level
Effect Send Pan
9. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to set the effect switch, send
level, and pan settings for each track channel.
Sw (Effect Switch)
This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT bus. In
this case, select “Pst.”
Off: The signal is not sent.
Pre: The sound before passing through the channel
fader is sent.
Pst: The sound after passing through the channel
fader is sent.
Lev (Send Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) sent to the
EFFECT bus.
Pan (Send Pan)
This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal
(L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT bus.
Function Buttons
[F1 (Preset)]:
[F2 (User)]:
[F4 (Exec)]:
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Displays the Preset patch list.
Displays the User patch list.
Exits the screen after selecting the
effect.
Exits the screen without selecting the
effect.
5. After selecting the effect, press [F4 (Exec)].
The Effects1 settings screen reappears in the display.
10. Hold down [REC] and press the Track 8 STATUS
button.
The button indicator blinks red.
11. While holding down the Track 8 STATUS button,
press the Input Channel 8 SELECT button and
[EFFECT1 RTN] for Input Channel.
The button indicator blinks. At this point, the mixer is
set up so that both the direct sound and the sound
with effects can be recorded to Track 8.
12. Record and check the content as described in
“Recording to the Tracks” (p. 61).
71
Chapter 3
Applying Effects While Recording
(Send/Return)
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Applying Effects While Recording
(Insert)
Many recordings of electric guitar, vocals, or the like
contain the insertion of effects such as “Guitar Multi”
and “Vocal Multi.”
Here we will explain how you can connect an electric
guitar to the GUITAR (Hi-Z) jack, add a stereo effect
using the Guitar Multi effect, and record it to Tracks
9/10.
[F1 (Preset)]:
[F2 (User)]:
[F4 (Exec)]:
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Displays the Preset patch list.
Displays the User patch list.
Exits the screen after selecting the
effect.
Exits the screen without selecting the
effect.
6. After selecting the effect, press [F4 (Exec)].
The Effects1 settings screen reappears in the display.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Select the Effect:
1. Connect your electric guitar to the GUITAR (Hi-Z)
jack.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
The Effect A menu appears in the display.
If “No Effect Board” Appears in the
Display
This indicates there is no VS8F-2 installed. In this
case, you cannot use the internal effects.
If the message appears even when a VS8F-2 is
installed, it indicates that the effect expansion
board has not being recognized properly.
Perform the shutdown procedure and turn the
power off as described in “Turning Off the
Power” (p. 32), then reinstall the VS8F-2 correctly.
3. Press [F1 (EFX1)].
The Effects1 settings screen appears in the display.
4. Select the effect. Press [F2 (Sel)].
The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the effect you wish to use. Here, let’s select “P051
GT:Country.”
The function buttons now work as shown below.
fig.03-29(effectsel_gt.eps)
Cursor
Current Effect
Function Buttons
Specify the Input Channel to Which the Effect
is to be Applied:
8. Press the Input Channel 8 SELECT button.
The Input Mixer screen appears in the display.
9. Press [F1 (Ef1In)]. If “Ef1In” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “Ef1In” is displayed,
then press [F1 (Ef1In)].
10. Press [YES].
fig.03-30(effins.eps)
Effect Insert Switch
Insert Return Level
Insert Send Level
11. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
effect switch, send level, and pan settings for
Input Channel 8.
(Switch)
This sets how the Insert functions. In this case, select
“InsR.”
Off: There is no Insert.
Ins: Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect.
InsL: Inserts in the left channel of the stereo effect.
InsR: Inserts in the right channel of the stereo effect.
InsS: Inserts in the left and right channels of the
stereo effect in series.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (-42–6 dB) sent to
the Insert effect.
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (-42–6 dB) returned
from the Insert effect.
72
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
12. Press [PAGE] until “Pan” is displayed in [F1], then press [F1 (Pan)].
fig.03-31(pan.eps)
Master Send Switch
Chapter 3
Master Send Pan
13. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. With the TIME/VALUE dial, set
the Switch and Pan settings for Input Channel 8.
(Master Send Switch)
When this is set to “On,” the source from each input channel, rather than being
assigned to the recording bus, is sent directly to the MIX bus. Set this to “On”
when, for example, you simply want to mix the inputs without recording them.
However, the sources that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are disabled.
(Master Send Pan)
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the signal sent to the MIX bus and
the RECORDING bus. For now select "R63."
14. Press the Input Channel 7 SELECT button.
15. Repeat the Steps 9–13 to make the settings for Input Channel 7 as same as
those for Input Channel 8. However, select “InsL” and “L63” for Steps 11
and 13, respectively.
16. Now the setup is completed. In this case, the signal flow will be as the follows.
fig.03-32(insrec.eps)
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Snd
Level
Rtn
Level
Level
(Fader)
Pan
Rtn
Level
Level
(Fader)
Pan
Level
(Fader)
Pan
(InsL)
Input Channel 7
EFX1
(InsR)
Input Channel 8
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Snd
Level
REC bus
MIX bus
STATUS
TRACK
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-16
EQ
(2band, 3band)
MASTER OUT
Track Channel 9/10
73
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
17. Hold down [REC] and press the Track 9/10 STATUS button.
The button indicator blinks red.
18. Hold down the Track 9/10 STATUS button and
input channel 7 and 8 SELECT buttons.
19.Record and check the content as described in
“Recording to the Tracks” (p. 61).
Recording Digital Signals
With the VS-1680, you can record the digital signals
output by CD players, DAT and MD recorders,
Roland VS-880, and other digital audio devices as is.
* The VS-1680’s digital interface conforms to S/P DIF.
When recording digital signals, be sure to digital audio
devices conforming to the same standards.
S/P DIF (Appendices p. 64)
Items Necessary for Digital Recording
• VS-1680 (1)
• CD player, DAT and MD recorder, or other digital
audio device or devices
• Digital connector cable (coaxial or optical)
Make the Digital Connections
Connect the digital output connector of your audio
device with the VS-1680’s DIGITAL IN connector.
DIGITAL IN1 is a coaxial connector, DIGITAL IN2 an
optical connector. Use the appropriate connector for
your audio device.
DIGITAL IN1 (coaxial) and DIGITAL IN2 (optical)
cannot be used simultaneously. Select one of the connectors for use.
Match the Sample Rates
It can record the digital signals when the sample rate
of the song is set to match the sample rate of the input
source.
The song created when a disk drive is initialized will
have a sample rate of 44.1 kHz. If the sample rate of
the input source is other than 44.1 kHz, create a new
song with that sample rate (p. 58). Then, if you wish to
create original audio CDs, select that sample rate for
44.1 kHz (p. 58).
74
In Order to Make a Digital Connection
with Your CD Player
At the time of purchase, the VS-1680 is not able to
record the output of CD players via its DIGITAL IN
connectors. Perform the following procedure when
you wish to make a digital connection with your CD
player.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBAL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “CD Digital Record.”
] to move the
4. With the TIME/VALUE dial, select “On.”
5. A message concerning copyright appears in the
display. After reading this carefully, press
[ENTER (YES)].
This message also appears in the back cover of this
Manual.
6. Continuing, a message with the licensing conditions is displayed. After reading this carefully, if
you agree to the conditions, press [ENTER (YES)].
This message also appears in the back cover of this
Manual. From now on, you can make a digital connection with CD players. If you do not agree to the conditions, then press [NO].
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
To Prevent Digital Connections with CD
Players
Use the following procedure when you want to
prevent digital connections with CD players.
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBAL” does not
appear in [F2], first press [PAGE] until
“GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2
(GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor to “CD Digital Record.”
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select “Off.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Select the Master Clock
Synchronize the VS-1680’s reference clock (the master
clock) with the digital signal from the digital audio
device.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Pressing [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor to “MasterClk.”
If “MasterClk is not displayed, then press [F1 (Prm 1)].
fig.03-33(master.eps)
If “Digital In Unlock” is Displayed
This indicates that no digital signal is being
received from the DIGITAL IN connector.
Alternatively, it may indicate that the sample rate
selected for the song does not match the sample
rate of the digital device connected to the DIGITAL IN connector. In this state, you cannot
record using the digital connection.
Adjusting the Tone
(Equalizer)
A two-band (low, high) or three-band (low, mid, high)
parametric equalizer is provided for each channel.
First make equalizer adjustments separately for each
channel. If you have recorded any stereo pairs, be sure
that the same settings are made for both tracks. Then,
while paying attention to the overall balance, make
final adjustments for equalizer, pan, and volume level
for each channel.
* If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound,
you may notice a clicking noise. This is not a malfunction.
If the noise is objectionable, make adjustments while the
sound is not playing.
1. Press the SELECT button for the track whose
equalizer setting you wish to adjust.
The button indicator lights, and the Track Mixer
screen appears in the display.
2. Press [F2 (Low)]. If “Low” does not appear in [F2],
first press [PAGE] until “Low” is displayed, and
then press [F2 (Low)].
MasterClk (Master Clock)
This sets the VS-1680’s reference clock.
DIGIN1: Based on the digital signal received from the
DIGITAL IN 1 connector (coaxial).
INT:
Based on the VS-1680’s reference clock.
DIGIN2: Based on the digital signal received from the
DIGITAL IN 2 connector (optical).
3. Press [YES].
4. Select “DIGIN1” or “DIGIN2” with the
TIME/VALUE dial.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
75
Chapter 3
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If
the System menu icon does not appear, then press
[F6 (EXIT)].
If “Digital In Lock” is Displayed
This indicates that the reference clock for the sample rate is set by the digital signal from the DIGITAL IN connector. You can record using the digital connection.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
The status of the equalizer (curve) appears in the display.
+
EQM gain
(-12–12dB)
fig.03-34(3eq.eps)
Switch
Gain
Selector
0
Frequency
Gain
-
Frequency
EQM frequency (200Hz–8kHz)
Q (definition)
fig.03-34b(eq_mid.eps)
+
EQM Q
(0.5–16)
Low-range
High-range
Middle-range
Gain
0
Frequency
Sw (Equalizer Switch)
Enables and disables the equalizer.
(Equalizer Select)
This setting selects the equalizer to be used.
2 Band EQ:
2-band equalizer
3 Band EQ:
3-band equalizer
Low
This adjusts the gain (-12–12 dB) and the center frequency (40 Hz–1.5 kHz) of the low-range (shelving)
equalizer.
-
High
This adjusts the gain (-12–12 dB) and the center frequency (500 Hz–18 kHz) of the high-range (shelving)
equalizer.
fig.03-34d(eq_high.eps)
+
EQH gain
(-12–12dB)
fig.03-34c(eq_q.eps)
+
EQL gain (-12–12dB)
Gain
0
Frequency
Gain
0
Frequency
-
EQL frequency (40Hz–1.5kHz)
Mid
This adjusts the gain (-12–12 dB), center frequency
(200 Hz–8 kHz), and Q (definition: 0.5–16) of the midrange (peaking) equalizer. You cannot use this with
the 2-band equalizer.
fig.03-34a(eq_low.eps)
76
EQH frequency (500Hz–18kHz)
5. Repeat Steps 1–4 if you wish to make adjustments
to other equalizers.
6. When you are finished making the adjustments,
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. If necessary, save the song
(p. 63).
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Combining the Contents of
Tracks (Track Bouncing)
You can mix the performances recorded on two or
more tracks and rerecord them onto a different empty
track. This operation is known as track bouncing. It is
a convenient technique to use when you have run out
of free tracks.
In this section, we will mix the performances recorded
on tracks 5–8, and rerecord the result in stereo on track
9/10.
fig.03-35(bounce.eps)
Track 5
Performance data 5
Performance data 5
Track 6
Performance data 6
Performance data 6
Track 7
Performance data 7
Performance data 7
Track 8
Performance data 8
Performance data 8
4. Usually, the source entering the INPUT1–2 jack is
also assigned for recording on Track 9/10. When
you want to record only the material on Tracks
5–8, then while pressing the STATUS button for
Track 9/10, press the Input Channel 1–2 SELECT
button.
The button indicator goes off.
5. Now Tracks 5–8 can be monitored on Track
Channel 9/10.
Adjust the Pan for Each Track:
6. Press the Track Channel 5 SELECT button.
The button indicator lights, and the Track Mixer
screen appears in the display.
7. Press [F1 (Pan)]. If “Pan” does not appear in [F1],
first press [PAGE] until “Pan” is displayed, and
then press [F1 (Pan)].
8. Press [F6 (PRM.V)].
The pan settings for all tracks can be viewed.
fig.03-37(pan_prm.eps)
Performance data 5+7
Track 9/10
Performance data 6+8
Before Track Bouncing
After Track Bouncing
* Volume, pan, equalizer, effects, and other settings cannot
be adjusted on tracks mixed with track bouncing. Do not
use track bouncing with tracks to which you want to
apply the equalizer and effects separately.
Specify the Tracks for Playback and
Recording:
1. While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for Tracks 5–8.
The button indicators light green.
2. Press the STATUS button for Track 9/10, so that
the button indicators light orange.
9. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
switch and pan settings for each track.
Sw (Master Send Switch)
When this is set to “On,” the source from each input
channel, rather than being assigned to the RECORDING bus, is sent directly to the MIX bus. Set this to
“On” when, for example, you simply want to mix the
inputs without recording them. However, the sources
that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are disabled.
Pan (Master Send Pan)
This adjusts the pan setting (L63–0–R63) of the signal
sent to the MIX bus or the RECORDING bus.
3. While pressing the STATUS button for Track 9/10,
press the SELECT buttons on Track Channels 5–8.
The button indicators blink.
77
Chapter 3
* The 3-band (low, mid, high) equalizer can be used on
channel faders in only one mixer mode — either the Track
mixer or Input mixer — at a time. You cannot use the
equalizer in both mixers simultaneously on the same
channel. For example, if you are using the 3-band equalizer on Track Channel 1, then you cannot use it on Input
Channel 1.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Adjust the Volume Levels for Each Track:
Applying Reverb While Track Bouncing
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Sometimes you may want to record previously-recorded tracks to another track while apply the effects to
them. Here is how to add reverb to Tracks 5–8 while
bouncing these tracks to Track 9/10. This can be convenient when you want to add spatial effects such as
reverb and delay to each track while mixing down.
11. Press [FADER] so that the TR side indicator lights.
12. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
13. Adjust the volume balance with the faders for
Channels 5–8. The presently monitored sound
(volume levels, pan) will be recorded to Track
9/10 just as you hear it. You can raise the volume
as much as possible without causing distortion.
Select the Effect:
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)].
The Effect A menu is displayed.
14. Press [STOP] to stop playback of the song.
2. Press [F1 (EFX1)].
Record and Check the Content:
3. Select an effect. Press [F2 (Sel)]. The effects list
appears in the display.
15. Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the
song.
16. While pressing [REC], press the STATUS button
for Track 9/10.
The button indicator blinks red.
17. Press [REC].
The button indicator blinks red.
4. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the effect you wish to use. Here, let’s select “P000
RV:LargeHall.”
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
fig.03-38(effectsel.eps)
Cursor
Current Effect
18. Press [PLAY].
The button indicator lights green, and starts recording.
19. When recording is finished, press [STOP].
This stops the song.
20. Check the content of the recording. Press [ZERO]
to return to the beginning of the song.
21. Mute (sound is prevented from playing) Tracks
5–8. Press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 5–8.
The button indicators go off.
22. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
Use the channel fader 9/10 and the master fader to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
Function Buttons
[F1 (Preset)]:
[F2 (User)]:
[F4 (Exec)]:
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Displays the Preset patch list.
Displays the User patch list.
Exits the screen after selecting the
effect.
Exits the screen without selecting the
effect.
5. After selecting the effect, press [F4 (Exec)].
78
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Specify the Track to Which the Effect is to be Applied:
6. Press the Track Channel 5 SELECT button.
The button indicator lights, and the Track Mixer screen appears in the display.
Chapter 3
7. Press [F1 (EFX1)]. If “EFX1” does not appear in [F1], first press [PAGE] until
“EFX1” is displayed, then press [F1 (EFX1)].
8. Press [F6 (PRM.V)].
The effects settings status for all tracks can be viewed.
fig.03-40(eff_prm.eps)
Track 1
Effect Switch
Send Level
Send Pan
9. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to make the effect switch, send level, and pan settings
for each track channel.
Sw (Effect Switch)
This sets how the signal is sent to the EFFECT bus. In this case, select “Pst.”
Off: The signal is not sent.
Pre: The sound before passing through the channel fader is sent.
Pst: The sound after passing through the channel fader is sent.
Lev (Send Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (0–127) sent to the EFFECT bus.
Pan (Send Pan)
This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal (L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT
bus.
Specify the Tracks for Playback and Recording:
10. Hold down [STOP] and press the STATUS buttons for Tracks 5–8.
The button indicators light green.
11. Press the STATUS button for Track 9/10, so that the button indicator light
orange.
12. Hold down the STATUS button for Track 9/10 and press the Track Channel
SELECT buttons for Tracks 5–8.
The button indicators start blinking.
79
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
13. Normally, the signal received via the INPUT 1
jack is also assigned for recording on Track 9/10.
When you wish to rerecord only Tracks 5–8, then
while holding down the Track 9/10 STATUS button, press the INPUT Channel 1 SELECT button.
The button indicator goes off.
14. Now you have set it up so that you can monitor
Tracks 5–8 and Effect Return on Track Channel
9/10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Record and Check the Content:
15. Carry out track bouncing by following the procedure described in “Combining the Contents of
Tracks” (p. 77).
Creating a Master Tape
When you finish recording a song, adjust the balance
of each track (equalizer, pan, and volume level), and
using your stereo recorder, record a two-channel
stereo master mix to a stereo cassette, DAT, MD, or
other media. This process is called mixdown.
Prepare for Mixdown:
1. Hold down [STOP] and press the STATUS buttons
for all tracks you want to have mixed down.
The indicators light green.
2. Press [FADER], so that the TR (Track) indicator to
light.
3. Use the channel faders to adjust the volume of
each track. First determine the volume of the
song’s main tracks (usually the vocals or perhaps
a guitar melody). Then, set levels for the other
tracks. It is a good idea to create a balance in
which the volume of the other tracks is lower than
the main tracks. Afterwards, make final adjustments to the pan and equalizer settings for each
track as you listen to the overall mix.
To Record to a Cassette Tape
1. Connect the VS-1680’s MASTER jacks to the input
jacks of your cassette recorder.
2. Adjust the recording levels for the cassette
recorder. Adjust the output volume with the VS1680’s master fader, making it as high as possible
without causing any input overload on the
recorder. Set the recording levels on the cassette
recorder as high as possible before causing distortion, with the level meter moving a lot.
80
3. Press [ZERO] on the VS-1680.
4. Put the cassette recorder in record mode.
5. Press [PLAY] on the VS-1680 to begin playback of
the song.
If you want to fade in or out, use the VS-1680’s master
fader for this.
6. When you have finished recording, stop the cassette recorder.
7. Press [STOP] on the VS-1680.
8. Listen to the recorded result. Rewind the tape and
play back the recording.
Recording with DAT and MD Recorders
The VS-1680 features two types of digital out connectors, DIGITAL OUT1 (coaxial) and DIGITAL OUT2
(optical), either of which is ready to use. At the factory
settings, these connectors are set to output the same
sound as the MASTER jacks.
1. Connect the digital input connector of your digital
recorder with the VS-1680’s DIGITAL OUT connector.
2. Set your digital recorder to enable it to record digital signals. Match the recorder’s sample rate to
that of song recorded on the VS-1680 (normally at
44.1 kHz). Many digital recorders can determine
the sample rate automatically. Match the rates
manually only when special settings are necessary.
* There are some DAT recorders that cannot record digital
signals at 44.1 kHz. If such instances, change to an analog connection and set the recorder to enable it to record
analog signals.
3. Press [ZERO] on the VS-1680.
4. Put the digital recorder in record mode.
5. Press [PLAY] on the VS-1680.
Playback of the song begins. If you want to fade in or
out, use the VS-1680’s master fader for this.
6. When you have finished recording, stop the cassette recorder.
7. Press [STOP] on the VS-1680.
8. Listen to the recorded result. Rewind the tape and
play back the recording.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
To Prohibit Digital Copying
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Using [
], [
], [
], and [
“Digital Copy Protect.”
Protecting Songs
(Song Protect)
The possibility that a performance saved to
the disk may still be mistakenly overwritten
(recorded over), or that the song itself may be
accidentally deleted has been considered. You can protect songs from being rewritten in situations such as
these. The function is called Song Protect.
Turning on Song Protect disables the following operations.
• Recording
• Undo (and Redo)
• Song Name, Song Optimize, Song Arrange, Song
Split, and Song Combine
• Track Edit and Phrase Edit
• Recording to Sync Tracks
• Creating Tempo Maps
• Song Store
], select
Digital Copy Protect (Digital Copy Protect
Switch)
This setting determines whether or not the digitally
mixed down tape can be later copied digitally.
Off:
Digital copying is not prohibited.
On:
Digital copying is prohibited.
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. If you want to prohibit digital copying, the set this to “On.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Returns to Play condition.
With this procedure, you have made it so that your
digitally mixed master tapes cannot be later copied
digitally onto DAT tapes or similar digital media.
* Some DAT recorders do not conform to SCMS standards
or cannot be connected digitally to CD players. If you are
using such a DAT recorder, then if you set the Digital
Protect Switch to “On,” the digital output from the VS1680 cannot be copied to the DAT recorder. In such
instances, set the Digital Protect Switch to “Off.”
About Effective Use
Song Protect performs the same function as the
protect tab or switch on floppy disks and magnetoptical disks. Thus, even if Song Protect is turned
on, you can still store locate points and mark
points, and carry out operations such as changing
Scenes. However, when you try to save the work
you have done, “Song Protected” appears in the
display, and you are prevented from continuing
any further with the save. However, when you
remove Song Protect, any settings made when
Song Protect was on are lost.
After you have finished all work for the day, turn
on Song Protect immediately before shutting off
the power to the VS-1680. Furthermore, right
after turning on the power to the VS-1680 at the
beginning the day’s operations, you should
immediately turn off Song Protect.
SCMS (Appendices p. 64)
81
Chapter 3
When mixing down from the VS-1680 to a DAT
recorder or similar recorder via a digital connection,
you can prevent digital copying of the tape to which
the mixdown has been recorded.
For example, you are allowed to make only one copy
of a regular audio CD onto a DAT tape. Once the digital copy has been made to the DAT tape, you cannot
make further copies onto other digital devices using
digital connections. This function makes DAT tapes
copied digitally from the VS-1680 behave as those
copied digitally from CDs.
Chapter 3 Multi-Track Recording
Protecting Performances
1. Make the current song the one to which you want
to apply Song Protect.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
3. Press [F4 (PROTC)]. If “PROTC” does not appear
in [F4], first press [PAGE] until “PROTC” is displayed, and then press [F4(PROTC)].
4. ”Song Protect Off → On, Execute?” appears in the
display. Press [F4 (Exec)].
5. A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES].
6. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to have Song
Protect applied to the song after it is saved, press
[YES]; if not, then press [NO].
7. After the Protect is applied, “--- Complete ---”
appears in the display. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
To Remove Song Protect
1. Select the song from which you currently want to
remove the protect function.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
3. Press [F4 (PROTC)]. If “PROTC” does not appear
in [F4], first press [PAGE] until “PROTC” is displayed, and then press [F4 (PROTC)].
4. The message “Song Protect On → Off, Execute?”
appears in the display. Press [F4 (Exec)].
5. A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES].
6. When the protect function is removed,
“--- Complete ---” appears in the display. Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
82
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
This chapter explains the content and procedures for
editing sound that has been recorded. Please read this
chapter to gain an understanding of the concepts of
“editing” described in this section.
About Editing Operations
This operation copies the playback data of a
specified area to another location. For example, this is convenient when you play the
same chorus both at the beginning and end
of a song.
fig.04-02(tr_cp.eps)
Example 1: Copying twice to the same track
A
Start
A'
End
Chapter 4
On a tape recorder, in order to modify a performance
that has been recorded you have to erase the performance which you recorded previously. Additionally,
if you wish to change the composition of a song, you
must re-record it from the beginning, or use scissors
and tape to splice sections or the recording. In either
case, with the tape itself subject to handling, it can
never be returned to its original condition. This type of
editing is known as destructive editing.
Compare with a tape recorder, with digital disk
recording, since copying data has negligible effect on
the sound, you can copy the original data before editing and back it up. It is also easy to copy parts of the
data to different locations, or to erase specified portions of the data (Track Edit). Furthermore, even if you
make a mistake during Punch-In Recording or Track
Bouncing, you can restore data to its condition any
number of steps before the edit, without the edited
content being deleted (Undo function). Editing of this
type which allows the original data to be recovered is
known as non-destructive editing.
Repeating Performance Data (Track
Copy)
A"
To
Time
Example 2: Copying twice to a different track
B
B'
B"
Track Edit
To edit the sound, you will need to specify the track or
V-track and the location where you wish to edit. First
press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], and begin each operation
from Play condition.
How to Specify the Range (Locations) You
Want to Edit
The three ways to specify the range (locations) you
want to edit are shown below. Use the one appropriate for your situation.
Using the TIME/VALUE Dial
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the location where you want to make settings, then rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
Using the Function Buttons
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the location where you want to make settings, then press [F2 (NOW)]. The current time is
directly input to the location where you want to set.
Using the LOCATOR Buttons
Hold down [SHIFT] and press the LOCATOR buttons ([1]–[4]). The current time corresponding to
the button pressed is input directly to the location
where you want to make settings.
[SHIFT] + [START (1)]: Start point
[SHIFT] + [END (2)]: End point
[SHIFT] + [FROM (3)]: From point
[SHIFT] + [TO (4)]:
To point
Start
End
To
Time
* Set the length of the data to be copied so that it is greater
than 0.5 seconds. With data shorter than 0.5 seconds,
even though it can be copied, the sound will not play back.
1. You can use Track Copy with the tracks that are
currently audible. Select the V-track that contains
the copy source playback data, and prepare that
data for playback.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
4. Press [F2 (Copy)]. If “Copy” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “Copy” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (Copy)].
5. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
6. Press the track channel SELECT button for the
copy source track.
The button indicator lights.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track you want to copy, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
83
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
This copies the performance data on the track containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the marks on all the tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-03(tr_cp_sel.eps)
7. Press the STATUS button for the copy destination
track.
The button indicator lights red.
Rotating the TIME/VALUE dial allows you to specify
the copy destination V-track. For example, “1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates “Track
9 (Stereo Track 9/10, left channel), V-track 1.”
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as copy destinations for other Tracks.
END (End point)
Specifies the ending time of the copy range.
FROM (From point)
Specifies the time of the copy source playback data in
relation to the “To” point. Normally you will set this
to be the same as the Start point.
Using FROM Effectively
Normally, the data is copied starting at the specified copy destination time. However, if you want
to have the copy made with reference to a point
within the designated range where a specific
sound occurs, set this with “FROM.”
For example, suppose that you wish to copy a
sound effect of a time bomb ticking and then
exploding, and that you want to place the explosion at a specific timing location. Normally, in
order to specify the copy destination time, you
would have to calculate the time until the explosion occurs. In such cases, however, you can specify “FROM” as “the copy source time at which the
explosion begins” and “TO” (the reference time of
the copy destination) as “the copy destination
time at which you want the explosion to occur.”
This lets you copy the data with the explosion
placed with precisely the right timing.
fig.04-05(tr_cp_from.eps)
Example3: Copying using the “FROM” setting
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 if you want to copy multiple
tracks simultaneously.
C
9. Press [F1 (Back)].
10. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
] to move the
C'
fig.04-04(tr_cp_prm)
Start From
End
To
Time
Copy Time
This specifies the number of times (1–99) the data is to
be copied.
+Insert
When this is set to “On,” a blank space is first inserted
in the specified range, and then the copy is carried out.
fig.04-06(tr_cp_ins.eps)
A
A'
START (Start point)
Specifies the starting time of the copy range.
Start
84
End
To
Time
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
TO (To point)
Specifies the reference time of the copy destination.
11. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Copy.
4. Press [F3 (Move)]. If “Move” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “Move” is displayed,
and then press [F3 (Move)].
5. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
12. When the copy is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
This operation moves the playback data in a
specified range to another location. This is
convenient for correcting timing mistakes that
can occur during recording.
fig.04-09(tr_mv_sel.eps)
fig.04-08(tr_mv.eps)
Example 1: Moving with in the same track
A
Start
A
End
To
Time
Example 2: Moving to a different track
B
B
Start
End
To
Time
* Set the length of the data to be moved so that it is greater
than 0.5 seconds. With data shorter than 0.5 seconds,
even though it can be moved, the sound will not play
back. In addition, make sure that no data remains within
0.5 seconds before or after the designated range. Data
remaining within this 0.5 seconds will not be played back.
1. You can move the tracks that are currently audible. Select the V-track that contains the move
source playback data, and prepare that data for
playback.
7. Press the STATUS button for the move destination
track.
The button indicator lights red.
Rotating the TIME/VALUE dial allows you to specify
the move destination V-track. For example, “1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates “Track
9 (Stereo Track 9/10, left channel), V-track 1.”
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as move destinations for other Tracks.
8. Repeat Steps 6 and 7 if you want to move multiple
tracks simultaneously.
9. Press [F1 (Back)].
10. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
] to move the
fig.04-10(tr_mv_prm.eps)
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
85
Chapter 4
Moving Performance Data (Track Move)
6. Press the SELECT button for the channel containing the move source track.
The button indicator lights.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track you want to move, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
This moves the performance data on the track containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the marks on all the tracks simultaneously.
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
+Insert
When this is set to “On,” first, a blank space is inserted
in the specified range, and then the move is carried out.
fig.04-12(tr_mv_ins)
A
A'
Start
End
To
Time
TO (To point)
Specifies the reference time of the move destination.
START (Start point)
Specifies the starting time of the move range.
11. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Move.
END (End point)
Specifies the ending time of the move range.
12. When the move is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
FROM (From point)
Specifies the time of the move source playback data in relation to the
To point. Normally you will set this to be the same as the Start point.
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Using FROM Effectively
Normally, the data is copied starting at the specified move destination time. However, if you want
to have the move made with reference to a point
within the designated range where a specific
sound occurs, set this with “FROM.”
For example, suppose that you wish to move a
sound effect of a time bomb ticking and then
exploding, and that you want to place the explosion at a specific timing location. Normally, in
order to specify the move destination time, you
would have to calculate the time until the explosion occurs. In such cases, however, you can specify “FROM” as “the move source time at which
the explosion begins” and “TO” (the reference
time of the move destination) as “the move destination time at which you want the explosion to
occur.” This lets you move the data with the
explosion placed with precisely the right timing.
fig.04-11(tr_mv_from.eps)
Example3: Moving using the “FROM” setting
Exchanging Performance Data
Between Tracks (Track Exchange)
This operation exchanges the playback data
of two tracks.
fig.04-14(tr_xch.eps)
Example: Exchanging tracks 1 and 2
Track1
A
B
C
Track2
D
E
D
E
Track1
Track2
A
B
C
Time
1. Select the V-track containing the source playback
data to be exchanged.
C
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
C
Start From
86
End
To
Time
4. Press [F4 (Xchg)]. If “Xchg” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “Xchg” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (Xchg)].
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Inserting a Blank Space Into
Performance Data (Track Insert)
This operation inserts blank space at the specified location.
fig.04-17(tr_ins.eps)
Chapter 4
5. Press the SELECT button for the channel containing the exchange source track.
The button indicator lights.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track you want to exchange,
and then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
This exchanges the performance data on the track containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the marks on all the tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-15(tr_xch_sel.eps)
START
TO
Time
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
area into which the data will be inserted. Any sound
which is within 0.5 seconds of the inserted data will not
be played back.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
6. Press the STATUS button for the exchange destination track.
The button indicator lights red.
Rotating the TIME/VALUE dial allows you to specify
the exchange destination V-track. For example, “1-1”
indicates “Track 1, V-track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates
“Track 9 (Stereo Track 9/10, left channel), V-track 1.”
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as exchange destinations for other Tracks.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if you want to exchange multiple tracks simultaneously.
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Exchange.
3. Press [F5 (Ins)]. If “Ins” does not appear in [F5],
first press [PAGE] until “Ins” is displayed, and
then press [F5 (Ins)].
4. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
5. Press the SELECT button for the track into which
you want to insert a blank space.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track into which you want to
insert a blank space, and then press [F3 (MARK)] or
[YES].
This inserts a blank space in the performance data on
the track containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is
pressed, you can place or remove the marks on all the
tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-18(tr_ins_sel)
9. When the exchange is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
87
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
A
] to move the
fig.04-19(tr_ins_prm)
Start
End
Time
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
area to be cut. Any sound within 0.5 seconds of the cut
data will not be played back.
* While it may seem that the performance data has disappeared, the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk.
Thus, even when you carry out the Track Cut procedure,
the free disk space shown in the display does not change.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
START (Start point)
Specifies the starting time of the performance data
that you wish to insert a blank space.
TO (To Point)
This specifies the point to which the performance data
designated by “START” is moved.
All V.Tracks (All V-Tracks)
Normally, blank spaces can be inserted in the tracks
that are audible. If you wish the same blank space to
be inserted in all tracks, set this to “On.”
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Insert.
9. When the insert is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F6 (Cut)]. If “Cut” does not appear in [F6],
first press [PAGE] until “Cut” is displayed, and
then press [F6 (Cut)].
4. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
5. Press the SELECT button for the track on which
you want to carry out Track Cut.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track on which you want to
carry out Track Cut, and then press [F3 (MARK)] or
[YES].
This cuts the performance data on the track containing
the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can place
or remove the marks on all the tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-22(tr_cut_sel)
Deleting Performance Data (Track Cut)
This operation cuts playback data from the
specified area. When playback data is cut
using this operation, any playback data following the data that was cut will move forward to fill
the gap. To use the analogy of a tape recorder, this
operation is like cutting an unwanted portion out of
an audio tape, and splicing the ends.
fig.04-21(tr_cut.eps)
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
88
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
] to move the
A
fig.04-23(tr_cut_prm.eps)
Start
End
Time
START (Start point)
Specifies the starting time of the segment to be cut.
END (End point)
Specifies the ending time of the segment to be cut.
All V.Tracks (All V-Tracks)
Normally, data can be cut from the tracks that are currently audible. If you wish the same segment to be cut
from all tracks, set this to “On.”
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Cut.
9. When the cut is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Erasing Performance Data (Track Erase)
This operation erases playback data from the
specified area. If this operation is used to
erase playback data, even if playback data
exists after the area that was erased, it will not be
moved forward. To use the analogy of a tape recorder,
this operation is like recording silence over an
unwanted section of the tape.
* While it may seem that the performance data has disappeared, the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk.
Thus, even when you carry out the Track Erase procedure, the free disk space shown in the display does not
change.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F2 (Erase)]. If “Erase” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “Erase” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (Erase)].
4. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
5. Press the SELECT button for the track on which
you want to carry out Track Erase.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track on which you want to
carry out Track Erase, and then press [F3 (MARK)] or
[YES].
This erases the performance data on the track containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the marks on all the tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-26(tr_ers_sel.eps)
fig.04-25(tr_ers.eps)
89
Chapter 4
* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the
area to be erased. Any sound within 0.5 seconds of the
erased data is not played back.
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
Example 1: Compression
] to move the
fig.04-27(tr_ers_prm.eps)
Start
To
End
Time
Example 2: Expansion
START (Start point)
Specifies the starting time of the segment to be erased.
END (End point)
Specifies the ending time of the segment to be erased.
All V.Tracks (All V-Tracks)
Normally, data can be erased from the tracks that are
audible. If you wish the same segment to be erased
from all tracks, set this to “On.”
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Erase.
9. When Track Erase is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Modifying the Playback Time of the
Performance Data (Track Time
Compression/Expansion)
This operation allows you to expand or compress the playback time of a song to a specified length of time. You can specify the
amount of compression or expansion in a range of
75–125%, but the more extreme the settings, the more
adverse the effect will be on the sound quality. We recommend that you normally keep compression and
expansion within a range of 93–107 %.
fig.04-29(tr_comp.eps)
Start
End To
Time
In general, when you compress or expand the playback time, the pitch changes in proportion to the
amount of compression or expansion. For example, if
the playback time is shortened, the pitch of the sound
played back then rises. On the VS-1680, you can select
whether the playback pitch changes in accordance
with the ratio of compression or expansion, or
whether the original playback pitch is preserved.
* Track Compression/Expansion creates new performance
data with a different playback time. For this reason, it
cannot be executed if there is not sufficient space on the
current drive.
* It is not possible to make Track Compression/Expansion
settings when the elapsed time from the Start Point to the
End Point or from the Start Point to the To Point is less
than 0.5 seconds.
* Do not compress data to a period of 0.5 seconds or shorter.
If it is compressed to 0.5 seconds or less, the sound will
not be played.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F3 (CmpEx)]. If “CmpEx” does not appear
in [F3], first press [PAGE] until “CmpEx” is displayed, and then press [F3 (CmpEx)].
4. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
5. Press the SELECT button for the track you want to
compress or expand.
The button indicator lights red.
90
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the track you want to compress or
expand, and then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
This compresses or expands the performance data on
the track containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is
pressed, you can place or remove the marks on all the
tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-30(tr_comp_sel)
TO (To point)
This specifies the ending time location that will result
from the compression or expansion.
Amplitude
This specifies the volume level ratio (50, 60, 70, 80, 90,
100%) that will result from the conversion. Normally,
the default value of 60% is recommended. If the volume level after conversion is too low, use the Undo
function to return to the original data, increase the
amplitude settings, and try the operation again.
However, excessively high settings can introduce
noise in the data.
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
] to move the
fig.04-31(tr_comp_prm)
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes the compression or expansion.
* Be aware that, depending on conditions, it may take some
time for compression or expansion to be completed. This is
not a malfunction. Progress of the operation is shown in
the display: do not turn off the power until the
compression or expansion the track is completed. You can cancel compression or expansion by
pressing [NO].
9. When the compression or expansion is completed
correctly, “Complete” appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Naming Tracks (Track Name)
START (Start point)
This specifies when compression or expansion of the
playback time starts.
Normally, each track is given a name as is
shown below.
fig.04-33(tr_name.eps)
END (End point)
This specifies when compression or expansion of the
playback time ends.
Pitch Mode
If you want the playback pitch to change as a result of
the compression or expansion, set this to “Variable”; if
not, set this to “Fixed.”
Track V-track
Track Name (up to 16 characters)
91
Chapter 4
Type
This specifies the type of conversion. Select the setting
that fits your needs or that matches the type song you
are working with.
A: Vocal, Narrations
For vocals or narration.
B: Slow-tempo Songs
For slow-tempo songs such as slow ballads.
C: Fast-tempo Songs
For fast-tempo songs such as rock.
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
You can freely change the names you use for tracks.
When, for example, you record something over many
times, remembering what performance is recorded on
each track can become difficult.
In such instances, we recommend giving tracks unique
names (such as “guitar” or “vocal”) to make all these
tracks more manageable.
1. You can change the names of tracks that are currently audible. First select the V-track you will be
working with.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
4. Press [F4 (Name)]. If “Name” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “Name” is displayed, and then press [F4 (Name)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the track you want to rename, and then
press [F1 (Name)] or [YES].
6. The Track Name screen appears in the display.
Using [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the
TIME/VALUE dial, enter the name of the song.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
7. After entering the name, press [F5 (Write)].
8. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
9. Press [YES].
This saves the song.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Copying Performance Data from
Other Songs (Track Import)
Copy the other song’s performance data in
the current drive to the current song.
fig.04-35(tr_imp.eps)
Current Drive
Other Song
Current Song
Performance Data
Performance Data
fig.04-33a(tr_name_ascii.eps)
* You can import a track from the song that has same both
sample rate and recording mode as current song.
However, if there is insufficient free space on the current
drive, Song Import cannot be carried out.
1. First select the song you want to be the copy destination as the current song.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
Pressing this button takes you through
a register of the last 20 track names
entered, one at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor
is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]: Accepts/Confirms the track name and
removes the screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen without accepting the
track name.
[F1 (Hist)]:
92
3. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Track Edit menu
appears in the display.
4. Press [F5 (Imprt)]. If “Imprt” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “Imprt” is displayed,
and then press [F5 (Imprt)].
5. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor
to the copy source song and press [F3 (MARK)].
By pressing [F1 (SelSg)], you can have a list of the
songs displayed. In this case, place markers on the
songs, and then press [F1 (Back)].
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
6. Press [F4 (STEP→)].
fig.04-38(tr_imp_sg.eps)
Phrase Edit
fig.04-39a(nowtime.eps)
Current playback time
7. Press [
].
The cursor moves to “Source Track.”
8. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copy
source track.
9. Press [
].
The cursor moves to “Destination Track.”
10. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the copy
destination track in the current song.
fig.04-39(tr_imp_tr.eps)
Phrase to be edited
Phrase not to be edited
Repeating Phrases (Phrase Copy)
This operation copies the playback data of a
specified phrase to another location. For
example, this is convenient when you want a
four-measure rhythm pattern to play repeatedly as a
sort of “break beats” (Phrase Loop).
* Phrases shorter than 0.5 seconds cannot be played back.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F2 (Copy)]. If “Copy” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “Copy” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (Copy)].
4. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
11. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Track Import.
12. When the Track Import procedure is completed
correctly, “Complete” appears in the display.
5. Press the SELECT button for the channel containing the copy source track.
The button indicator lights.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the phrase you want to copy, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
93
Chapter 4
With this function, you can select and edit phrases.
Compared to Track Edit, this procedure allows more
musical edits.
First press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], and begin each operation from Play condition. You can edit the phrase at
the current time location. Select beforehand the Vtrack onto which the phrase to be edited is recorded,
and move to the time location containing the phrase so
it can be worked on.
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
This copies the phrase containing the mark. When [F2
(ALL)] is pressed, you can place or remove the marks
on all the phrases simultaneously.
fig.04-41(ph_cp_sel)
6. Press the STATUS button for the copy destination
track.
The button indicator lights red.
Rotating the TIME/VALUE dial allows you to specify
the copy destination V-track. For example, “1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates “Track
9 (Stereo Track 9/10, left channel), V-track 1.”
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as copy destinations for other phrases.
FROM (From point)
Specifies the time location of the source phrase to be
copied to the copy destination. This time need not
include the time containing the phrase.
Using FROM Effectively
Normally, the data is copied starting at the specified copy destination time. However, if you want
to have the copy made with reference to a point
within the designated range where a specific
sound occurs, set this with “FROM.”
For example, suppose that you wish to copy a
sound effect of a time bomb ticking and then
exploding, and that you want to place the explosion at a specific timing location. Normally, in
order to specify the copy destination time, you
would have to calculate the time until the explosion occurs. In such cases, however, you can specify “FROM” as “the copy source time at which
the explosion begins” and “TO” (the reference
time of the copy destination) as “the copy destination time at which you want the explosion to
occur.” This lets you copy the data with the
explosion placed with precisely the right timing.
fig.04-43(ph_cp_from.)
C
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if you want to copy multiple
tracks simultaneously.
C'
8. Press [F1 (Back)].
9. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
] to move the
FROM
TO
Time
fig.04-42(ph_cp_prm)
TO (To point)
This specifies the reference time of the copy destination.
Quantize
When Quantize is set to “On,” the “TO” point (the
copy destination reference point) is then placed at the
beginning of the measure determined in the Tempo
Map or Sync Track. For example, if the tempo in the
Tempo Map is set to 120, you can program a one-measure phrase to take two seconds. However, when you
need to figure more difficult tempos such as, say,
119.1, the timing of the phrase ending will shift very
gradually. Now, this can be prevented. Setting
Quantize to “On” also automatically works like
“Overlap” on.
94
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
fig.04-44(ph_cp_ol.eps)
About Phrase Copy
When the “Overlap” function is off, you can consider copying multiple phrases simultaneously.
In this case, if all of the selected phrases are not
the same length, the timing of each will begin to
drift from one another starting with the second
copy. Therefore, in this sort of situation, make
sure all the phrases are the same length beforehand by using phrases recorded together with
Punch-In Recording, or with Trim In (p. 97) and
Trim Out (p. 98).
fig.04-45(ph_cp_ol2.eps
Ex.: When the Phrase length differs
A
B
Example 1: When the phrase is longer than the interval
between “FROM” and “TO”
A
C
FROM
FROM
Chapter 4
Overlap
When this is set to “Off,” the starting and ending
points of the phrase can be thought of as being identical to the “START” and “END” points in Track Copy.
In this case, when two or more copies of a phrase are
made, the second and any subsequent copies are connected to the preceding one.
Set this to “On” preserves the length of the interval
between “FROM” and “TO.” Thus, when copying a
phrase that is shorter than the interval between
“FROM” and “TO” two or more times, starting with
the second copy, a blank space is inserted after each
copy of the phrase. Conversely, when the phrase is
longer than the interval between “FROM” and “TO,”
the end of the phrase overlaps the following copy of
the phrase.
TO
TO
Time
Time
Copy Times = “2,” Overlap = “Off”
Copy Times = “2,” Overlap = “Off”
A
A'
FROM
A''
B
TO
Time
A'
FROM
A''
TO
Time
Example 2: When the phrase is shorter than the interval
between “FROM” and “TO”
A
FROM
TO
Time
A'
FROM
A''
TO
C'
A''
B''
C''
TO
Time
When “Overlap” is on, there is no need to select
phrases that are the same length. However,
depending on the relationship between the
phrase length and the interval between “FROM”
and “TO,” the end of the phrase may be indistinct. Use this feature according to the situation.
Copy Time
This specifies the number of times (1–99) the phrase is
to be copied.
11. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Phrase Copy.
12. When the copy is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
Copy Times = “2,” Overlap = “Off”
A
B'
C
FROM
Copy Times = “2,” Overlap = “On”
A
A'
A
Time
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Copy Times = “2,” Overlap = “On”
A'
A
FROM
TO
A''
Time
95
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Moving Phrases (Phrase Move)
This operation moves the specified phrase to
another location. This is convenient for correcting timing mistakes that can occur when
recording performance data.
fig.04-47(ph_mv.eps)
A
A'
TO
Time
6. Press the STATUS button for the move destination
track.
The button indicator lights red.
Rotating the TIME/VALUE dial allows you to specify
the move destination V-track. For example, “1-1” indicates “Track 1, V-track 1,” and “9L-1” indicates “Track
9 (Stereo Track 9/10, left channel), V-track 1.”
B
B'
TO
Time
* Phrases shorter than 0.5 seconds cannot be played back.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F3 (Move)]. If “Move” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “Move” is displayed,
and then press [F3 (Move)].
* Do not designate V-tracks that have already been specified
as move destinations for other phrases.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 if you want to move several
phrases simultaneously.
8. Press [F1 (Back)].
9. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor. Set each of the values.
] to move the
fig.04-49(ph_mv_prm)
4. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
5. Press the SELECT button for the channel containing the move source track.
The button indicator lights.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the phrase you want to move, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
This moves the phrase containing the mark. When [F2
(ALL)] is pressed, you can place or remove the marks
on all phrases simultaneously.
fig.04-48(ph_mv_sel)
FROM (From point)
Specifies the time of the move source phrase being
copied to the move destination. This time need not
include the time containing the phrase.
96
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
fig.04-50(ph_mv_from)
Adjusting the Beginning of the Phrase
Sound (Trim In)
This adjusts the point at which the phrase
begins (starts to sound) without changing the
timing of the phrase itself. This is convenient
when, for example, you want to select a section of the
performance data to copy as a “break beats” (Phrase
Loop).
fig.04-52(trim_i.eps)
Chapter 4
Using FROM Effectively
Normally, the data is moved starting to the specified move destination time. However, if you want
to have the move made with reference to a point
within the designated range where a specific
sound occurs, set this with “FROM.”
For example, suppose that you wish to move a
sound effect of a time bomb ticking and then
exploding, and that you want to place the explosion at a specific timing location. Normally, in
order to specify the move destination time, you
would have to calculate the time until the explosion occurs. In such cases, however, you can specify “FROM” as “the move source time at which
the explosion begins” and “TO” (the reference
time of the move destination) as “the move destination time at which you want the explosion to
occur.” This lets you move the data with the
explosion placed with precisely the right timing.
TO
Time
When you apply Trim In to phrase 2 while phrase 2 is
punched in to phrase 1, the part of phrase 1 obscured
by phrase 2 becomes audible.
C
fig.04-52a(trim_i_punch.eps)
C'
Phrase 2
FROM
TO
TO (To point)
Specifies the reference time of the move destination.
Quantize
When Quantize is set to “On,” the “TO” point (the
move destination reference point) is then placed at the
beginning of the measure determined in the Tempo
Map or Sync Track. For example, if the tempo in the
Tempo Map is set to 120, you can program a one-measure phrase to take two seconds. However, when you
need to figure more difficult tempos such as, say,
119.1, the timing of the phrase ending will shift very
gradually. Now, this can be prevented.
11. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Phrase Move.
12. When the move is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
13. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Phrase 1
Time
Phrase 2
Phrase 1
TO
Time
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F4 (TrimI)]. If “TrimI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “TrimI” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (TrimI)].
4. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
5. Press the STATUS button for the track that contains the phrase you want to trim.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the phrase you want to trim, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
97
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
This trims the performance data on the phrase containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the marks on all the phrases simultaneously.
fig.04-53(trim_i_sel)
Adjusting the Ending of the phrase
Sound (Trim Out)
This adjusts the point at which the phrase
ends (stops playing) without changing the
timing of the phrase itself. This is convenient
when, for example, you want to select a section of the
performance data to copy as a “break beats” (Phrase
Loop).
fig.04-56(trim_out.eps)
TO
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
7. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.04-54(trim_i_prm)
Time
When you apply Trim Out to phrase 2 while phrase 2
is punched in to phrase 1, the part of phrase 1
obscured by phrase 2 becomes audible.
fig.04-56a(trim_o_punch.eps)
Phrase 2
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Phrase 1
TO
Time
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
TO (To point)
Specifies the time for Trim In.
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Trim In.
3. Press [F5 (TrimO)]. If “TrimO” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “TrimO” is displayed, and then press [F5 (TrimO)].
9. When the trim is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
98
4. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
5. Press the STATUS button for the track that contains the phrase you want to trim.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the phrase you want to trim, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
This trims the performance data on the phrase containing the mark. When [F2 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the marks on all the phrases simultaneously.
Deleting Phrases (Phrase Delete)
This operation deletes specified phrases.
When this operation is used to, existing playback data after a deleted phrase is not moved
fig.04-57(trim_o_sel.eps)
forward.
fig.04-60(ph_del.eps)
A
Chapter 4
Time
When you apply Phrase Delete to phrase 2 while
phrase 2 is punched in to phrase 1, the part of phrase 1
obscured by phrase 2 becomes audible.
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
7. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.04-58(trim_i_prm.eps)
fig.04-60a(ph_del_punch.eps)
Phrase 2
Phrase 1
Phrase 1
Time
* While it may seem that the performance data has disappeared, the data itself is not deleted from the hard disk.
Thus, even when you carry out the Phrase Delete procedure, the free disk space shown in the display does not
change.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
TO (To point)
Specifies the time for Trim Out.
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Trim Out.
9. When the trim is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F6 (Del)]. If “Del” does not appear in [F6],
first press [PAGE] until “Del” is displayed, and
then press [F6 (Del)].
4. Press the STATUS button for the track that contains the phrase you want to delete.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the phrase you want to delete, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
99
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
This deletes the phrase containing the mark. When [F2
(ALL)] is pressed, you can place or remove the marks
on all the tracks simultaneously.
fig.04-61(ph_del_del.eps)
5. Press the STATUS button for the track that contains the phrase you want to split.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the phrase you want to split, and
then press [F3 (MARK)] or [YES].
This splits the phrase containing the mark. When [F2
(ALL)] is pressed, you can place or remove the marks
on all the phrases simultaneously.
fig.04-64(ph_sp_sel.eps)
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Phrase Delete.
6. When the deletion is completed correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6. Press [F1 (Back)].
7. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
Dividing Phrases (Phrase Split)
fig.04-65(ph_sp_prm.eps)
This operation allows you to divide phrase
into two parts for the time-wise. This is convenient when, for example, you want to select
a section of the performance data to copy as a “break
beats” (Phrase Loop).
fig.04-63(ph_sp.eps)
A
A1
A2
TO
Time
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
TO (To point)
Specifies the time for splitting the phrase.
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Phrase Split.
3. Press [F1 (Split)]. If “Split” does not appear in [F1],
first press [PAGE] until “Split” is displayed, and
then press [F1 (Split)].
9. When the split is completed correctly, “Complete”
appears in the display.
4. Press [F1 (SelPh)].
100
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Creating New Phrases (Phrase New)
This creates a new phrase from an existing
take.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
4. Press [
], [
], [
cursor to “Take.”
], and [
] to move the
fig.04-67(ph_new_prm.eps)
7. Press the STATUS button of the track for the new
phrase.
The button indicator lights red.
Alternatively, rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select
the track for the new phrase.
At this point, by pressing [F5 (ORIG)], the new phrase
will be created to the same track/location of the source
take.
8. Press [
].
The cursor moves to “TO.”
9. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the time
for the new phrase.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)].
This executes Phrase New.
11. When the new phrase is created correctly,
“Complete” appears in the display. Press [ENTER
(YES)].
12. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the source
take. By pressing [F1 (Take)], you can have a list
of takes displayed. At this time, rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the take, and press
[F4 (Sel)]. Each time you press [F2 (Info)], switches the information displayed about the take
between the “take’s start and stop points” and the
“amount of disk space occupied and date and
time of recording.” When you finished select a
take, press [F1 (Back)]. fig.04-68(ph_new_take.eps)
101
Chapter 4
3. Press [F2 (New)]. If “New” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “New” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (New)].
6. Press [
].
The cursor moves to “Track.”
Chapter 4 Editing a Recorded Performance (Track Editing)
Naming Phrases (Phrase Name)
With each recording of the tracks, the following names (Phrase names) are given automatically.
fig.04-70(ph_name.eps)
4-digit number
Phrase Name (same as Track Name)
V-track containing the Phrase
Track containing the Phrase
You can freely change phrase names. When, for example, you record something over many times, keeping
track of what performance is recorded in each phrase
can become difficult. In such instances, we recommend giving phrases unique names (such as “riff” or
“solo”) to make all these phrases more manageable.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F2 (TRACK)].
2. Press [F1 (Tr/Ph)] so that Phrase Edit menu
appears in the display.
3. Press [F4 (Name)]. If “Name” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “Name” is displayed, and then press [F4 (Name)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to the phrase you want to rename, and
then press [F1 (Name)] or [YES].
5. The Phrase Name screen appears in the display.
Using [
], [
], [
], and [
] and the
TIME/VALUE dial, enter the name of the phrase.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
fig.04-71(ph_name_ascii.eps)
102
Pressing this button takes you through
a register of the last 20 phrase names
entered, one at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all characters in the window.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor
is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]: Accepts/Confirms the phrase name
and removes the screen.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen without accepting the
phrase name.
[F1 (Hist)]:
6. After entering the name, press [F5 (Write)].
7. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
8. Press [YES].
This saves the song with its name.
9. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
The VS-1680 comes with the optional VS8F-2 effect expansion board. Up to two
of these effect expansion boards can be installed in the VS-1680. With the VS8F-2
installed in the VS-1680, up to 4 high-quality stereo effects will be available for
your use.
This chapter explains how to use these internal effects.
* For instructions on how to install the VS8F-2, please read “Installing the Effect
Expansion Board” (Quick Start p. 57).
Composition of the Effects
Chapter 5
Up to two VS8F-2s can be installed in the VS-1680; these are called EFFECT A
and EFFECT B.
Additionally, with two VS8F-2s installed, you can use two different effects at the
same time. Each of the effects in EFFECT A, EFX1 and EFX2, and the effects in
EFFECT B, EFX3 and EFX4, may be used, and you can select the effect to be
used in each channel.
fig.05-01(effect.eps)
EFFECTS
EFFECT A
EFX1
EFX2
EFFECT B
EFX3
EFX4
Connecting the Effects
Changing the Source Sound Itself (Insert)
The effect is directly added either between each channel’s equalizer and fader or
before the master fader. Connect the effect in this way if you want to use effects
applied to change the output of the sound itself, such as when using distortion
or overdrive effects.
When inserting an effect into one of the channels or into the Master Block, that
effect cannot be used in send/return.
fig.05-03(insert.eps)
103
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Level
(Fader)
EFX1
Pan
MIX bus or REC bus
EFX1
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX1
EFX2
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX2
MIX bus or REC bus
EFX3
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX3
MIX bus or REC bus
EFX4
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX4
MIX bus or REC bus
AUX
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
AUX bus
* Depending on the effects used, when mixing with different effects inserted into each
channel, or mixing channels having effects inserted with other channels having no
effects, timing shifts may occur, or you may not be able to achieve the effect you desire.
Inserting with Input and Track Channels
1. Select the channels to which the effect is to be applied. Press the SELECT
buttons for the input or track channels to which you want to apply the
effect.
The button indicators light, and the Input Mixer or Track Mixer screen appears
in the display.
2. Press [F1 (Ef1In)]. If “Ef1In” does not appear in [F1], first press [PAGE] until
“Ef1In” is displayed, then press [F1 (Ef1In)]. Alternatively, use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor to “EFXIns.”
3. Press [YES].
4. Use [
], [
], [
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.05-04(eff1.eps)
Effect Insert Switch
Insert Return Level
Insert Send Level
104
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
EFX1 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effects are connected.
Off: There is no Insert.
Ins: Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect.
InsL: Inserts in the left channel of the stereo effect.
InsR: Inserts in the right channel of the stereo effect.
InsS: Inserts in the combined left and right channels
of the stereo effect in series.
fig.05-05(inslrs.eps)
Ins
L
EQ
(2band, 3band)
L
EFX
R
R
EQ
(2band, 3band)
L
L
EFX
This inserts the effect into the MASTER Out. After the
mix for each channel is completed, the entire song is
put through the compressor, which is convenient at
such times as when you listen to the total volume
while mixing down.
1. Press [MASTER].
The button indicator lights, and the Master screen
appears in the display.
2. Press [F1 (Ef1In)]. If “Ef1In” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “Ef1In” is displayed,
then press [F1 (Ef1In)]. Alternatively, use [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to
“EFXIns.”
3. Press [YES].
4. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
]] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
InsR
EQ
(2band, 3band)
fig.05-06(masterins.eps)
EFX
R
R
Effect Insert Switch
InsS
EQ
(2band, 3band)
L
L
EFX
R
R
Insert Return Level
* When Ins or InsS is selected, that effect cannot be used on
any other channel. Furthermore, when InsL or InsR is
selected, that effect can be inserted on only one other
channel.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (-42–6 dB) sent to
the Insert effect. Set the initial value to “0 dB.”
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (-42–6 dB) returned
from the Insert effect. Set the initial value to “0 dB.”
5. At this point, you are ready to insert EFX1 into the
selected channel. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* You can insert EFX2–EFX4 in the same way.
Insert Send Level
EFX1 (Effect Insert Switch)
This sets how the effects are connected.
Off: There is no Insert.
Ins: Inserts in both channels of the stereo effect.
Snd (Insert Send Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (-42–6 dB) sent to
the Insert effect. Set the initial value to “0 dB.”
Rtn (Insert Return Level)
This adjusts the level of the signal (-42–6 dB) returned
from the Insert effect. Set the initial value to “0 dB.”
5. At this point, you are ready to insert EFX1 into the
Master Block. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* You can insert EFX2–EFX4 in the same way.
105
Chapter 5
InsL
Inserting an Effect into the Master
Block
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Adding the Sound with the Effect Applied to the Direct Sound (Send/Return)
When adding the sound with effect to the direct sound, such as is done with
reverb or delay, use the EFFECT bus.
With some effects, while you can have output of both the direct sound and effect
sound, it’s usually better to have the effect sound output separately. The direct
sound and effect sound are adjusted with each channel fader. The present signal
flow is shown below.
fig.05-07(sndrtn.eps)
EQ
(2band, 3band)
Level
(Fader)
Pan
MIX bus oe REC bus
EFX1
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX1
MIX bus oe REC bus
EFX2
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX2
MIX bus oe REC bus
EFX3
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX3
MIX bus oe REC bus
EFX4
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
EFX4
MIX bus oe REC bus
AUX
Sw
Send
Level
Pan
AUX bus
1. Select the channels to which the effect is to be applied. Press the SELECT
buttons for the input or track channels to which you want to apply the
effect.
The button indicators light, and the Input Mixer or Track Mixer screen appears
in the display.
2. Press [F1 (EFX1)]. If “Ef1In” does not appear in [F1], first press [PAGE] until
“EFX1” is displayed, then press [F1 (EFX1)]. Alternatively, use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor to “EFX1.”
fig.05-08(channelsnd.eps)
Effect Send Switch
Effect Send Level
Effect Send Pan
3. Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
Sw (Effect Send Switch)
This selects the how the signal is sent to the EFFECT bus (send).
Off: The signal is not sent.
Pre: The sound before passing through the channel fader is sent.
Pst: The sound after passing through the channel fader is sent.
106
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
(Send Level)
This adjusts the volume level of the signal (0–127) sent
to the EFFECT bus. Set the initial value to “100.”
(Send Pan)
This adjusts the stereo placement of the signal
(L63–0–R63) sent to the EFFECT bus. “L63” is fat left,
and “R63” is far right. Set the initial value to “0” (center).
4. At this point, the effects are set up so that they will
be add to the sound. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Adjusting the Return Level
You can adjust the volume of the effect sound
(Return level) with the channel faders on the top
panel. Use the following procedure.
4-1. Press the input channel [EFFECT 1/3 RTN]
button.
The Effect Return screen appears in the display.
4-2. Press [F3 (EFX1)] or use [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to move the cursor to “EFX1Rtn.”
fig.05-09(channelrtn.eps)
* You can insert EFX2–EFX4 in the same way.
Chapter 5
Return Level
Return Balance
(Return Level)
This sets the volume level (0–127) of the effects.
Set the initial value to “100.” Use the channel
faders for this.
(Return Balance)
This adjusts the left-right balance (L63–0–R63) of
the effect. Set the initial value to “0” (center).
4-3. Press [FADER] so that the IN indicators
light.
At this time, the EFX1 return level can be adjusted with the EFFECT1 fader. Similarly, the EFX2
return level can be adjusted with the EFFECT2
fader.
* When you wish to adjust the return levels of EFX3
and EFX4, hold down [SHIFT] and press the input
channel [EFFECT 1/3 RTN] or [EFFECT 2/4 RTN]
buttons. The SHIFT button indicator lights. Now,
the EFX3 return level can be adjusted with the
EFFECT1 fader, and the EFX4 return level can be
adjusted with the EFFECT2 fader.
107
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
Adjusting the Balance of the Overall
Effect Send Level
You can adjust the balance of the total effect send level
for each effect with the effect send level (p. 107) and
pan (p. 107) settings that are assigned to each individual channel left as they are.
1. Press [MASTER].
2. Press [F1 (EFX1)]. If “EFX1” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “EFX1” is displayed,
then press [F1 (EFX1)]. Alternatively, use [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to
“EFX1.”
3. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.05-10(mastersnd.eps)
Selecting Effects (Patch)
An effect settings is referred to as a patch. The VS1680 provides 210 (P000-P209) read-only effects (Preset
Patches) and 200 (U000-U199) read and write effects
(User Patches). Please take a moment to check these
effects.
* If used in combination with the Vari Pitch function (p.
166), delay times may change somewhat, and for distortion effects (distortion, overdrive, etc.), there may be some
change in the quality of the tone.
* With some of the effects, you may not want the direct
sound output, or other special setting may be required.
Please refer to “Algorithm List” (Appendices p. 81) when
making these settings.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Send Level
Send Balance
(Send Level)
This adjusts the total volume level of the signal (-42–6
dB) sent to the effect. Set the initial value to “100.”
(Balance)
This adjusts the balance (L63–0–R63) of the total signal
sent to the effect. Set the initial value to “0” (center).
* You can adjust the overall send level and balance for
EFX2–EFX4 in the same manner.
2. When you wish to use EFX1/EFX2, hold down
[SHIFT] and press [F3 (EFFECT A)]. When you
wish to use EFX3/EFX4, hold down [SHIFT] and
press [F4 (EFFECT B)].
If “No Effect Board” Appears in the
Display
This indicates there is no VS8F-2 installed. In this
case, you cannot use the internal effects.
If the message appears even when a VS8F-2 is
installed, it indicates that the effect expansion
board is not being recognized properly. Perform
the shutdown procedure and turn the power off
as described in “Turning Off the Power” (p. 32),
then reinstall the VS8F-2 correctly.
3. Press [F1 (EFX1)].
The Effects 1 settings screen appears in the display.
4. Press [F2 (Sel)].
The effects list appears in the display.
5. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the effect you wish to use.
108
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
At this point, the function buttons work as shown
below.
Creating New Effects Sounds
fig.05-02(effectsel.eps)
When creating a new effect, first select the existing
patch whose sound is closest to the “image” of the patch
you wish to create, and then alter that patch settings.
Since changes to effects settings are temporary, they
are lost once you select another patch or recall a different Scene. When saving changed effects settings, either
save them to the User Patches or store the mixer settings as a Scene.
Cursor
Current Effect
Function Buttons
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Displays the Preset patch list.
Displays the User patch list.
Exits the screen after selecting the
effect.
Exits the screen without selecting the
effect.
6. After selecting the effect, press [F4 (Exec)].
The EFX1 settings screen reappears in the display.
7. Check the effect to make sure that the sound is
actually being played. Repeat Step 4 for any other
patches whose effects you want to confirm.
1. Using the procedure described in “Selecting
Effects (Patch)” (p. 108), call up the patch containing the effect on which you will base your new
effect.
The following screen is displayed. fig.05-12(efxblk.eps)
Patch Number
Patch Name
This Block is On
8. After you have checked the patches, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* Patches using the following algorithms can not be selected
for EFX2 and EFX4. A horizontal line is drawn through
the effect name in such cases. Please select patches using
these algorithms for use with EFX1 or EFX3.
• Reverb
Algorithm Name
Cursor
This Block is Off
• Gated Reverb
• Vocorder 2
• Voice Transformer
fig.05-11(efxoff.eps)
2. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor on the
screen. When you select a patch with an algorithm
in which the effect can be turned on and off, you
can use the TIME/VALUE dial to switch the
On/Off value for each of the effect blocks. The
display of effect blocks that are currently on is
highlighted. Move the cursor to the effect block
whose settings you wish to change.
3. Press [F3 (EDIT)].
A list of settings included in the effect block is displayed.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor on the screen. Move the cursor to the setting you want to change, and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial. For more detailed information about the kinds of setting included in each
effect block, please refer to the “Algorithm List”
(Appendices p. 81).
109
Chapter 5
[F1 (Preset)]:
[F2 (User)]:
[F4 (Exec)]:
About Algorithms
An algorithm determines the composition or structure of an effect. The VS-1680 features 34 different
algorithms. The settings for the effects in each
patch use at least one of these algorithms. Check
the algorithms used in each patch in “Preset Patch
List” (Appendices p. 74). For details on each algorithm, refer to “Algorithm List” (Appendices p. 81).
Chapter 5 Using the Internal Effects (VS8F-2)
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
fig.05-13(efxprm.eps)
[F1 (←Blk)]:
[F2 (→Blk)]:
[F4 (SAVE)]:
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Displays the settings of the previous
effect block.
Displays the settings of the next
effect block.
Calls up the screen for saving the
effect.
Exits the screen.
5. Save the effect.
When saving an effect’s settings, it is necessary to
either save them to the User Patches or store the mixer
settings as a Scene. If you want to use them to another
song, save them to a User Patch. If you are only going
to use them to the currently selected song, then store it
to a Scene.
When Saving to User Patches
When you save effect settings to a User Patch, the User
Patch that had previously been in that location is lost.
At the time of purchase, the effects in the VS-1680’s
User Patches are the same as those stored in the Preset
Patches.
1. Press [F4 (SAVE)].
The Effect Name screen appears in the display.
2. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination patch number (U000–U199).
fig.05-14(effname.eps)
Patch Number
Patch Name
3. Move the cursor by pressing [
]. Use [
] and
[
] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the name
of the User Patch.
110
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F1 (Hist)]:
Press this button to go through a register of the last 20 User Patch names
entered, one patch at a time.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears all characters in the name display.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the character where the cursor
is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is
positioned.
[F5 (Write)]: Accepts/Confirms the User Patch
name and exits the screen
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen without accepting the
User Patch name.
4. After entering the name, press [F5 (Write)].
The User Patch is saved.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
When Storing to a Scene
For more detailed information, please refer to
“Recording the Current Condition of the Mixer
(Scene)” (p. 40).
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2. Press [SCENE].
The button indicator lights.
3. Press the SCENE buttons ([1]–[8]) whose indicators are not blinked. For example, if you want to
store the settings to Scene 1, then press [1].
4. After the Scene is stored, returns to Play condition.
The [SCENE] indicator goes off. If you wish to
cancel the operation press [SCENE] once more.
About Effect Levels
Many algorithms include parameters for effect
level, which adjusts the output level of the effect
sound, and direct level, which adjusts the output
level of the direct sound. When these parameters
are preceded by a minus sign, the phase is inverted.
The direct level of the Preset Patches, which were
created with careful consideration given to the
connection to the EFFECT bus, is set to “0.”
When inserting an effect into a channel, raise the
direct level. To determine the type for each Preset
Patch, please refer to “Preset Patch List”
(Appendices p. 74).
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
A Zip drive can be connected to the SCSI connector of
the VS-1680. Be sure to read the owner’s manual for
your Zip drive as well.
This chapter will explain the procedures for saving
songs to Zip disks and for returning songs saved to
Zip disks back to the internal hard disk.
Connecting the Zip Drive
Use the following procedure to connect the Zip drive
to the VS-1680.
fig.06-01(connection.eps)
Initializing the Disk
(Drive Initialize)
A new disk just purchased at computer
store or a disk that was used by another
device cannot be used on the VS-1680 as
is. You must initialize the disk so that it can be used
by the VS-1680. When a disk is initialized, the entire
contents are irretrievably lost. Check any such disk
you plan to initialize to make sure that it does not contain anything that you don’t want deleted.
Additionally, disks used with the VS-1680 cannot
be used on other devices (such as personal computers).
* If you accidentally delete data that you need, that data
cannot be restored to its previous condition. Roland
Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of
data.
Here is an example how to initialize new Zip disks.
1. Confirm that power of the Zip drive and the VS1680 is turned on.
2. Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
* Once the connections have been completed, turn on power
to your various devices in the order specified. By turning
on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices.
* Always make sure to have the volume level turned down
before switching on power. Even with the volume all the
way down, you may still hear some sound when the power
is switched on, but this is normal, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F6 (DrIni)]. If “DrIni” does not appear in
[F6], first press [PAGE] until “DrIni” is displayed,
then press [F6 (DrIni)].
1. Turn on the power of the Zip drive.
2. Turn on the power of the VS-1680 with the
POWER switch on the rear panel.
3. Turn on the power of connected audio equipments.
4. Raise the volume of the audio devices to appropriate levels.
* For more detailed information regarding Zip drive connections, including the necessary settings, please refer to
“About SCSI” (Appendices p. 5).
111
Chapter 6
If you are using a drive or disk that has been partitioned, please note that you will not be able to
choose a particular partition that you wish to initialize. When you carry out a drive initialization, the
whole drive and all its partitions will be initialized at
once.
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set each
of the values.
fig.06-02(driveinit.eps)
7. When the settings are made, press [F4 (Exec)].
“Initialize *****, OK?” appears in the display. “*****”
refers to the drive’s SCSI ID number. For example,
“SCSI5” indicates a Zip drive.
Init Drive (Initialize Drive)
Select the disk drive (IDE, SCSI0–SCSI7). “IDE” indicators internal hard disks, and “SCSI0–SCSI7” (these are
SCSI ID numbers) indicate external disk drives. For
example, select “SCSI5” when selecting the Zip drive
connection.
8. Press [YES].
“Initialize *****, Sure?” (Really initialize the disk?)
appears in the display.
9. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
Partition
Select the partition size (500 MB, 1000 MB, or 2000
MB). In normal circumstances, select “2000 MB.”
10. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
Physical Format
Select whether or not to use physical formatting. For
new disks or disks that have been used by another
device, select “On.” For new hard disks or when formatting disks for Windows or Macintosh platforms,
select “Off (Quick).”
11. After the initialization is completed correctly, the
VS-1680 restarts automatically, and return to Play
condition.
Surface Scan
This confirms that the read and write functions in all
of the disk drive’s partitions are operating correctly
when the drive is initialized. In normal circumstances,
set this to “Off.” When you particularly want to conduct a test of the read/write functions, the set this to
“On” (p. 113).
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F1 (SelDr)]: This displays a directory of the currently connected drives. Use [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to select the
drive that you want to initialize.
[F3 (Info)]:
Displays the drive information.
[F4 (Exec)]:
Executes initialization of the selected
drive.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
112
* Be aware that initializing a drive requires some time. This
is not a malfunction. For example, when physical formatting is turned on, the time required to format one Zip disk
is approximately 10 minutes. The progress of initialization will be shown in the display. Be sure not to turn
the power off until initialization is complete.
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
Checking Disk Reliability
When initializing a hard disk or other disk, you can
confirm that the read and write functions in all of the
disk partitions are operating correctly. This is referred
to as Surface Scan. If there are any places on the disk
where the reading or writing of data cannot be performed, the VS-1680 registers this as unusable
memory. Recording and playback then become
unavailable at that location.
Performing this procedure deletes all contents saved
on the disk. Conduct this check when initializing
newly purchased disks or disks which previously
have been used with a personal computer or other
device. Be sure to make a backup copy of any disk you
are presently using on the VS-1680 before carrying out
the procedure on it.
2. After initialization of the disk is completed,
Surface Scan begins automatically.
* The Surface Scan procedure takes a certain amount of
time.
Be aware that Surface Scan requires some time. This is
not a malfunction. For example, the time required to conduct Surface Scan on one Zip disk (100 MB) is approximately 10 minutes. The time it will take to conduct
Surface Scan on your disk drive should be based on the
size (capacity) of the disk. The progress of the Surface
Scan procedure is shown in the display.
3. When Surface Scan is completed, one of the following messages appears in the display.
“File System Err”:
A read or write failure has occurred in a location
which stores basic data used by the VS-1680 for
recording and playback. This disk drive cannot be
used by the VS-1680.
“_____Defect”:
The underlined portion will indicate the number of
unusable memory locations in this drive. The larger
this number is, the lower the reliability of this drive.
“— Complete —”:
This drive has no unusable memory.
1. Press [EXIT (NO)].
“Cancel?” appears in the display.
2. Press [YES].
Surface Scan is new cancelled. However, the
memory found to be unusable up to that point is
not registered.
3. The VS-1680 restarts automatically.
Saving Performance Data to
a Zip Drive (Song Copy)
You can save song data created on the VS-1680 to an
external disk. This is a convenient way to have song
data backed up in the event of possible disk drive
problems or to save data when there is little free disk
space.
Furthermore, since Zip disks are easy to handle and
manage, you can use them when sharing song data
with friends or when you have a VS-1680 both in the
studio and at home. We recommend keeping copies of
important song data on multiple disks.
* Incorrectly conducting the Song Copy procedure may
result in loss of data. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland
does not warrant any copied data, regardless of the performance or condition of the Zip Drive.
Backing Up Song Data with a CD-R Drive
or DAT Recorder
You can use a CD-R drive or DAT recorder to
back up song data from the VS-1680. Song data
backed up onto a CD-R disc cannot be overwritten. Thus, this method is appropriate for backing
up completely finished songs or other such data.
Song data backed up on DAT tapes can be overwritten any number of times, but considering the
time required for saving data, and because of reliability issues, it is more convenient to back up
data using a Zip drive. Roland recommends backing up data (Song Copy) with a Zip drive.
4. Press [YES].
The VS-1680 will restart.
113
Chapter 6
1. Set Surface Scan to “On,” and as described in
“Initializing the Disk” (p. 111), carry out the Drive
Initialize procedure.
Cancelling Surface Scan
You may cancel Surface Scan by performing the
following procedure.
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
There are two ways to carry out the Song Copy procedure. Select the method depend on the amount of free
space on the destination disk (100 MB for Zip disks).
The size of the current song is shown in the display.
Playable:
Use this method to copy songs that use relatively little
data onto disks with sufficient memory to hold them.
If the destination drive or disk already has saved song
data on it, then you can copy additional songs that
will fit within the remaining free space.
fig.06-07(playable.eps)
About Optimize
When operations such as punch-in recording are
repeated, old (now unused) performance data
still remains on the disk drive. By erasing this
unnecessary data from the disk drive, you can
free up a significant amount of disk space.
When you find that you cannot save something to
a single disk, then try the “Song Optimize” procedure (p. 169). This way, you can reduce the memory required to save a song, enabling you to save
to a single disk.
Song
Saving a Song to a Single Disk
(Playable)
Here, the procedure for saving a playable
copy of a song on the VS-1680’s internal hard
disk to a Zip disk which is set to SCSI ID
Number 5 is explained.
Archives:
Use this method to copy songs that are too large to be
saved on a single disk. The song data is converted into
a data format specifically for saving (archives format),
and is copied onto multiple disks according to the free
space on the disks. This means that it will not be possible to directly play back the song data. If you wish to
play back song data copied in archive format, you will
need to reload the archive data into the current drive
using the appropriate procedure. Furthermore, song
data cannot be copied onto disks that already have
songs recorded on them.
1. Select the disk containing the source song you
want to copy as the current drive.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
4. Press [F1 (CP PL)]. If “CP PL” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “CP PL” is displayed, then press [F1 (CP PL)].
fig.06-09(cp_pl.eps)
fig.06-08(archive)
Song
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
5. Press [
] and [
“Source Song.”
114
] to move the cursor to
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
6. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the song you want to copy and press [F3
(MARK)]. By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place
and remove Marks from all of the songs. In addition, you can press [F1 (SelSg)] to display a directory of the songs. At this point, after you have
placed a Mark at the song you want, press [F1
(Back)].
fig.06-09aa(cp_pl_selsg.eps)
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” the copy procedure is carried
out after the destination drive is initialized. If you
want to perform the copy procedure leaving songs
already saved in the destination drive as they are, then
set this to “Off.”
10. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message asking if you want to continue appears in
the display.
11. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
12. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
13. When the Playable Copy procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
] to move the cursor to “Destination
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination drive and partition. You can press [F5
(SelDr)] to display a directory of drives. At this
point, use [
], [
], [
], and [
] to select
the destination drive, and select the destination
partition with the TIME/VALUE dial. Once you
have selected the destination drive, press [F1
(Back)].
fig.06-09ab(cp_pl_seldr.eps)
9. If the source and destination drives are different,
press [
].
Move the cursor to “Erase All Songs” use the
TIME/VALUE dial.
115
Chapter 6
7. Press [
Drive.”
If “Disk Memory Full” Appears in the
Display
This indicates that the destination disk has insufficient free space, or that the number of songs on
the disk has exceeded the maximum number (200
songs) that can be stored on the disk, and that the
copy procedure was cancelled. However, you can
still use the song data copied up to that point.
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
To Load Data from Disks (Drive Select)
If you want to take playable songs that have
been copied to Zip disks and load them onto
the VS-1680’s hard disk, first switch the current drive to the Zip drive (Drive Select). Afterwards,
you can make playable copies onto the internal hard
disk from the Zip disk.
* Even if you remake a playable copy of a song from the Zip
disk to the internal hard disk without first deleting an
existing playable copy of the song from the hard disk (even
if you return it to the hard disk), the original song is not
overwritten. In this case, a new song is created with the
same song name as that of the original and is written to
the lowest available song number.
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
Song 2
Zip Disk
Song 4
Song 1
Internal Hard Disk
fig.06-09b(restore.eps)
Song 1
Internal Hard Disk
Song 1
Song 2
Song 2
Song 1
Zip Disk
Song 4
Song 1
Song 3
Zip Disk
Song 4
Song 1
1. Confirm that power of both the Zip drive and the
VS-1680 is turned on.
2. Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
Internal Hard Disk
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Song 1
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
Song 2
Song 3
Zip Disk
Song 4
Song 1
Song 1
fig.06-09d(restore.eps)
5. Press [F4 (DrSel)]. If “DrSel” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “DrSel” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (DrSel)].
A list of currently connected drives appears in the display.
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Select the drive to which you want to
change. By rotating the TIME/VALUE dial, you
can select the partition you want to switch to. For
now select Zip drive (SCSI5).
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F3 (Info)]:
Displays the drive information.
[F4 (Exec)]:
Executes drive select.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the screen.
fig.06-06(info.eps)
116
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
When You Cannot Save a Song to a
Single Disk (Archives)
7. After you have selected the drive and partition,
press [F4 (Exec)].
9. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not, then press [NO]. If
you have selected a demo song, then press
[NO].
10. After you have switched the current drive, return
to Play condition.
11. Following the procedure described in “Saving a
Song to a Single Disk” (p. 114), make a playable
copy of the song on the Zip disk to the internal
hard disk.
12. After you have made the copy, repeat Steps 3–10
to reselect the internal hard disk as the current
drive.
Saving to Disks (Store)
1. Make the drive (internal hard disk) containing the
song you want to copy the current drive.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
4. Press [F2 (AcStr)]. If “AcStr” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “AcStr” is displayed,
then press [F2 (AcStr)].
fig.06-10(store.eps)
117
Chapter 6
8. A confirmation message appears on the screen.
Press [YES].
Handling of Archives Copy Disks
To save songs in archives format, the destination
disk must be initialized. This initialization procedure differs from the usual Drive Initialize formatting (p. 111). This procedure lets you carry
out Archives Copy with newly purchased disks,
disks which previously have been used with a
personal computer or other device, or other disks
which have not been formatted with Drive
Initialize. However, any song data saved to the
disk is lost once the Archives Copy procedure is
performed.
Additionally, you cannot designate a disk containing archive format songs as the current drive.
If you try to do this, the disk is identified as being
an uninitialized disk.
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
5. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Source Song.”
6. Songs that are marked are copied. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the song
you want to copy and press [F3 (MARK)]. By
pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove
Marks from all of the songs. In addition, you can
press [F1 (SelSg)] to display a directory of the
songs. At this point, after you have placed a Mark
at the song you want, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-10a(cp_arc_st_selsg.eps)
10. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
11. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
* All data saved on the Zip disk will be deleted. Do not use
any Zip disk containing song data that you need.
12. If the song holds a large amount of data, and cannot be contained on a single Zip disk, the disk is
ejected, and the message “Please Insert Disk”
appears in the display. Insert the next disk and
press [YES]. At this time, be sure to write the disk
numbers on the labels so that you can keep track
of the order in which the disks were inserted into
the drive.
13. When copying over multiple Zip disks, “Insert
Disk #” (# indicates the number in the order of
insertion) appears in the display. Insert each of
the disks once more in the proper order and press
[YES].
14. When the Archives Store procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
7. Press [
Drive.”
] to move the cursor to “Destination
8. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination drive. Press [F5 (SelDr)] to display a directory
of drives. At this point, use [
], [
], [
],
and [
] to select the destination drive, and
press [F1 (Back)]. For now select Zip drive
(SCSI5).
fig.06-10b(cp_arc_st_seldr.eps)
9. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message asking if you want to continue appears in
the display.
118
Chapter 6 Use with a Zip Drive
Loading Data From Disks (Extract)
1. Select the load (restore) destination drive (internal
hard disk) as the current drive.
2. Insert a disk that was copied by Archives Store
into the Zip drive.
8. Songs that are marked are loaded. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the song
you want to restore and press [F4 (MARK)]. By
pressing [F3 (ALL)], you can place and remove
Marks from all of the songs. In addition, you can
press [F2 (SelSg)] to display a directory of the
songs. At this point, after you have placed a Mark
at the song you want, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-13(cp_arc_ext_selsg.eps)
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F3 (AcExt)]. If “AcExt” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “AcExt” is displayed, then press [F3 (AcExt)].
fig.06-11(cp_arc_ext.eps)
Chapter 6
9. Press [
Song.”
6. If several disk drives are connected, press [F1
(SelDr)] to have a list of the drives displayed. Use
[
], [
], [
], and [
] to select the source
drive, and press [F1 (Back)].
fig.06-12(cp_arc_ext_seldr.eps)
] to move the cursor to “Erase All
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” the recover procedure is carried out after the destination drive is initialized. If you
want to perform the recover procedure leaving songs
already saved in the current drive as they are, then set
this to “Off.”
10. Press [F5 (Exec)].
A message asking if you want to continue appears in
the display.
11. Press [YES].
When “Erase All Songs” set to “Off,” “STORE
Current?” (Store the current song?) appears in the display.
12. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
13. Execute the load. When copying over multiple
disks, “Insert Disk #” (# indicates the number in
the order of insertion) appears in the display.
Insert the next disk and press [YES].
14. When the Archive Extract procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
7. Use [
] and [
Song.”
] to move the cursor to “Source
119
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
You can connect a CD-R drive which is designated by
Roland, to the VS-1680’s SCSI connector. This chapter
explains the procedures involved in creating your own
original audio CDs and in backing up song data to
CD-R discs. Refer to the owner’s manual of CD-R
drive as you proceed.
In addition, for more detailed information on SCSI,
please refer to “About SCSI” (Appendices p. 5).
Connecting the CD-R Drive
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or
other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off
the power on all devices before making any connections.
fig.07-01(cdr_connevtion.eps)
Creating an Audio CD
You can create your own audio CD by writing sound
data that from two specified tracks on the VS-1680 to a
CD-R disc.
The VS-1680 first creates a CD-R image data file on its
internal IDE hard disk, then writes that image data to
the CD-R disc. Thus, an internal IDE hard disk is
necessary for this procedure. Furthermore, internal
IDE hard disk must has a enough free space on the
hard disk for the creation of the image data file.
* Regardless of partition settings, all free space on the internal hard disk may be accessed by the image data file. After
writing of the image data file to the CD-R disc is completed, it is automatically deleted.
Items Necessary for Creating an
Audio CD
• VS-1680 (1)
• CD-R drive (designated by Roland) (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk (1)
• Blank CD-R (Compact Disc-Recordable) disc
• Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER
jacks, or stereo headphones
Creating a Master Data
0
1. Turn on the power of the CD-R drive.
2. Turn on the power of the VS-1680.
3. Turn on the power of connected audio equipment.
4. Raise the volume of the audio devices to appropriate levels.
120
What is written to the CD-R disc is performance data
of the current song in two tracks (stereo tracks).
This is not the performance data that can be heard
from the output from the MASTER jacks or PHONES
jack. Song data that can be written to CD-R discs for
the creation of original audio CDs must satisfy the following conditions. Check the disc you plan to use.
Sample rate and recording mode:
Only songs with a sample rate of 44.1 kHz can be
written to CD-R discs. Songs with sample rates other
than this cannot be written to CD-R discs. While any
recording mode may be used, for the higher-quality
original CDs, either MTP (Multi-Track Pro), MAS
(Mastering), or MT1 (Multi-Track 1) is recommended
(p. 58).
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
Mixing:
The content of adjustments made to mixer settings
during playback are not recorded to the CD-R disc.
For example, in a normal performance, even if you
control fade-ins and fade-outs with the master fader,
this is not reflected in what is written to CD-R disc;
rather, it ends up sounding as if the song is cutting in
and out. Adjust equalizer, level, pan, and other settings during track bouncing.
Setting up Auto Mix beforehand can make the track
bouncing operation simpler (p. 156).
Effects:
Effects that are operating during playback are not
recorded on CD-R discs. For example, in a normal performance, even if you have reverb or delay applied to
the output of each track, this is not reflected in what is
written to CD-R disc; rather, it ends up sounding as if
no effect has been applied. Add effects during track
bouncing. (p. 78)
1. Place a blank CD-R disc in the CD-R drive.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
4. Press [F3 (CD Wt)]. If “CD Wt” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “CD Wt” is displayed, then press [F3 (CD Wt)].
5. A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES].
6. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to save the current song and write it to the disc, press [YES]; if
not, press [NO].
7. Press [F1 (SelTr)].
fig.07-05(cdr_tr_sel.eps)
Chapter 7
Track bouncing:
Two V-tracks, one as the left track and one as the right,
can be written to a CD-R disc. Bounce the tracks of
song data that has not been mixed down to two-channel stereo tracks (p. 77). Designate these tracks as the
master tracks (V-track write sources) to be written to
the CD-R disc when writing is to be carried out.
Writing Songs to CD-R Discs
Range:
The two tracks designated by the VS-1680 for writing
to the CD-R disc are written from the beginning of the
tracks (normally “00h00m00s00”) to the end (song
end). Thus, any blank space on the tracks before or
after the actual performance results in wasted space
on the CD-R disc. To avoid this, use Track Cut to
remove any unused portions on the tracks.
fig.07-03(trackcut.eps)
00h00m00s00
Blank Space
Performance Data
Blank Space
Before Track Cutting
Performance Data
After Track Cutting
8. Select the left and right tracks on the CD-R disc to
which you want the song written. Use [
],
[
], [
], and [
] or the TIME/VALUE dial
to move the cursor to the V-track which you want
written as the left track, and press [F3 (Sel L)].
Continuing, move the cursor to the V-track which
you want written as the right track, and press [F4
(Sel R)].
9. Press [F1 (Back)].
Time
121
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
10. This display appears as shown below. Check each
of the capacity. At this time, if you move the cursor to “L-ch Source Track” or “R-ch Source
Track,” you can switch each of the by rotating the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.07-06(capa.eps)
Track which you want written as the right track
Track which you want written as the left track
Song Name
Finalize
To make CD-R discs prepared with the VS-1680
playable on ordinary CD players, a TOC (Table of
Contents) must be written. Nothing beyond this can be
written to finalized CD-R discs.
TOC (Appendices p. 65)
Off:
The song is written without the finalize procedure being carried out.
On:
After the song is written, the finalize procedure is performed.
OnlyFin.: Only the finalize procedure is carried out,
without the song being written.
12. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
Internal IDE hard disk free space
CD-R disc free space
Disk space occupied by a song when written to a CD-R disc
Size of the content written to the CD-R disc
Length of the song which is to be written to the CD-R disc
Number of tracks after writing to the disc is finished
Number of Markers used for track numbers
Determining whether or not the CD-R disc has data written to it
13. Press [YES].
A message with the licensing conditions appears in
the display. After reading this carefully, if you agree to
the conditions, press [YES].
This message also appears in the back cover of this
manual. Writing to the CD-R disc begins. If you do not
agree to the terms, press [NO]. Return to the Step 2.
* If the “space required for the song being written to the
CD-R disc” exceeds the total of the “free space on the
internal IDE hard disk” and the “free space on the CD-R
disc,” you cannot write the song to the CD-R disc.
If “Not 44.1k Song!” Appears in the
Display
The sample rate is not 44.1 kHz, so the song cannot be written to the CD-R disc. Press [ENTER
(YES)] to return to Step 1. Please refer to
“Creating a New Song” (p. 58).
Disk space required for the song being
written to the CD-R disc
The disk space occupied by a song when written
to a CD-R disc may not be equivalent to the size
of the song itself. This is something that varies
with the number of tracks and recording mode
used. You can make a rough estimate of the space
required for a song when written to a CD-R disc
as shown below.
If “Please Insert Disc!” Appears in the
Display
This indicates that the CD-R drive’s loading tray
is open, that there is no disc loaded, or that the
CD-R drive is in some other way not ready for
use. Insert a CD-R disc, and press [YES].
Size (bytes) = 44,100 (Hz) x 2 (stereo tracks) x 2
(bytes) x “song length” (in seconds)
* The used capacity of the song is displayed as 1 MB =
1,000,000 bytes. The displayed value is the approximate
standard value.
11. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Finalize,” and rotate the TIME/VALUE
dial.
122
14. After writing of the CD-R disc is correctly performed, “Write Another?” appears in the display.
If you wish to write the same song data to another
CD-R disc, place a new disc in the drive and press
[YES]. Press [NO] to return to the Step 2.
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
Auditioning (Test Listening) Songs
Written to CDs (CD Player Function)
You cannot playback CD-R discs that have
just had written songs to them with regular
commercial CD players. To listen to songs
that have been just written to a disc in order to check
them, carry out the following operation.
Finalize (Appendices p. 63)
* Other commercially-available CD software can also be
played using the CD player function.
* You can listen to the contents of the disc through the VS1680’s MONITOR jacks or the PHONES jack. You
cannot output the contents through the CD-R drive’s
PHONES jack or AUDIO OUT jacks.
1. Insert the CD-R disc or commercial CD software
onto the CD-R drive.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
5. The CD-R disc information is displayed as shown
below.
fig.07-07(cd_player.eps)
Total number of songs on the disc
Song currently being performed
If “Blank Disc” Appears in the Display
You are attempting to used the CD player function with a CD-R disc that has no performance
data written to it. Insert a commercial software
CD or a CD-R disc on which recording has been
completed, and try the operation once more.
Only the following buttons, knobs, and faders effect
the sound. Try listening to the contents of the disc.
[ZERO]: Goes to the start of the first song.
[REW]: Rapidly rewinds as long as the button is held
down.
[FF]:
Rapidly advances as long as the button is
held down.
[STOP]: Stops the CD.
[PLAY]: Begins playing back from the present location.
[PREVIOUS] or [
]: Returns to the previous song.
[NEXT] or [
]: Advances to the next song.
MASTER Fader: Adjusts overall volume.
MONITOR Knob: Adjusts the volume output from
the MONITOR jacks.
PHONES Knob: Adjusts headphone volume.
* Transport control buttons are used in controlling the CD
control. They are not controls for the VS-1680’s songs.
Furthermore, the content of the CD currently listened to
cannot be recorded by the VS-1680.
* When listening to discs that have not been finalized, the
last approximately 0.5 seconds of the song cannot be
played back. Finalizing makes this portion audible.
fig.07-08(songend.eps)
Current play time
Listening possible
Listening not possible
(approx. 0.5 sec.)
Total running time
Total number of tracks
Disc type (finalized/not finalized)
Before Finalizing
Listening possible
After Finalizing
123
Chapter 7
4. Press [F4 (CDPly)]. If “CDPly” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “CDPly” is displayed, then press [F4 (CDPly)].
If “Please Insert Disc!” Appears in the
Display
There is no disc in the CD-R drive. Insert a commercial software CD or a CD-R disc on which
recording has been completed, press [YES], and
try the operation once more.
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
Writing Additional Songs to the Disc
2. Hold down [PLAY (DISPLAY)] and press [TAP].
fig.07-11(play+tap.eps)
To the extent that any remaining free space allows,
you can add songs to CD-R discs that have not yet
been finalized. Repeat the procedure described in
“Writing Songs to CD-R Discs” (p. 121).
Here you can insert approximately two seconds of
blank space between the new song and the song before
it. The track number is also recorded automatically.
fig.07-09(blank.eps)
Track Number
Previous Song
Added Song
* You cannot set markers for four seconds from the top of
songs (“00h00m00s00”).
Silent Portion (approx. 2 sec.)
Arranging and Writing Multiple Songs
to Disc
By sequencing a number of songs on one track, you
can arrange those songs and write them to a CD-R
disc. In this case, by presetting markers at the song
boundaries to function as track numbers, you can
write track numbers like those used in ordinary audio
CDs, using the CD-R drive to write an audio CD. If
desired, then carry out the following procedure.
* The Song Combine (p. 173) and Track Import (p. 92)
features can be used to arrange multiple songs onto the
current song.
* Due to audio CD standards, songs must be at least four
seconds long. Thus, if you try to set two markers as track
numbers within four seconds of each other, “Can’t Set
Marker” appears on the display, and the process cannot be
carried out. Reset the track number markers so there is an
interval greater than four seconds between them.
* Audio CD standards allow up to 99 songs to be stored on
one disc. Furthermore, even if no track number marker is
set at the beginning of the song, it is still used for the
beginning of the first song. Thus, you can set up to 98
markers as track numbers.
fig.07-12(number.eps)
00h00m00s00
M1
M2
M3
M97
M98
fig.07-10(multi.eps)
Song 1
00h00m00s00
Song 2
Song 3
Song 98
Song 99
Time
Song 1
Time
Before Marker Setting
00h00m00s00
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 3
3. Pressing [PREVIOUS] while also pressing [PLAY
(DISPLAY)] moves you to the previous track
number marker. Pressing [NEXT] while also
pressing [PLAY (DISPLAY)] moves you to the
next track number marker. Please check the time
at the track number.
fig.07-13(prevnext+play.eps)
Song 1
Song 2
After Marker Setting
Song 3
Time
Determining Song Boundaries (Track
Number)
1. While listening to the song, move the track number to the location in the song you want. If called
for, we recommend the use of the preview and
scrub functions (p. 154).
124
4. Store the song to the CD-R disc by following procedure as described in “Writing Songs to CD-R
Discs” (p. 121).
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
To Delete Track Number Markers
Delete markers used as track numbers the same
way you would regular markers (p. 39).
1. Move to the marker you want to delete.
2. Hold down [CLEAR] and press [TAP].
Saving Songs to CD-R Discs
(CD-R Backup)
You can save song data stored on the VS-1680’s hard
disk to CD-R discs. This procedure is called backup.
Conversely, the process of loading backed up song
data onto the internal hard disk is referred to as
recover. Besides all V-track performance data, backed
up data also includes Locator, Marker, and Scene settings made in the songs.
Song data backed up on CD-R discs cannot be rewritten. Thus, this is an appropriate procedure for backing
up completed song data in its final form.
* Song data recorded onto Zip disks cannot be
backed up onto CD-R discs.
* Song data cannot be backed up onto discs that already
have songs recorded on them.
* Incorrectly conducting the backup procedure may result
in the loss of data. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland does
not warrant any copied data, regardless of the performance or condition of the CD-R drive.
Items Necessary for CD-R Backup
• VS-1680 (1)
• CD-R drive (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
• Blank CD-R (Compact Disc-Recordable) disc
Saving Songs to CD-R Discs
Chapter 7
In CD-R backup, the song data is converted into a data
format specifically for saving. This means that it will
not be possible to directly play back the song data. If
you wish to play back song data copied in archive format, you will need to reload the backed up data into
the current drive using the appropriate procedure.
Furthermore, when copying a song that does not fit on
a single disc, it is copied onto multiple discs according
to the free space on the discs.
Backing Up Songs with Zip Drives and
DAT Recorders
You can back up VS-1680 song data by using a
Zip drive or DAT recorder. Song data stored on a
Zip disk or DAT tape can be rewritten any number of times. This makes this an appropriate
method for backing up data after work at the end
of the day or at other regular intervals.
Considering the issues of time required to save
data and reliability, the Zip drive is the more convenient method. Roland recommends backing
up (Song Copy) data with a Zip drive.
1. Select the disk (internal IDE hard disk) containing
the source song you want to back up as the current drive.
2. Place a CD-R disc in the CD-R drive.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F2 (CDRBk)]. If “CDRBk” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “CDRBk” is displayed, then press [F2 (CDRBk)].
fig.07-14(cdrbk.eps)
125
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
6. Songs that are marked are backed up. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the song
you want to back up and press [F3 (MARK)]. By
pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove
Marks from all of the songs. In addition, you can
press [F1 (SelSg)] to display a directory of the
songs. At this point, after you have placed a Mark
at the song you want, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.07-15(cdrbk_selsg.eps)
11. If the song holds a large amount of data, and cannot be contained on a single CD-R disc, the disc is
ejected, and the message “Insert Disc #” (# indicates the number in the order of insertion)
appears in the display to check the total amount
of necessary discs. Insert the next CD-R disc and
press [YES]. At this time, we recommend that you
write the disc numbers on the labels so that you
can keep track of the order in which the discs
were inserted into the drive.
12. When copying over multiple CD-R discs, “Insert
Disc #” (# indicates the number in the order of
insertion) appears in the display. Insert each of
the discs once more in the proper order and press
[YES].
13. When the CD-R backup procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
Loading Songs From CD-R Discs
7. If several CD-R drives are connected to the VS1680, you can press [F5 (SelDr)] to display a directory of drives. At this point, use [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to select the CD-R backup destination drive, and press [F1 (Back)].
fig.07-16(cdrbk_seldr.eps)
1. Select the disk (internal IDE hard disk) containing
the song you want to load as the current drive.
2. Place the CD-R disc to which the song data has
been backed up in the CD-R drive.
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F3 (CDRRc)]. If “CDRRc” does not appear
in [F3], first press [PAGE] until “CDRRc” is displayed, then press [F3 (CDRRc)].
fig.07-17(cdr_rc.eps)
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message asking for confirmation appears in the display.
9. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
10. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
126
Chapter 7 Use with a CD-R Drive
6. Songs that are marked are loaded. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
songs you want to restore and press [F4 (MARK)].
By pressing [F3 (ALL)], you can place and remove
marks from all of the songs simultaneously. In
addition, you can press [F2 (SelSg)] to display a
directory of the songs. At this point, after you
have placed a Marker at the song you want, press
[F1 (Back)].
fig.07-19(cdr_rc_selsg.eps)
Chapter 7
7. Press [
Song.”
] to move the cursor to “Erase All
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” the recover procedure is carried out after the destination drive is initialized. If you
want to perform the recover procedure leaving songs
already saved in the current drive as they are, then set
this to “Off.”
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A message asking for confirmation appears in the display.
9. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
10. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
11. Execute the load. When over multiple discs, the
disc is ejected, “Insert Disc #” (# indicates the
number in the order of insertion) appears in the
display. Insert the next disc and press [YES].
12. When the CD-R backup procedure is finished,
return to Play condition.
127
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
This chapter describes the MIDI messages that can be
handled by the VS-1680 and the operations that the
VS-1680 can perform using MIDI messages.
For more detailed information about MIDI, please
refer to “About MIDI” (Appendices p. 4).
Synchronizing with MIDI
Sequencers
The VS-1680 can be operated in synchronization with
a MIDI sequencer. Refer to the owner’s manual for
your sequencer in conjunction with this manual.
There are two main ways to accomplish synchronization, one is method using MTC (MIDI time code)
and the other one is method using MIDI Clock, with
MIDI Clock further divided into two types, Sync
Track and Tempo Map, either if which can be selected. Use the method that is appropriate for your situation.
MTC (Appendices p. 64)
• Using MTC (MIDI time code) (p. 128)
• Using the sync track (p. 131)
• Using the tempo map (p. 133)
Items Necessary for Synchronization
- VS-1680 (1)
- Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
Using MTC
This section explains how the VS-1680 can be synchronized with a MIDI sequencer that implements MTC
(MIDI Time Code). When using MTC, you can choose
to have the VS-1680 be the master that controls the
MIDI sequencer, or to have the MIDI sequencer be the
master that controls the VS-1680.
MTC Type
The VS-1680 can work with the following types of
MTC. Check the specifications of the MIDI
devices that you are using, and select the appropriate type of MTC on the VS-1680.
30: 30 frames per second non-drop format.
This is used by audio devices such as analog tape recorders, and for NTSC format
black and white video.
29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format.
This is used for NTSC format color video.
29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This
is used for NTSC format broadcast color
video.
25: 25 frames per second. This is used for
SECAM or PAL format video, audio equipment, and film.
24: 24 frames per second. This is used for
video, audio devices, and film in the US.
Frame (Appendices p. 63)
- Audio equipment to be connected to the MASTER
jack, or stereo headphones
NTSC Format (Appendices p. 64)
- External MIDI sequencer or computer sequencer
software (such as Cakewalk Pro Audio)
SECAM/PAL Format (Appendices p. 64)
- MIDI cables
Master and Slave
When synchronizing the VS-1680 with a MIDI
sequencer, the device that sends, or transmits MTC or
MIDI Clock and acts as the reference device is referred
to as the master. Conversely, the device that receives
the MTC or MIDI Clock signals from the controlling
device is called the slave.
When using MTC, you can choose whether to have the
MIDI sequencer be the master that controls the VS1680, or to have the VS-1680 be the master that controls the MIDI sequencer. In contrast, when you use
MIDI Clock, whereas you can synchronize a MIDI
sequencer from the VS-1680 (VS-1680 as master), it
will not be possible to synchronize the VS-1680 from
the sequencer (VS-1680 as slave).
128
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
Drop Frame and Non-Drop Frame
There are two types of time code used by NTSC
format video cassette recorders, drop, in which
the time code is not continuous, and non-drop,
which features continuous time code. In drop,
which is used for NTSC color video format, the
first two frames of every minute are dropped,
except for those at ten-minute intervals.
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
fig.08-02(vs_mtc->seq.eps)
fig.08-01(df/ndf.eps)
Non-Drop Frame (29N)
00m59s
...
01m00s
25 26 27 28 29 00 01 02 03 04 05f ...
Drop Frame (29D)
00m59s
...
01m00s
MIDI IN
25 26 27 28 29 02 03 04 05 06 07f ...
In most video and audio production, since formats with continuous frames are easier to deal
with, non-drop is generally used. In contrast, in
situations such as in broadcast, where the time
code must match actual clock time, drop is used.
MIDI Sequencer
(implements MTC)
Synchronization with the VS-1680 as
the Reference (Master)
When you are having the VS-1680 act to control the
MIDI sequencer, use the following procedure.
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
4. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
then press [F4 (MIDI)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru,” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. For now, select “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI messages from
the VS-1680. Select this when you want to transmit metronome Note messages or mixer parameter settings (control change messages or
exclusive messages).
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted from the connector
without change.
129
Chapter 8
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
6. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
fig.08-03(sync/tempo.eps)
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
fig.08-04(seq_mtc->vs.eps)
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each of the values.
Sync Gen (Generator)
This selects the type of synchronization signal that will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. At this
point, select “MTC.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map
is transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync
track is transmitted.
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC that matches your MIDI sequencer.
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
(implements MTC)
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
fig.08-05(sync/tempo.eps)
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
9. Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate
according to the MIDI Clock messages received
from external devices, and set it so that it can play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on
the VS-1680, the MIDI sequencer begins playback
as well.
Synchronization with the MIDI
Sequencer as the Reference (Slave)
When the MIDI sequencer is used as the basis to control the VS-1680, use the following procedure.
When using MIDI sequencer software for
personal computers
When using MIDI sequencer software for personal computers, then depending on the hardware
specifications and the playing conditions, the
MTC signal sent to the VS-1680 may be unstable.
As much as possible, try to synchronize using the
VS-1680 as the master.
130
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each of the values.
Sync Error Level
This sets the interval (0–10) for checking MTC reception when synchronizing the VS-1680 as MTC is transmitted by an external MIDI device. When MTC is not
sent continuously, the VS-1680 checks the MTC and
cancels synchronization if there is an error. By setting
a longer interval under such circumstances, synchronization can continue, even if there is a certain degree
of error.
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC that matches your MIDI sequencer.
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5. Set your MIDI sequencer to send MTC.
Song
6. Press [EXT SYNC].
The button indicator blinks, indicating that the VS1680 is synchronized using the MTC from the MIDI
sequencer.
7. Press [PLAY].
The button indicator blinks green, indicating that the
VS-1680 is in MTC receive standby mode. When the
MIDI sequencer begins playback, then playback also
begins on the VS-1680. During synchronization, the
EXT SYNC indicator and PLAY indicator are lit.
Synchronizing with an External MIDI
Device
When the VS-1680 is running under the control of the
MTC from an external MIDI device, you can synchronize the song’s playback time and the MTC time. This
time is called the offset. For example, if the MTC time
is “01h00m00s00f00,” and the song’s time is
“00h10m00s00f00,” the “offset” is as follows.
(Offset)
= (MTC time) - (destined time of the song)
= (01h00m00s00f00) - (00h10m00s00f00)
= (00h50m00s00f00)
(Offset)
= (MTC time) - (destined time of the song)
= (00h00m50s00f00) - (00h01m00s00f00)
= (24h00m00s00f00) + (00h00m50s00f00) (00h01m00s00f00)
= (23h59m50s00f00)
* With the VS-1680, continuous playback from
“23h59m59s29f99” to “00h00m00s00f00” does not correspond to (overnight mode). The song that crosses over
“00h00m00s00f00” momentarily stops at
“23h59m59s29f99” then resumes playback.
00h00m00s00f
Time
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the values.
Offset
When the VS-1680 is running under the control of the
MTC from an external MIDI device, you can synchronize the song’s playback time and the MTC time. The
offset settings range varies depending on the MTC
type selected for the current song.
Time Display Format
Select one of the reference times (REL, ABS) that
appear in the display. For now, choose “ABS.”
REL: The starting time of the song is displayed as
“00h00m00s00f00.”
ABS: The time displayed includes the addition of the
offset time.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Using the Sync Track (Master)
If your MIDI sequencer supports Song Position
Pointer messages, you can use the MIDI Clock to synchronize operations. There are two methods of synchronization using the MIDI Clock: one is using the
sync track, and the other one is using the tempo map.
Here is an explanation of how to control the MIDI
sequencer from the VS-1680 using the sync track.
fig.08-05a(overnight.eps)
131
Chapter 8
If the offset value turns out to be negative, add
“24h00m00s00f00” to the MTC time before subtracting
the destined time of the song. For example, if the MTC
time transmitted is 00h00m50s00f00,” and you want
the song to play back at “00h01m00s00f00,” then the
offset works out as shown below.
23h59m59s00
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
What is the Sync Track?
In addition to the tracks for recording audio signals,
the VS-1680 has a separate track for recording MIDI
Clock signals. This is called the sync track. Unlike
conventional multi-track recorders, it is not necessary
to reserve one of the audio tracks for recording the
sync signal.
To use the sync track, first the MIDI clock of the MIDI
song data to which you want to synchronize must first
be recorded onto the sync track. Then, transmit the
recorded MIDI clock data to the MIDI sequencer to
synchronize the MIDI song data. This is a convenient
method to use when the MIDI song data has been created earlier than the VS-1680 song.
In particular, when synchronizing to MIDI song data
in which the tempo gradually increases or decreases,
using the tempo map allows more precise following of
tempo changes, compared to the tempo map in which
tempo is set for each measure.
4. ”Wait for Start Command” appears in the display,
and the sync track is ready for record MIDI clock
data. If you wish to cancel the record MIDI clock
data, then press [EXIT (NO)].
5. Start playback of the MIDI song data.
The MIDI clock data is recorded on the sync track.
While MIDI clock data is being recorded onto the sync
track, the input sources can be monitored, but audio
tracks cannot be recorded or played back.
6. When the MIDI song data is finished playing back,
the VS-1680 automatically stops recording MIDI
clock data.
Synchronized Operation
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
fig.08-07(vs_midi->seq.eps)
Recording MIDI Clock Messages
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
fig.08-06(seq_midi->svs.eps)
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI Sequencer
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
MIDI Sequencer
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
3. Press [F1 (STRec)].
132
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
4. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
then press [F4 (MIDI)].
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. For now, select “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI messages from
the VS-1680. Select this when you want to transmit metronome Note messages or mixer parameter settings (control change messages or
exclusive messages).
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted from the connector
without change.
6. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
fig.08-08(sync/tempo.eps)
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Using the Tempo Map (Master)
If your MIDI sequencer supports Song Position
Pointer messages, you can use the MIDI Clock to synchronize operations. There are two methods of synchronization using the MIDI Clock: one is using the
sync track, and the other one is using the tempo map.
This section gives an explanation of how to control the
MIDI sequencer from the VS-1680 using the tempo
map.
What is a Tempo Map?
A tempo map is a song’s measure, beat, and tempo
information. Transmitting this information to MIDI
sequencers and other devices, it can be used in synchronizing operations with external MIDI devices. The
tempo map sets tempo changes for each measure, so
you can record information specifying changes in
rhythm and tempo to be played from any designated
measure. With the VS-1680, tempo maps are numbered sequentially from the beginning of the song,
with Tempo Map 1 first, followed by Tempo Map 2,
Tempo Map 3, and so on. Tempo Map 1 is already
specified at the beginning of the song, and determines
the initial tempo of the song. To change the tempo at a
subsequent measure, create a new tempo map at each
location where you want the tempo to change. Up to
50 tempo maps can be created.
Chapter 8
fig.08-09(tempomap.eps)
Sync Gen (Generator)
This selects the type of synchronization signal that will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. At this
point, select “SyncTr.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map
is transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync
track is transmitted.
Example 1: Song with no tempo changes
Tempo Map 1 (120 BPM)
Example 2: Song with tempo changes occurring during the song
Tempo Map 1
(120 BPM)
Tempo Map 2
(117 BPM)
Tempo Map 3
(108 PBM)
Time
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
9. Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate
according to the MIDI Clock messages received
from external devices, and set it so that it can play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on
the VS-1680, the MIDI sequencer begins playback
as well.
133
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
Creating a Tempo Map
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [TAP].
The Tempo Map screen appears in the display.
2. Tempo Map 1 (the song’s initial tempo) is displayed. Press [
], [
],
[
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to
change each of the settings values. The measure appearing in the display
and its beat, metronome sound, and MIDI Clock transmitted from the VS1680 follow the tempo map settings.
fig.08-10(tmaplcd.eps)
Tempo Map Number
Tempo
Measure
Beat
Cursor
= (Tempo)
Sets the tempo map tempo (25.0–250.0).
Meas (Measure)
Selects the beginning measure (1–999) for each tempo map.
Beat
This sets the tempo map time signature (1/1–8/1, 1/2–8/2, 1/4–8/4, 1/8–8/8).
At this time, the function buttons work as shown below.
[F2 (New)]:
Adds a tempo map at a “new” location (at the end).
[F3 (Ins)]:
Inserts a tempo map at the position of the cursor.
[F4 (Del)]:
Deletes a tempo map at the position of the cursor.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the Tempo Map screen.
* Tempo Map 1 is the song’s initial tempo. You cannot be changed or deleted the beginning measure setting of “1.”
134
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
Synchronized Operation
6. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
fig.08-12(sync/tempo.eps)
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the MIDI sequencer as
shown below.
fig.08-11(vs_midi->seq.eps)
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
MIDI IN
Sync Gen (Generator)
This selects the type of synchronization signal that will
be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. At this
point, select “MIDIClk.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map
is transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync
track is transmitted.
8. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
4. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
then press [F4 (MIDI)].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. For now, select “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI messages from
the VS-1680. Select this when you want to
transmit metronome Note messages or mixer
parameter settings (control change messages
or exclusive messages).
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted from the connector without change.
9. Set your MIDI sequencer so that it can operate
according to the MIDI Clock messages received
from external devices, and set it so that it can play
back MIDI song data. When playback begins on
the VS-1680, the MIDI sequencer begins playback
as well.
Various Operations Related to
Synchronized Operation
There may be times when you want to use MIDI Clock
to synchronize with an external MIDI sequencer or
other device, even without recording using the
metronome. In such instances, to synchronize with the
tempo of the recorded song, first set a Marker. You can
then create a sync track or tempo map beginning at
that Marker.
Setting Markers Along with the Tempo
1. Press [ZERO].
2. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
3. While listening to the song, press [TAP] at the
downbeat at the each beat.
135
Chapter 8
MIDI Sequencer
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
4. When you have finished setting the Markers, press
[STOP].
* To correctly place Markers on the downbeats of other
song, we recommend using the Preview and Scrub functions.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
3. Press [F2 (TP→TM)].
4. Press [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate
the TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
fig.08-14(tap->tmap.eps)
Creating a Sync Track from the
Marker
A sync track can be generated from markers that were
assigned according to the tempo of a previously
recorded performance. This is convenient when you
have already recorded a performance of an acoustic
instrument such as guitar or vocal, and now you wish
to synchronize a MIDI sequencer etc. to the recording.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
3. Press [F1 (TP→ST)].
4. Press [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate
the TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
fig.08-13(tap->sync.eps)
Beat
Specify the number of beat in one measure.
Tap Beat
Specify the number of marks in each measure.
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
6. A confirmation message asking if you want to save
the changes to the tempo map appears in the display. If you want to save the changes, press [YES].
If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Beat
Specify the number of beat in one measure.
Tap Beat
Specify the number of marks in each measure.
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
6. A confirmation message asking if you want to save
the changes to the sync track appears in the display. If you want to save the changes, press [YES].
If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
Creating a Tempo Map from a Sync
Track
You can create a tempo map from sync track stored in
the VS-1680. This is convenient when you want to
change a sync track’s MIDI Clock with the VS-1680.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
3. Press [F3 (ST→TM)].
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change the value.
fig.08-15(sunc->tmap.eps)
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Creating a Tempo Map from a Marker
A tempo map can be created from markers that were
assigned according to the tempo of an already recorded song. This is convenient when you wish to synchronize a MIDI sequencer to a previously recorded performance of an acoustic instrument such as guitar or
vocal.
136
Sync Track Beat
Specify the number of beats per measure in the MIDI
clock that is recorded in the sync track.
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
6. A confirmation message asking if you want to save
the changes to the tempo map appears in the display. If you want to save the changes, press [YES].
If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Creating a Sync Track Automatically
You can automatically create a sync track by specifying the start and end times of the song, and the number of measures that it contains. This is convenient
when you already know the length of the song, such
as with commercials.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [F2 (STCnv)].
3. Press [F4 (TI→ST)].
4. Press [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate
the TIME/VALUE dial to change each value.
fig.08-16(time->sync.eps)
Delaying Sync Track and Tempo Map
Start Times
Usually, a sync track or tempo map is created with
“00h00m00s00f00” as the beginning of the song.
However, recording usually doesn’t actually start
from “00h00m00s00f00.” In this kind of situation, you
can determine how much later recording begins after
the start of the song. This time is referred to as offset.
For example, if you want recording to begin ten seconds after the start of the song (with time to spare), set
the offset time to “00h00m10s00f00.”
* During recording or playback, when the beginning of a
sync track or tempo map is reached, the start message is
sent from the MIDI OUT connector. This is convenient
when you wish to synchronize operation with an external
MIDI sequencer.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
2. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “Sync Offset.”
] to move the
3. Specify the offset. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 8
Start Time
Specify the song start time.
End Time
Specify the song end time.
Measure
Specify the number of measures within a specified
time.
Beat
Specify the number of beats in one measure.
5. Press [F5 (Exec)].
6. A confirmation message asking if you want to save
the changes to the sync track appears in the display. If you want to save the changes, press [YES].
If you wish to cancel, then press [NO].
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
137
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
Use with a MIDI Controller
The VS-1680 can transmit its mixer settings and functions as MIDI messages. Conversely, MIDI messages
from an external MIDI controller can be used to control the VS-1680’s track status and mixer settings.
Switching Track Status
You can use MIDI control change messages to switch
the status of each track (track status). MIDI channels
1–16 correspond to Tracks 1–16 respectively. Use controller number 3 to switch the track status.
Depending on the value of controller number 3, the
track status changes as shown below.
When stopped:
VALUE 0–31
32–63
STATUS MUTE
MUTE
→MUTE →PLAY
64–95
MUTE
→REC
96–127
MUTE
→SOURCE
PLAY
PLAY
→MUTE →PLAY
PLAY
→REC
PLAY
→SOURCE
RECREC
→MUTE →PLAY
REC
→REC
REC
→SOURCE
SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE
→MUTE →PLAY →REC
→SOURCE
During playback or recording:
VALUE 0–31
32–63
64–95
STATUS — (*1)
MUTE
— (*1)
→PLAY
96–127
— (*1)
PLAY
PLAY
→MUTE →PLAY
— (*1)
— (*1)
— (*1)
REC
→REC
REC
→SOURCE
(*2)
— (*1)
SOURCE — (*1)
→MUTE
SOURCE SOURCE
→REC(*2) →SOURCE
(*1) Ignored.
(*2) Cannot be switched while recording. Also,
“SOURCE” here indicates “the status in which
the track indicator blinks alternately red and
orange,” and is valid only when Record Monitor
is set to “AUTO” (p. 191).
138
Switching Scenes
You can switch Scenes with MIDI Program Change
messages sent by the external MIDI controller.
During Playback of a Song
Scenes cannot be switched during playback of a
song. Because of this, the VS-1680 stops momentarily if it receives a program change message
during playback instructing it to change scenes.
While it is stopped, the scene is switched, and
then playback resumes.
Furthermore, during recording, only effect program change messages can be received. Scenes
cannot be switched during recording.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
then press [F4 (MIDI)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “P.C.Scene” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
P.C.Scene (Program Change Scene)
With this set to “On,” the scene is changed when program change messages are received. For now, select
“On.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Use MIDI channel 16 for switching scenes. The relationship between the program change number
received by the VS-1680 and the Scene Number it
switches to is shown below.
Program Number
1–8
Scene Number
1–8
* For more detailed information, please refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 25).
Chapter 8 Use with MIDI Devices
Switching Effects
Adjusting Effects
You can use MIDI control change messages transmitted from an external MIDI controller to switch effects.
You can use MIDI control change messages transmitted from an external MIDI controller to control effects.
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
1. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon appears in the display. If the
System menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
then press [F4 (MIDI)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “P.C.Eff” and rotate the TIME/VALUE
dial.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “C.C.Eff” and rotate the TIME/VALUE
dial.
P.C.Eff (Program Change Effect)
With this set to “On,” the effect is switched when program change messages are received. For now, select
“On.”
C.C.Eff (Control Change Effect)
With this set to “On,” the effect is adjusted when control change messages are received. For now, select
“On.”
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
MIDI channels 1–4 correspond to EFX1–EFX4 respectively. The relationship between the bank number
received by the VS-1680 and the Effect Patch Number
it switches to is shown below.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Bank No.LSB
0
1
2
3
4
Program No.Patch No.
1–100
P000–P099
1–100
P100–P199
1–10
P200–P209
1–100
U000–U099
1–100
U100–U199
Chapter 8
Bank No.MSB
0
0
0
0
0
* If you wish to use control change messages to switch
effects, use NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Numbers).
For more detailed information, please refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 25).
* For more detailed information, please refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (Appendices p. 25).
139
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
This chapter explains the procedures for using a DAT
recorder in conjunction with the VS-1680. Refer to the
owner’s manual for your DAT recorder as you read
this manual.
Before Backing Up with DAT
With a DAT recorder connected to the VS-1680’s DIGITAL OUT connector (coaxial or optical), song data created on the VS-1680 can be saved using a DAT
recorder. This procedure is referred to as backup.
Conversely, the procedure of loading the previously
backed up song data into the VS-1680 is referred to as
recover. The song data that is backed up includes the
data of all V-tracks, and song settings such as locate
points, mark points, and scene settings. You should
make backups of your data as a precaution against
unforeseen problems, or when your disk drive is full
and no more recording is possible. Furthermore, since
DAT tapes are easily transported, this is convenient
when you wish to exchange song data with a friend
who also has a VS-1680, or when you have a VS-1680
both at home and in the studio. We recommend that
important data be backed up onto multiple tapes.
Items Necessary for DAT Backup
• VS-1680 (1)
• Internal IDE hard disk (HDP88 series)
• DAT recorder (1)
• DAT tape (as many as needed)
• Digital connection cables (coaxial or optical)
About the Devices Used in DAT Backup
DAT recorder:
You can use a conventional DAT recorder.
Other digital recording devices, including MD
recorders or DCC recorders, cannot be used to back up
data. Furthermore, you cannot back up data if you are
using a DAT recorder, for example one featuring
external digital signal processing, whose playback
data differs from the data as it was recorded.
* Portable DAT recorders may require a special adapter
when connecting to the VS-1680. Please check the
owner’s manual for your DAT recorder, or consult your
dealer or service center to see what your model may
require.
DAT (Appendices p. 63)
* Incorrectly conducting the DAT Backup procedure may
result in loss of data. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. Furthermore, Roland
does not warrant any copied data, regardless of the performance or condition of the DAT recorder.
Backing Up Song Data with a CD-R Drive
or Zip Drive
You can use a CD-R drive or Zip drive to back up
song data from the VS-1680. Song data backed up
onto a CD-R disc cannot be overwritten. Thus,
this method is appropriate for backing up completely finished songs or other such data. Song
data backed up on Zip disks can be overwritten
any number of times, but considering the time
required for saving data, and because of reliability issues, it is more convenient to back up data
using a Zip drive. Roland recommends backing
up data (Song Copy) with a Zip drive.
140
Tape:
You can use a conventional DAT tapes.
However, 180-minutes tapes are very thin, and may
easily stretch or become tangled in the recorder. Avoid
using 180-minutes tapes.
When you need more than one tape to do the backup,
prepare whatever number of tapes you need, making
sure that all of the tapes feature the same recording
time. It is recommended that you write the numbers of
the tapes to indicate the order in which they are
backed up.
Audio equipment:
During DAT backups, no sound is output from the
VS-1680 analog output jacks.
Additionally, turn down the volume of any connected
audio devices at minimum level while song data is
being backed up. The song data sent to the DAT
recorder from the VS-1680 is a particular signal recorded on the disk. Monitoring this with the DAT
recorder’s volume raised may result in damage to
your speakers, and may adversely affect your hearing.
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Saving Song Data to a DAT
Recorder (Backup)
Coaxial
Use the following procedure to back up the
song data on the current drive.
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the DAT recorder as
shown below.
fig.09-02a(datconnect)
Optical
Digital In
DAT recorder
2. Set the DAT recorder so that it is able to record
digital signals.
Digtal In
fig.09-02b(datconnect)
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
4. Press [F6 (DATBk)]. If “DATBk” does not appear
in [F6], first press [PAGE] until “DATBk” is displayed, then press [F6 (DATBk)].
fig.09-03(dat_bk.eps)
141
Chapter 9
DAT recorder
* Normally, the sample rate at which song data is transmitted is set at 48 kHz. This sample rate has no relation to
the sample rate of the song data. If your DAT recorded
requires you to set the sample rate, set it to 48 kHz.
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Sample Rate
This sets the sample rate (48 kHz, 44.1 kHz) during
DAT backup. This sample rate has no relation to the
sample rate of the song data. Normally, this is set to 48
kHz.
Backup Wait
When this is set to “On,” the data transmission speed
will be slower. Turn this on when using a disk drive
(such as a Zip drive) whose data read/write speed is
slower. When this is set to “On,” although it takes
longer for the backup to finish, problems arising from
the data transfer (such as data loss) are minimized.
Normally, this is set to “Off.”
5. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not, then press [NO].
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
cursor to “Source Song.”
] to move the
7. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to
the song you want to copy and press [F3
(MARK)]. By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place
and remove Marks from all of the songs. In addition, you can press [F1 (SelSg)] to display a directory of the songs. At this point, after you have
placed a Mark at the song you want, press [F1
(Back)].
fig.09-03a(dat_bk_selsg.eps)
Tape Length
Specify the interval at which backup will be paused.
Set this so that the interval is no less than about five
minutes shorter than the length of tape on which you
are recording. When using tapes with different recording times, set this to the recording time of the shortest
tape.
9. The approximate time it will take and the number
of tapes needed to back up the data are indicated
in the display. Please prepare the necessary number of tapes.
10. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
11. Press [YES].
“Please Rec DAT” appears in the display.
12. Put the DAT recorder in record standby, and
press [YES] once more.
13. If you cannot back up everything on one tape, the
operation is carried out for the length of time designated in “Tape Length.” Insert the next tape
into the DAT recorder and again put it in record
standby, then press [YES].
The backup procedure continues in this fashion. At
this time, we recommend that you write the tape numbers on the labels in the order they are backed up.
8. Press [
], [
], and [
Set each of the values.
14. When the backup procedure is finished, “Please
Stop DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorded and press [YES].
] to move the cursor.
Digital Out Select
Select either “DIGOUT1” (coaxial) or “DIGOUT2”
(optical) if you are going to back up data using the
DIGITAL OUT connector.
142
15. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Return to Play condition.
* If you wish to cancel the backup, then press [EXIT (NO)].
This cancels the process, even if done during the backup
itself. However, the song data recorded up to that point
cannot be loaded into the VS-1680.
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
* To check whether or not a backup has been performed correctly, we recommend that you carry out the Verify procedure (p. 146).
Optical
Disk Capacity Needed for Backup
One 60-minutes tape can back up approximately
330 MB of song data. For example, you need four
60-minutes (or two 120-minutes) tapes to back up
1000 MB of song data. However, the disk space
available for each song decreases as the number
of songs save increases. Look at the display to see
the number of tapes needed to do the backup.
Time Needed for Backup
It takes about 60 minutes to back up 330 MB of
song data. For example, backing up 1000 MB of
data takes about 190 minutes. However, the higher the number of songs backed up, the longer it
takes.
Digtal Out
Loading Performance Data
from a DAT Recorder
(Recover)
Use the following procedure to load song data that
was backed up on a DAT recorder. If two or more
songs were saved together during the backup, the data
of all songs will be loaded.
DAT recorder
fig.09-05c(dat_rc_connect)
Coaxial
Chapter 9
* You can recover VS-880 song data backed up using DAT
backup. However, you cannot edit or resave the
recovered data on the VS-1680.
* If you wish to edit VS-880 song data with VS-1680, convert it to VS-1680 song data and create a copy.
1. Connect the DAT recorder to the VS-1680 as following.
fig.09-05b(dat_rc_connect)
Digital Out
DAT recorder
143
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
2. Insert the tape which contains the song data into
the DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up
on two or more tapes, insert the first tape.
11. When the recover procedure is finished, “Please
Stop DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorder, then press [YES].
3. Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning
of the song data.
12. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
When Cancelling the Recover Operation
5. Press [F1 (DATRc)]. If “DATRc” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “DATRc” is displayed, then press [F1 (DATRc)].
fig.09-05a(dat_rc.eps)
You can stop the recover operation by pressing [EXIT
(NO)] during the recover. Moreover, when there is an
error in song data backed up on a tape, the recover
operation is temporarily halted. In such instances, you
can choose whether to leave or delete the (unfinished)
song data recovered up to that point.
* This procedure does not correct the disk error, but
tries to restore the song data while keeping as much possible of the non-error data. Depending on the location in
which the error occurred, some noises may generated or
settings for mixer, tempo map and sync track may be lost.
* Loud noises may damage your audio equipment such as
amplifier and speakers. Please make sure to turn down the
headphones level and master volume of the VS-1680 when
you check errors in the song data.
6. Press [
] and [
of the values.
] to move the cursor. Set each
Digital In Select
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical)
if you are going to recover data using the VS-1680’s
DIGITAL IN connector.
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” song data is recovered after
the current drive is initialized. If you want to keep the
song data on the current drive when carrying out the
recover procedure, set this to “Off.”
7. Press [F4 (Exec)].
8. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not, then press [NO].
Cancelling a DAT Recovery Operation in
Progress:
1. Press [EXIT (NO)] during the DAT recovery.
Recovery is stopped, and “Delete Err Song?” (Delete
the song containing the error?) appears in the display.
2. If you would like to delete from the hard disk the
song data that stopped the recovery operation,
press [YES]. If you would like to keep it as it is
though the recovery is not completed, press [NO].
When an Error is Found in the Song Data:
1. If an error is found in the song data which was
recovered with the DAT recovery operation,
“Recover Err Retry?”(An error was found. Retry
the song?) appears in the display.
2. If you want to try to recover the data, press [YES].
If you want to cancel the recovery, press [NO].
9. ”Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
Put the DAT recorder in play mode.
3. If you press [NO] in Step 2, “Delete Err Song?”
then appears in the display.
10. Load the data. If you have backed up the data to
multiple tapes, then the operation is suspended
when the end of each tape is reached. Insert the
number tape indicated in the display, press [YES],
and start the DAT recorder playing again.
4. If you would like to delete the song data with the
error from the hard disk, press [YES]. If you
would like to keep it as it is though the error is
included, press [NO].
144
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
Checking Names of Saved
Performance Data (Name)
Coaxial
This operation lets you check the names of song data
that was saved to a DAT tape. Even if you have saved
the data of two or more songs in a single backup operation, you can check the name of each song.
This operation also allows you to load selected song
data into the VS-1680. When the recover operation is
used, the data for all songs which were saved together
by the backup operation are loaded. In contrast, with
the Name procedure, only the song data that you specify is loaded.
1. Connect the DAT recorder to the VS-1680 as following.
fig.09-06c(dat_rc_connect)
Optical
Digital Out
DAT recorder
2. Insert the tape which contains the song data into
the DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up
on two or more tapes, insert the first tape.
3. Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning
of the song data.
Digtal Out
5. Press [F1 (DATRc)]. If “DATRc” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “DATRc” is displayed, then press [F1 (DATRc)].
6. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Digital In
Select” and rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
DAT recorder
fig.09-06d(dat_rc_connect)
Digital In Select
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical)
if you are going to recover data using the VS-1680’s
DIGITAL IN connector.
7. Press [F1 (Name)].
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
8. Put the DAT recorder in play mode.
This executes the loading of the song name.
145
Chapter 9
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
9. When the load procedure is finished, “Please Stop
DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorder, then press [YES]. The DAT Name screen
appears in the display.
fig.09-06a(datname.eps)
Erase All Songs
When this is set to “On,” song data is recovered after
the current drive is initialized. If you want to keep the
song data on the current drive when carrying out the
recover procedure, set this to “Off.”
15. Press [F4 (Exec)].
16. When “Erase All Songs” set to “Off,” ”STORE
Current?” appears in the display. If you wish to
save the current song, press [YES]; if not, then
press [NO].
17. ”Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
Rewind the tape and then put the DAT recorder in
play mode.
10. If you wish to end the operation after merely
checking the, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
11. If you recover only specified song data, the press
[
] to move the cursor to “source Song.”
12. Songs that are marked are copied. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the song
you want to recover and press [F3 (MARK)]. By
pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and remove
Marks from all of the songs.
13. By pressing [F1 (SelSg)], you can have a list of the
songs displayed. In this case, place marks on the
songs you want to recover, and then press [F1
(Back)]. You can check the time and date any song
was created or revised by pressing [F5].
fig.09-06b(dat_name_selsg.eps)
18. Loading of the song data begins. If you have
backed up the data to multiple tapes, then the
operation is suspended when the end of each tape
is reached. Insert the number tape indicated in the
display, press [YES], and start the DAT recorder
playing again.
19. When the recover procedure is finished, “Please
Stop DAT” appears in the display. Stop the DAT
recorder, then press [YES].
20. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* To cancel this operation, press [EXIT (NO)].
Checking the Recording
Condition of Saved
Performance Data (Verify)
This operation checks the condition of song data that
was recorded to DAT tape. However, it does not perform a comparison of the song data on the hard disk
and the tape.
If results of the DAT verify operation warns that data
is not recorded correctly, it is possible that the tape has
been scratched or stretched. If the original song data
still exists in the disk drive, perform the backup operation once again to a different DAT tape.
* When performing DAT backups, in order to confirm that
the data indeed has been properly backed up, we recommend that you carry out the Verify procedure as well.
fig.09-07a(dat_rc_connect)
14. Press [
Songs.”
146
] to move the cursor to “Erase All
Chapter 9 Use with a DAT Recorder (DAT Backup)
1. Connect the DAT recorder to the VS-1680 as left.
Coaxial
2. Insert the tape which contains the song data into
the DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up
on two or more tapes, insert the first tape.
3. Prepare the tape for playback from the beginning
of the song data.
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F1 (DATRc)]. If “DATRc” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “DATRc” is displayed, then press [F1 (DATRc)].
6. Press [
] to move the cursor to “Digital In
Select” and rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
Digital In Select
Select either “DIGIN1” (coaxial) or “DIGIN2” (optical)
if you are going to recover data using the VS-1680’s
DIGITAL IN connector.
Digital Out
7. Press [F2 (Verify)].
“Please Play DAT” appears in the display.
8. Put the DAT recorder in play mode.
Verify the tape. If you have backed up the data to multiple tapes, then the operation is suspended when the
end of each tape is reached. Insert the number tape
indicated in the display, press [YES], and start the
DAT recorder playing again.
DAT recorder
fig.09-07b(dat_rc_connect)
Coaxial
9. When loading is finished, “Please Stop DAT”
appears in the display. Stop the DAT recorder,
then press [YES].
* To cancel this operation, press [EXIT (NO)].
Digital Out
DAT recorder
147
Chapter 9
10. If there is no problem with the condition of the
recorded song data, “Complete” appears in the
display. If a warning message appears when the
song data is loaded, then that song data cannot be
loaded correctly. If you wish to check a tape
again, insert the number tape indicated in the display, press [YES], and start the DAT recorder
playing again. Press [NO] if you want to finish the
procedure without checking the tape again.
Chapter 10 Compatibility
Disks used with Roland’s VS-880 and VS-840 models
can also be used by the VS-1680. Additionally, song
data recorded on such disks can be loaded by the VS1680. However, because differences in the structure of
disk space and song data on disks that can be used,
there are a number of precautions concerning the loading and saving of data that should be observed.
Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy
procedure on the VS-1680 cannot be restored (extracted) by the VS-880.
Disk Compatibility
VS-840 ↔ VS-1680
VS-880 → VS-1680
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS880 are installed in the VS-1680, or when Zip disks that
have been used by a VS-880 are inserted into a Zip
drive connected to the VS-1680, they are recognized as
the initialization disk. In this case, the VS-1680 can be
used for playing back songs recorded with the VS-880
and creating new songs as well. However, you cannot use the VS-1680 to edit songs that were
recorded on the VS-880 or save new versions of
songs.
Song data that has been saved using the Archive Copy
procedure on the VS-880 can be restored (extracted)
with the VS-1680. However, the VS-1680 cannot edit
or save new versions of the extracted songs.
You can recover VS-880 song data backed up using
DAT backup. However, you cannot edit or resave
the recovered data on the VS-1680.
* If you wish to edit VS-880 song data with VS-1680, execute the Song Archives Extract (p.119) or the DAT recover procedure (p.143) first. Then convert it to VS-1680
song data (Song Import).
VS-1680 → VS-880
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS1680 are installed in the VS-880, or when Zip disks that
have been used by a VS-1680 are inserted into a Zip
drive connected to the VS-880, they are recognized as
the initialization disk, provided they meet the conditions below. In this case, however, the VS-880 can
create new songs on the disk. Furthermore, the
VS-880 cannot recognize songs recorded on the
VS-1680.
Partition space:
1 GB or less (Even if the disk has been initialized with
the “Partition” set to “2000 MB,” the disk can be used
if the actual partition is 1 GB or less.)
Partition numbers:1–4 (5–8 cannot be used)
148
Song data that has been saved using the DAT Backup
procedure on the VS-1680 cannot be restored (recovered) by the VS-880.
Zip disks used on the VS-840 and VS-1680 are not
mutually compatible. When a Zip disk used by a VS840 is inserted in a Zip drive connected to the VS-1680,
it is recognized as an uninitialized disk. In this case,
only Song Import can be performed.
When a Zip disk used by a VS-1680 is inserted in a Zip
drive connected to the VS-840, it is recognized as an
uninitialized disk.
Loading VS-880/840
Performance Data into the
VS-1680 (Song Import)
You can convert songs created on a VS-880 or
VS-840 for use with the VS-1680 and copy
them as new songs to the current drive. This
is referred to as Song Import.
When VS-880 song data is converted, all the data such
as mixer setting including equalizer and stereo link,
system setting including sync track and tempo map,
locators and markers, and effect setting will be copied.
However, VS-840 song data recorded on Zip disks
only includes the performance data (sound data)
and the information describing the tracks on which
the performance data is recorded. Mixer settings
such as equalizer and Stereo Link, locate and mark
points, effects settings, and so on are not effective.
* You can create a song that has same both sample rate and
recording mode as source song. However, if there is insufficient free space on the current drive, Song Import cannot be carried out.
Here, the procedure for importing a playable copy of a
song on the Zip disk is explained. If you wish to
import the song data which is Song Archives
Extracted or DAT recovered, please proceed to Step 3.
Chapter 10 Compatibility
1. Make settings as shown below.
fig.10-01(connection.eps)
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to select the load
source drive, and rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to
select the load source partition, then press [F1 (Back)].
fig.10-02(sg_imp_dr.eps)
2. Insert the disk onto which VS-880/840 song data
has been recorded into the Zip drive.
3. For the current drive, select the drive (IDE hard
disk) you want to be the load destination.
8. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor
to the song you want to copy, and press [F4
(MARK)]. When [F3 (ALL)] is pressed, you can
place or remove the mark points on all the songs.
In addition, by pressing [F2 (SelSg), you can display a list of available songs. At this point, after
placing mark points in the song, press [F1 (Back)].
fig.10-03(sg_imp_sg.eps)
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
5. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
6. Press [F4 (Imprt)]. If “Imprt” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “Imprt” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (Imprt)].
fig.10-01a(sg_imp.eps)
Chapter 10
9. Press [F5 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
10. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
11. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
7. Press [F1 (SelDr)].
A list of drives appears in the display.
12. After Song Import is completed, return to Play
condition. At this time, the song converted for use
by the VS-1680 becomes the current song.
149
Chapter 10 Compatibility
Converting VS-1680 Song
Data for Use with the VS880 (Song Export)
6. Press [F5 (Exprt)]. If “Exprt” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “Exprt” is displayed,
and then press [F5 (Exprt)].
fig.10-04a(sg_exp.eps)
You can convert the current song for use with
a VS-880 and copy it as a new songs to a Zip
drive connected to the VS-1680’s SCSI connector. This is referred to as Song Export.
All song data, including mixer settings such as equalizer and Stereo Link, system settings such as sync
tracks and Tempo Maps, locate and mark points,
effects settings, and so on are copied.
Limits of Song Exported
Tracks:
1–8
V-tracks:
1–8
Locators:
Bank 1–Bank 4
* You can create a song that has same both sample rate and
recording mode as source song. If the song whose recording mode is set to “MTP” or “LIV2,” Song Export cannot be carried out. However, if there is insufficient free
space on the conversion destination drive, Song Export
cannot be carried out.
1. Make settings as shown below.
7. Press F4 (SelDr)].
A list of drives appears in the display. Press [
],
[
], [
], and [
] to select the conversion destination drive (the Zip drive), rotate the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the conversion destination partition, then
press [F1 (Back)].
fig.10-05(sg_imp_dr.eps)
fig.10-04(connection.eps)
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
A confirmation message appears in the display.
9. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
2. Select the song you want to convert as the current
song.
3. Insert a disk into the Zip drive.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
5. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
150
10. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
11. After Song Export is completed, return to Play
condition.
Chapter 10 Compatibility
How to Install the Hard Disk
Which was Formatted with
the VS-880EX to the VS-1680
Loading VS-880EX
Performance Data into the
VS-1680 (Song Import)
When internal hard disks that have been used by a VS880EX are installed in the VS-1680, or when Zip disks
that have been used by a VS-880EX are inserted into a
Zip drive connected to the VS-1680, they are recognized as the initialization disk. In this case, the VS1680 can be used for playing back songs recorded with
the VS-880EX and creating new songs as well (Song
New).
You can convert songs created on the VS-880EX for
use with the VS-1680 and copy them as new songs to
the current drive. This is referred to as Song Import.
All the data such as mixer settings, system settings,
locators and markers, and effect settings will be
copied.
• The VS-1680 recognizes a song created with the VS880EX as Song Protect is on. You cannot set the Song
Protect off, edit or newly save this song with the VS1680.
• If you wish to edit VS-880EX song data with VS1680, convert it to VS-1680 song data (Song Import).
• Bank A of the VS-880EX is copied to the Tracks 1–8
(V-Tracks 1–8) of the VS-1680. Bank B of the VS880EX is copied to the Tracks 1–8 (V-Tracks 9–16) of
the VS-1680.
fig.10-06(880ex->1680.eps)
VS-1680
Track
1
V-Track 1
• If you wish to delete VS-880EX song data with the
VS-1680, execute Song Erase procedure on the VS1680.
16
You can recover the following archived song data with
the VS-1680.
V-Track 1
• Song data that has been saved on the Zip disks using
the Archive Copy procedure on the VS-880EX
8
• Song data that has been backed up to the CD-R discs
or CD-RW discs using the CD-R Backup procedure
on the VS-880EX
Track
1
8
Track
1
V-Track 1
Bank A
VS-880EX
8
8
Bank B
• The sample rate and recording mode of the newly
created song will be the same as the original song.
• If there is insufficient free space on the current drive,
Song Import cannot be carried out.
1. Connect the Zip drive to the VS-1680.
2. Insert the disk onto which VS-880EX song data has
been recorded into the Zip drive.
3. For the current drive, select the drive (internal
hard disk) you want to be the load destination.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
5. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
151
Chapter 10
Above song data are recovered as a VS-880EX song,
and recognized as Song Protect is on. You cannot set
the Song protect off.
In this case, you should first execute recover procedure (Archive Extract, DAT Recover or CD-R
Recover). Then convert the recovered song data for
use with the VS-1680 (Song Import).
15/16
8
9
How to Recover the Archived Song Data
• Song data that has been backed up to the DAT tapes
using the DAT Backup procedure on the VS-880EX
8, 9/10
Chapter 10 Compatibility
6. Press [F4 (Imprt)]. If “Imprt” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “Imprt” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (Imprt)].
7. Press [F1 (SelDr)]. Press [
], [
], [
], and
[
] to select the load source drive, and rotate
the TIME/VALUE dial to select the load source
partition, then press [F1 (Back)].
8. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor
to the song you want to copy, and press [F4
(MARK)]. In this case, the VS-880EX Song data is
discriminated with “E” at the end of the list.
fig.10-07(import.eps)
Converting VS-1680 Song
Data for Use with the VS880/VS-880EX (Song Export)
You can convert the current song for use with the VS880 and copy it as new songs to a Zip disk. This is
referred to as {Song Export}.
All the song data including mixer setting, system setting, time of marker and locator, and effect settings are
converted. But conversion of some settings such as
track and locator are limited by the VS-880EX’s capacity.
• Tracks 1–8 (V-Tracks 1–8) of the VS-1680 are copied
to the Bank A (Tracks 1–8, V-Tracks 1–8) of the VS880EX. Tracks 1–8 (V-Tracks 9–16) of the VS-1680 are
copied to the Bank B (Tracks 1–8, V-Tracks 1–8) of
the VS-880EX. Tracks 9/10–15/16 (V-Tracks 1–16)
are not copied.
fig.10-06(880ex->1680.eps)
VS-1680
Track
1
V-Track 1
8, 9/10
15/16
8
9
9. Press [F5 (Exec)].
10. Press [YES]. “STORE Current?” (Store the current
song?) appears in the display.
11. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. Song Import procedure
will begin.
12. After Song Import is completed, return to Play
condition.
16
Track
1
V-Track 1
8
8
Track
1
V-Track 1
Bank A
VS-880EX
8
8
Bank B
• Time of locator in the Locator Banks 1–4 are copied.
Times of locator in the Locator Banks 5–8 are copied.
• The sample rate and recording mode of the newly
created song will be the same as the original song.
However, if the song whose recording mode is
set to “MTP” or “LV2,” Song Export cannot be
carried out.
• If there is insufficient free space on the conversion
destination disk, Song Export cannot be carried out.
152
Chapter 10 Compatibility
1. Connect the Zip drive to the VS-1680.
2. Select the song you want to convert for use VS880/VS-880EX as the current song.
3. Insert a ZIP disk into the Zip drive.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
5. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
6. Press [F5 (Exprt)]. If “Exprt” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “Exprt” is displayed,
and then press [F5 (Exprt)].
7. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Save As.” Select the Song data format
to be converted to, VS-880 or VS-880EX, with
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.10-09(export.eps)
When VS-880, VS-1680 and
VS-880EX Format Song Data
are Existed in a Disk
If you recover the Song with Archive Extract or CD-R
Recover, Song data with VS-880, VS-1680 and VS880EX format may be created in a disk. In this case,
Song numbers are sorted by Song data format as follows.
VS-880:
VS-1680:
VS-880EX:
1–200
1–200
1–200
But maximum song number which can be existed
in a partition is 505. For example, maximum number
of VS-880EX songs which can be saved is 105, if each
200 of VS-1680 Songs and VS-880 Songs have already
be existing in the Partition 1 of the internal hard disk.
In the Song Select display, type of Song data is shown
by icon.
: for VS-1680
: for VS-880
: for VS-880EX
8. Press [F4 (Exec)].
9. Press [YES].
“STORE Current?” (Store the current song?) appears
in the display.
Chapter 10
10. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. Song Export procedure
will begin.
11. After Song Export is completed, return to Play
condition.
153
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Previewing Techniques
(Preview)
2. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
3. Play back the song until you reach the point you
are looking for. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
When editing a song, you will likely want to find precise points in the song, for example the point where
sound begins or where the climax begins, when using
Auto Punch-In Recording, and in other editing situations. In such instances, you can specify the amount of
time for playback leading up to or following a designated point as well as monitor the data on the tracks
while gradually shifting the current time in the song.
This is referred to as the Preview function.
There are four Preview buttons, and each one works
differently. Select the one whose function is most
appropriate for what you are trying to accomplish.
Using [TO] [THRU] [FROM]
You can set the length of playback time for the tracks
you want to monitor for 1.0–10.0 seconds leading up
to or starting from the current point in the song. Press
each buttons while the song is stopped.
[TO]:
[FROM]:
[THRU]:
A preview of the song is played back one
time for the specified period of time up to
the current time in the song (Preview To).
A preview of the song is played back one
time for the specified period of time starting from the current time in the song
(Preview From).
A preview of the song is played back for
the specified period of time both up to and
from the designated point in the song, i.e.,
with the current time placed at the center of
the playback (Preview To + Preview From).
4. Alternately press [TO] and [FROM].
The song before and after the current time is played
back. Determine whether the beginning of the sound is
earlier or later than the current time.
5. Next, rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the
current time until you can hear a bit of the beginning of the sound when you press [TO].
6. Finally, rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the
current time until the sound begins precisely
when you press [FROM].
7. Now you can easily find the precise location
where the sound begins. Place a mark point at the
current time or store the current time in a locate
point so that you will be able to easily find it later.
Adjusting the Preview Length
1. To adjust the “Preview To” length, hold down
[SHIFT] and press [TO]. To adjust the length of
“Preview From,” hold down [SHIFT] and press
[FROM].
2. The “Preview Length” is displayed. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the time. Press [TO]
or [FROM] to check the actual playback time.
fig.11-02(pre_len.eps)
fig.11-01(preview.eps)
Preview Length
It sets a length of playback time in the preview function.
Current Time
Preview To
Length
Preview From
Length
3. After you have finished making the settings, press
[F6 (EXIT)].
The initial display reappears.
Time
PREVIEW TO
PREVIEW FROM
PREVIEW THRU
Finding the Location Where the Sound
Begins (example)
1. While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS button
for the track you want to monitor.
The button indicator lights green.
154
Using [SCRUB]
This function is used to repeat playback of the song
before and after a designated point on a selected track
for a more precisely specified length of time (25–100
msec). Press [SCRUB] while the song is stopped. The
button indicator lights, and the specified section is
played back repeatedly.
The playback time (25–100 msec) is shorter than when
Preview as used.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Press the following buttons while their button indicators are lit.
[
][
[TO]:
[FROM]:
]:
Selects the track to be played back.
The song is played back repeatedly
up to the designated point.
The song is played back repeatedly
starting from the designated point.
fig.11-03(scrub.eps)
Scrub Length (FROM)
Current Time
Scrub Length
Scrub Length
Time
SCRUB
SCRUB
Finding the Location Where the Sound
Begins (example)
1. While pressing [STOP], press the STATUS buttons
for all tracks that you want to monitor.
The button indicator lights green.
2. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
3. Play back the song until you reach the point you
are looking for. Press [STOP] to stop playback.
4. Press [SCRUB].
The button indicator lights, and the specified section is
played back repeatedly. Press [TO] or [FROM] to
select the range before or after the current time that
you want to play back.
Scrub Length (TO)
7. Now you can easily find the precise location
where the sound begins. Press [SCRUB] once
more. The indicator light goes off.
8. Place a marker at the current time or store the current time in a locator so that you will be able to
easily find it later.
Adjusting the Scrub Length
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SCRUB].
2. The “Scrub Length” is displayed. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the time. Press
[SCRUB] to check the actual playback time.
fig.11-04(sc_len.eps)
5. Use [
] and [
] to select the track on which
you want to use Scrub playback.
Scrub Length
This sets a length (25–100 msec) of playback time
when the Preview function [SCRUB] button is pressed.
3. After you have finished making the settings, press
[F6 (EXIT)].
The initial display reappears.
fig.11-03a(scrub2.eps)
155
Chapter 11
6. If you pressed [TO] in Step (4), rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the current time until
you can just hear the very beginning of the sound.
If you pressed [FROM] is Step 4, rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the current time until
the sound begins precisely when you press
[FROM].
If you press [F5 (WAVE)], waveform will be displayed. Area for scrub playback will be shown with
dotted line, for your reference.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Recalling a Specific Location
(Jump)
Besides using the TIME/VALUE dial, markers and
locators to move the current time of the song, you can
also directly specify a location or measure and beat to
be recalled. This is convenient when designating locations during Track Edit and Phrase Edit.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [JUMP (PAGE)].
2. ”Jump” appears in the display. Use [
], [
]
and the TIME/VALUE dial to enter the time location.
fig.11-05(jump.eps)
3. Press [F4 (Exec)].
The designated time location is recalled, and you are
returned to the previous condition.
Recording Mixer Settings
(Auto Mix)
With the VS-1680, you can record the present status or
condition of the mixer as a Scene. Unlike with Scenes,
you can alternatively store information at specific
times during playback to markers. Referred to as Auto
Mix, this includes the mixer settings, time-based channel fader movements, and other settings. When during
playback you reach a point where a marker is set, the
mixer settings automatically switch to those stored at
the marker. This is convenient when mixing with complicated settings that are difficult to reproduce manually.
The following mixer settings can be recorded in Auto
Mix.
* Items printed in bold are those that can be adjusted directly with the faders on the top panel. You can record the
time-based movements of the faders by moving the faders
during playback of the song.
INPUT Channel/TRACK Channel:
Fader
Pan
EFX1 Lev (Effect 1 Send Level)
EFX1 Pan (Effect 1 Send Pan)
EFX2 Lev (Effect 2 Send Level)
EFX2 Pan (Effect 2 Send Pan)
EFX3 Lev (Effect 3 Send Level)
EFX3 Pan (Effect 3 Send Pan)
156
EFX4 Lev (Effect 4 Send Level)
EFX4 Pan (Effect 4 Send Pan)
AUX Lev (AUX Level)
AUX Pan
STEREO IN:
Fader
(Balance)
EFFECT RETURN:
(Effect 1 Return Level)
(Effect 1 Return Balance)
(Effect 2 Return Level)
(Effect 2 Return Balance)
(Effect 3 Return Level)
(Effect 3 Return Balance)
(Effect 4 Return Level)
(Effect 4 Return Balance)
Master Block:
(Master Level)
Master Balance
(Monitor Level)
Monitor Balance
(Master Effect 1 Send Level)
(Master Effect 1 Send Balance)
(Master Effect 2 Send Level)
(Master Effect 2 Send Balance)
(Master Effect 3 Send Level)
(Master Effect 3 Send Balance)
(Master Effect 4 Send Level)
(Master Effect 4 Send Balance)
(Master AUX Send Level)
(Master AUX Send Balance)
EFFECT:
EFX1 (Effect 1 Program Number)
EFX2 (Effect 2 Program Number)
EFX3 (Effect 3 Program Number)
EFX4 (Effect 4 Program Number)
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Preparations for Auto Mix
Press [AUTOMIX]. The button indicator lights, indicating that Mix mode is on.
fig.11-06(am_on.eps)
3. Select the channels which you want to record
using Auto Mix. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the input
channel or track channel SELECT button or the
Master Block [EDIT] button.
4. Hold down [SCENE] and press [TAP].
A marker is added at the current time location. At the
same time, a Snapshot of the mixer settings is recorded
at the marker. A marker in which mixer settings are
recorded will be indicated by an “A” following it.
lit
At this time, while holding down the [AUTOMIX] button once more, each time the input channel or track
channel SELECT button or the Master Block [EDIT]
button is pressed, the status of each channel is
switched as follows.
fig.11-07(am_man.eps)
Indicator off:
Auto Mix is disabled.
dark
fig.11-10(snap.eps)
5. Press [AUTOMIX].
The button indicator light goes off.
* If a marker already exists within 0.1 seconds before the
time location where you are attempting to place a new
marker (i.e., the current time), the Snapshot is recorded at
the earlier marker. A marker will not be newly assigned. If
a marker already exists within 0.1 seconds after the time
location at which you are attempting to place a new marker (i.e., the current time), the Snapshot is recorded at the
later marker.
fig.11-08(am_rd.eps)
Indicator on:
Auto Mix playback is enabled.
lit
fig.11-09(am_wt.eps)
Indicator blinking:
Auto Mix is enabled for recording
and playback.
blink
Recording the Mixer Settings, Method
2 (Gradation)
This creates an auto mix that smoothly connects
Snapshots recorded in two adjacent markers. This
method is called Gradation.
For example, this is convenient when you wish to
specify the length of a fade-in or fade-out.
1. Follow the operation as described in “Recording
the Mixer Settings, Method 1,” record a Snapshot
with the time locations at which you want
Gradation to begin and end.
2. Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 1
(Snapshot)
1. Move to the time location where you wish to
record the auto mix.
4. Hold down [SCENE] and press [PREVIOUS] or
[NEXT].
5. A confirmation message appears on the screen.
Press [YES].
A new mark point is automatically added between the
two mark points, and Gradation is executed. Press
[NO] if you wish to cancel Gradation.
2. Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
157
Chapter 11
Mixer settings recorded with Auto Mix can be recorded directly to markers. This method is known as taking a Snapshot. When you move to that marker, the
mixer settings that were recorded will be reproduced.
For example, this is convenient when you want the
intro and ending to have different volume levels or
different effect send levels for guitar parts during
intros or solos.
3. Select the channels which you want to record
using Auto Mix. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the input
channel or track channel SELECT button or the
Master Block [EDIT] button.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
When the current time is included in an adjacent marker:
Press either [SCENE] and [PREVIOUS] or [SCENE]
and [NEXT], the gradation range will be specified in a
same range.
fig.11-11(gra1.eps)
Marker 1
Current Time
Marker 2
Time
Gradation Range
Current Time
Marker 2
Marker 3
Time
Gradation Range
Gradation Range
6. Press [AUTOMIX].
The button indicator light goes off.
Recording Fader Operations (Realtime)
With this method, time-based both channel fader and
master fader movement during play back song are
recorded to the marker directly. This method is
referred to as Realtime. This is convenient when, for
example, you want to freely adjust the volume levels
of individual tracks.
* The VS-1680 does not provide any PAN knobs.
If you wish to adjust the pan during play back continuously, use the Snapshot and the Gradation together.
1. Move to the time location at which you wish to
record in Realtime.
2. Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
3. Select the channels which you want to record
using Auto Mix. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the input
channel or track channel SELECT button or the
Master Block [EDIT] button.
158
5. Press [FADER] to select the faders that will be in
effect with the input mixer or track mixer.
6. Adjust the top panel channel faders and master
fader to the desired positions.
* When the Fader Match (p. 185) in the System parameters
is set to “Null,” and the current fader positions of do not
match the actual volume levels, if you don’t first move the
channel faders to their actual values, you will be unable to
record the data using Auto Mix.
7. Press [PLAY] to begin playback.
When the current time matches with a marker:
When you press [SCENE] and [PREVIOUS], the gradation includes the preceding marker; pressing
[SCENE] and [NEXT] creates a gradation including the
following marker.
fig.11-12(gra2.eps)
Marker 1
4. Hold down [SCENE] and press [REC].
The AUTOMIX indicator blinks, indicating that Auto
Mix Realtime recording is ready.
8. Operate the channel faders and master fader on
the top panel.
Auto mix data will be recorded only for those channels that are modified.
9. When the mix is finished, press [STOP].
markers will be automatically created in the area
which was played back.
If “!!! Lack of EVENT !!” Appears in the
Display
If you do a lot of recording or make numerous
edits using such functions as Track Copy, the
remaining number of events may fall below 1000.
When this happens, you will not be able to continue recording Auto Mix data in real time. Please
refer to “About Events” (p. 22). In addition, when
planning to record for an extended period with
Auto Mix, please check the remaining number of
Events frequently, as described in “Checking the
Remaining Disk Space” (p. 186).
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
If You Don’t Want to Record Fader
Settings (Mask Fader)
Making Changes to Auto Mix
(Micro Edit)
You can specify that the settings adjustable from the
top panel will not be recorded, as described in
“Recording the Mixer Settings, Method 1 (Snapshot).”
For example, this is effective when you have made
fade-in settings as in “Recording the Mixer Settings,
Method 2 (Gradation)”, and then wish to modify effect
send levels or other settings.
You can check and directly change the values for settings pertaining to all of the Auto Mix’s data.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon is displayed.
2. Press [F5 (A.mix)]. If “A.mix” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “A.mix” is displayed, and then press [F5 (A.mix)].
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon appears in the display.
2. Press [F5 (A.mix)]. If “A.mix” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “A.mix” is displayed, and then press [F5 (A.mix)].
3. Press [F2 (Micro)].
The Micro Edit screen appears in the display.
fig.11-13(micro.eps)
Setting Value
Auto Mix to be edited
(in the example, the volume level of Track 1)
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set Snap mode.
At this time, select “Mask Fader.”
Snap Mode
This selects the settings that will be recorded by the
snapshot.
All:
All settings are recorded.
MaskFader: Channel faders settings are ignored.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5. Record the Snapshot as described in “Recording
the Mixer Settings, Method 1.”
Playing Back the Auto Mix
4. Press [
].
The cursor moves to “Edit Target.” Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the Auto Mix you want to
edit.
1. Press [AUTOMIX].
The button indicator lights, indicating that the VS-1680
is in Auto Mix mode.
5. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate
the TIME/VALUE dial to edit each of the different settings values.
2. Select the channels for which you want Auto
Mix played back. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that each button indicators light, press the input
channel or track channel SELECT button or the
Master Block [EDIT] button.
* What can be edited here is the Auto Mix data. If you
want to change markers, then please refer to “Making
Fine Adjustments to Marked Locations” (p.38).
3. Press [PLAY].
Playback of Auto Mix begins.
Moving the channel faders or master fader while Auto
Mix is being played back cancels the Auto Mix for that
fader. If you stop and then start playback again, Auto
Mix will once again take effect. Alternatively, you can
temporarily disable Auto Mix during playback and
then enable it by turning it on again.
7. When you have finished editing, press [PLAY
(DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for any other Auto Mix you
wish to edit.
Chapter 11
159
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Disabling Auto Mix Only on Specified
Channels
1. Move to the point where you want to disable
Auto Mix.
2. Confirm that Auto Mix mode is on.
3. Select the channels for which you want Auto
Mix disabled. While pressing [AUTOMIX], so
that the button indicators to blink, press the input
channel or track channel SELECT button or the
Master Block [EDIT] button.
4. Hold down [SCENE] and press [CLEAR].
Auto Mix is disabled on the selected channels.
5. Press [AUTOMIX].
The button indicator light goes off.
Disabling Auto Mix on All Channels
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon is displayed.
2. Press [F5 (A.mix)]. If “A.mix” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “A.mix” is displayed, and then press [F5 (A.mix)].
3. Press [F4 (Erase)].
The Auto Mix Erase screen appears in the display.
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the erase, press
[NO].
Undoing Recordings and
Edits (Undo)
When using the VS-1680, recordings may not sound as
you intend, settings for editing may be made incorrectly, or there may be other situations where you
want to go back and try something again. In such
instances, you can restore the previous conditions at
each of the steps where something was changed. This
is referred to as the Undo function. Moreover, you
can restore conditions as they were before the last
undo. This is called the Redo function.
When using the Undo function, you will specify the
number of previous steps that will be undone. For
example, suppose that you use punch-in recording to
perform five consecutive re-recordings of the same
location. If you later decide to return to the condition
of the second recording (step 2), you would set the
Undo function to return to the condition of three steps
earlier (Undo Level 3).
fig.11-15(undolevel.eps)
Recording 5
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change
each of the settings values.
Recording 4
fig.11-14(erase.eps)
Recording 2
Undo Level 3
Recording 3
Recording 1
Time
Erase Mode
Select the auto mix data which will be erased.
Event: Only Auto Mix events will be erased.
Marker: Both markers and Auto Mix events will be
erased.
If, after executing the Undo operation, you decide to
return to the condition of step 5, execute the Redo
operation.
fig.11-16(redo.eps)
Recording 5
Redo
Recording 4
Recording 3
Erase From
Specify the first marker in the range that you want
Auto Mix erased.
Erase To
Specify the last marker in the range that you want
Auto Mix erased.
160
Recording 2
Recording 1
Time
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
However if you once again record (step 3’) after
returning to the condition of recording number 2, the
recordings 3–5 that were canceled by the Undo operation will be lost. This means that if after step 3’ you
use the Undo operation to return to the previous step,
you will return to the condition of step 2.
fig.11-16a(redo.eps)
Operations That Can Be Undone
Operations that can be undone are recording
operations, each of the Track Edit operations,
and each of the Phrase Edit operations. Check
the list below for operations that cannot be
undone.
• Song Edit operations
(Optimize/Erase/Split/Combine/etc.)
Recording 5
Recording 4
• Saves to User Effect Patches
Recording 3'
• System operations (mixer initialization/Sync
Track Recording/etc.)
Undo
Recording 2
• Utility operations (recording with Auto
Mix/Drive Initialize/etc.)
Recording 1
Time
• Storing in EZ Routing
• Stored Locators/Markers/Scenes
Recording and Editing Operations
Which Can Be Undone (Undo)
Recording or editing operations performed after creating a song are recorded together with the song data as
its operation history, and the data itself is also preserved without being erased. For example, suppose
that you perform 10 recording operations on song 1
and then create song 2. The operation history of song 2
is newly recorded from the time when song 2 was created. If you subsequently select song 1 again, the history of the 10 previous recording operations will still
be there.
The Undo function refers to the operation history of
the currently selected song, and restores the song to
the condition in which it was the specified number of
operations ago. In the case of song 1 in this example,
you will be able to cancel the 10 recording operations
that were performed. A maximum of 999 levels of
operation history may be recorded for each song.
1. Press [UNDO].
2. ”Level” appears in the display. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of previous steps the conditions of which you want to
have restored.
When you execute Undo, the time stamp for whatever
time you are returning to is displayed on the screen.
Have a look.
fig.11-17(und_msg.eps)
Undo Level
Time Stamp
3. Press [F4 (Exec)] to execute Undo.
The button indicator lights. If you want to cancel the
Undo, press [F6 (EXIT)].
Canceling the Last-Performed Undo
(Redo)
1. While the UNDO indicator is lit, hold down
[SHIFT] and press [UNDO].
2. ”Cancel the last UNDO?” appears in the display.
Press [F4 (Exec].
The button indicator light goes off. If you wish to cancel, press [(F6 (EXIT)].
161
Chapter 11
The Redo function can be executed when the UNDO
indicator is lit. When the song data is saved, for example by your doing Song Store or selecting another
song, the UNDO indicator will go out, indicating that
the Undo function will no longer be available.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Cancelling Only the Very LastPerformed Operation
If you most frequently use the Undo function to undo
just the previously performed recording/editing operation (i.e., undo level 1), you may prefer not to be
bothered with the messages that appear when the
[UNDO] button is pressed. In this case, make the following settings so that just the previous operation will
be undone immediately when the [UNDO] button is
pressed.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “UNDO message.” If “UNDO message”
does not appear, then press [F1 (Prm1)].
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change the values for each of the settings. For now select “Off.”
UNDO message
This selects whether or not the Undo confirmation
message is displayed.
On: The message is displayed, asking how many levels you want to undo.
Off: The message is not displayed, and only the
immediately preceding operation is undone.
Listening Only to a Specific
Channel (Solo/Mute)
When making equalizer adjustments or checking the
balance during mixdown, it is often desirable to be
able to monitor the sound of one specific channel.
Although it would be possible to individually mute
each of the channels that you didn’t want to hear with
STATUS buttons, this is inconvenient. In such cases,
you can monitor only a specific channel and mute all
the other channels. This is called the Solo function. To
use the Solo function, use the following procedure.
1. Hold down [SOLO (EDIT)].
This turns the Solo function on; the SELECT button
indicators for all input or track channels are all blink.
In the present status, all input or track channels are
monitored.
* By holding down [SOLO (EDIT)], you can set a 0.3–2.0second range (p. 190).
2. While holding down [SOLO (EDIT)], press the
SELECT button for the input or track channel you
wish to monitor.
Only that button indicator stays blink, and only that
channel is now monitored. You can now release the
buttons. At this time you can make adjustments to
fader, balance, equalizer, effects, and other settings.
fig.11-18(solo.eps)
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
3. Monitor and Mute alternate each time you press
[SOLO (EDIT)] and SELECT buttons.
Furthermore, you can monitor two or more channels. However, channels which were muted
before the Solo function was turned on cannot be
monitored even when their SELECT buttons are
pressed. Additionally, when you are monitoring
just one channel, pressing the SELECT button of
that channel allows you to then monitor all channels.
4. Hold down [CLEAR] and press [SOLO (EDIT)]
allows you to monitor all channels.
162
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Selecting the Channels to be Monitored
You can also select which channels to monitor
through each channel’s Edit screen. Use the following procedure.
3-1. Press the SELECT button for the input or
track channels you wish to monitor.
3-2. Press [F3 (SOLO)]. If “SOLO” does not
appear in [F3], first press [PAGE] until
“SOLO” is displayed, and then press [F3
(SOLO)].
3-3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
You can monitor the channels for which you have
selected “On.”
3-4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
If, in contrast to the Solo function, you wish to mute
only specific channels, use the following procedure.
1. Hold down [MUTE (FADER)].
This turns the Mute function on; the SELECT button
indicators for all input or track channels are all blink.
In the present status, all input or track channels are
monitored.
* By holding down [MUTE (FADER)], you can set a
0.3–2.0-second range (p. 190).
2. While holding down [MUTE (FADER)], press the
SELECT button for the input or track channel you
wish to mute.
The button indicator goes off, and only that channel is
now muted.
fig.11-19(mute.eps)
About Solo Mode
If you press [SOLO (MASTER)] while holding
[SHIFT], SOLO Mode turns on. Operation is as follows.
1. Press [SOLO (MASTER)] while holding [SHIFT].
"---SOLO MODE---" blinks in the display and indicates
SOLO Mode is on. At the same time, indicators of the
SELECT buttons for input and track channels blink.
With this status, every channel can be monitored.
2. Press any of channel select buttons you wish to
monitor.
Indicator of the button flashes and you can monitor
only this channel. Fader, balance, equalizer, effects
and so on are effective on each channel.
3. Everytime you press the SELECT button, monitor
and mute status switch. Only when holding
[AUTOMIX], you can check the automix status of
each channel.
4. To turn the SOLO Mode off and go back to PLAY
condition, press [SOLO (MASTER)] again while
holding [SHIFT].
3. Monitor and Mute alternate each time you press
[MUTE (FADER)] and SELECT button. You can
also mute two or more channels.
4. Hold down [CLEAR] and press [MUTE (FADER)]
allows you to monitor all channels.
Selecting the Channels to be Muted
You can also select which channels to mute
through each channel’s Edit screen. Use the following procedure.
2-1. Press the SELECT button for the input or
track channels you wish to mute.
2-2. Press [F4 (Mute)]. If “Mute” does not appear
in [F4], first press [PAGE] until “Mute” is
displayed, and then press [F4 (Mute)].
Chapter 11
2-3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
You can mute the channels for which you have
selected “On.”
2-4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
163
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Simultaneously Adjusting a
Stereo Source (Stereo Link)
When recording or playing back a stereo source, normal mixer operations require you to control the left
and right channels separately, which can make it
inconvenient to adjust equalizer, effects, and other settings. In such cases, you can have the settings for a
pair of channels, with the exception of the fader and
pan settings, linked so that they adjusted in the same
way. This is called the Stereo Link.
When Stereo Link is on, adjacent odd- and even-numbered channels are paired as shown below. The settings of each odd-numbered channel will be the same
as the settings of the corresponding even-numbered
channel. When the setting of one channel are modified, the settings of the paired channel will change in
the same way.
fig.11-20(link.eps)
Track 1
2
Adjusting the Faders
When Stereo Link is on, the balance of both channels is
preserved, and the total volume level controlled with
fader for the odd-numbered channel. If you want the
channel faders to act independently, use the following
procedure.
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track
channels for which you wish to adjust that channel’s fader.
2. Press [F5 (Fader)]. If “Fader” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “Fader” is displayed,
and then press [F5 (Fader)].
3. Press [F6 (PRM.V)].
The values of each fader appears in the display.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each setting.
fig.11-21(lk_fd.eps)
channel
Track 3
4
Track 5
6
Track 7
8
Track 9
10
Track 11
12
Even-Numbered Channel Level
Total Level
Odd-Numbered Channel Level
Track 13
14
Track 15
16
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track
channels for which you wish to have Stereo Link
turned on.
2. Press [F1 (Link)]. If “Link” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “Link” is displayed,
and then press [F1 (Link)].
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For now, select
“On.”
Link (Stereo Link)
This turns the Stereo Link function on and off.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
164
(Total Level)
With the balance of both channels preserved, this
adjusts the total volume level (0–127). Use the fader
for the odd-numbered channel for adjusting this.
(Odd-Numbered Channel Level)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) of the odd-numbered (left) channel.
(Even-Numbered Channel Level)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) of the even-numbered (right) channel.
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Adjusting the Pan
When Stereo Link is on, this adjusts the total left-right
balance while preserving the pan settings for both
channels. If you want to adjust the pan for each channel independently, use the following procedure.
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track
channels whose pan settings you wish to adjust.
2. Press [F1 (Pan)]. If “Pan” does not appear in [F1],
first press [PAGE] until “Pan” is displayed, and
then press [F1 (Pan)].
3. Press [F6 (PRM.V)].
Each of the pan settings appears in the display.
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
each setting.
fig.11-22(lk_pan.eps)
Channel
Even-Numbered Channel Pan
Total Balance
Odd-Numbered Channel Pan
(Pan Switch)
When this is set to “On,” the source from each input
channel, rather than being assigned to the RECORDING bus, is sent directly to the MIX bus. Set this to
“On” when, for example, you simply want to mix the
inputs without recording them. However, the sources
that are assigned to the RECORDING bus are disabled.
(Odd-Numbered Channel Pan)
This adjusts the pan (L63–0–R63) of the odd-numbered
(left) channel.
Even-Numbered Channel Settings
When you create a new song using the DIGITAL
input channels (D), or track channels 9/10, 11/12,
13/14, or 15/16, Stereo Link is already set to
“On.” By turning off Stereo Link on these channels, you can make adjustment to each channel
independently.
At this point, pressing [DIGITAL] or the track
channel SELECT button for the desired track
allows you to make settings alternately to the
odd- and even-numbered channels.
Mixing In a Stereo Source
(Stereo In)
You can assign input signals from the INPUT jacks or
DIGITAL IN connector to the MIX bus or RECORDING bus, without having them pass through the input
mixer. You can also monitor these signals without
having them pass through the input mixer or output
mixer. This is referred to as Stereo In. This can be convenient when, for example, the same input source features sounds with effects and sounds without effects
recorded on separate tracks. Use the following procedure for Stereo In.
1. Press the input channel’s [ST IN].
The Stereo In/Effect Return screen appears in the display.
2. Press [F1 (St In)].
3. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate
the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust each of the settings values.
fig.11-23(st_in.eps)
Stereo In Select
Level
Chapter 11
(Total Balance)
With the balance between both channels preserved,
this adjusts the total left-right balance (L63–0–R63).
5. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Balance
(Even-Numbered Channel Pan)
This adjusts the pan (L63–0–R63) of the even-numbered (right) channel.
165
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
StereoIn Select
This selects the external input connector or jack using
Stereo In.
Off:
Stereo In is not used.
Input 1/2: Selects INPUT jacks 1/2 for use with Stereo
In.
Input 3/4: Selects INPUT jacks 3/4 for use with Stereo
In.
Input 5/6: Selects INPUT jacks 5/6 for use with Stereo
In.
Input 7/8: Selects INPUT jacks 7/8 for use with Stereo
In.
Digital: Selects the DIGITAL IN connector (coaxial
or optical) for use with Stereo In.
(Level)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) for Stereo In.
(Balance)
This adjusts the balance (L63–0–R63) for Stereo In.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Return to Play condition. The volume level of Stereo
In can be adjusted directly with the channel faders (ST
IN) when the input mixer is in effect (when the IN
indicators are lit).
* By holding down [ST IN] and pressing the input channel
SELECT button, you can directly specify the input jack or
connector to be used with Stereo In.
Changing the Pitch During
Playback (Vari-Pitch)
When recording an ensemble performance, all the
instruments normally tune to an instrument such as an
acoustic piano whose tuning cannot easily be changed.
However, it is sometimes necessary to record (overdub) an acoustic piano onto an existing recording. In
this case, if the pitch of the recording is different than
that of the acoustic piano, something must be done
about it.
In such cases, by changing the playback speed of the
recorder, you can change the pitch of the performance
being played back to match the pitch of the instrument
you want to record. This is referred to as the VariPitch function. Vari-Pitch can be used not only to
compensate for pitch differences, but can also be used
when you want to purposely produce special effects.
To use the Vari-Pitch function, use the following procedure.
1. Press [VARI PITCH].
The button indicator lights, indicating that the VariPitch function is on.
2. Press [VARI PITCH] while holding down
[SHIFT].
The current sample rate appears in the display.
fig.11-23a(vari.eps)
3. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change the pitch
of the playback. Check the playback to see how
the pitch actually sounds.
5. When you have finished making the settings,
press [F6 (EXIT)].
Return to Play condition. Now, Vari-Pitch turns on
and off each time [VARI PITCH] is pressed.
166
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Directly Inputting
Alphanumeric Characters
Sounding the Metronome
Not only can you use the normal process of rotating
the TIME/VALUE dial to enter text, but you can also
use the buttons on the top panel like an ASCII keyboard, for example when editing markers or locators
(using numerals), or changing song and phrase names
(using the alphabet).
Directly Entering Numerals
(Numeric Keys)
1. Press [NUMERICS/ASCII].
The button indicator lights.
2. Press the LOCATOR/SCENE button.
The buttons can be used to enter numerals as indicated below.
* Depend on parameters (effect etc.), you can enter “-” (a
minus sign) by pressing [0] twice.
fig.11-24(tenkey.eps)
1
2
3
9
0
4
5
6
7
8
3. After you have finished entering the numbers,
press [ENTER (YES)].
This sets the numbers.
Directly Entering Letters of the Alphabet
1. Press [NUMERICS/ASCII].
The button indicator lights.
2. Press the input or track channel SELECT buttons
or the track STATUS buttons.
The buttons can be used to enter letters of the alphabet
as indicated below.
fig.11-25(ascii.eps)
No matter how accurately one tries to play, listening
to the recording play back sometimes reveals inaccuracies in rhythm or tempo. The VS-1680 provides a
metronome (click track) that can be sounded at a specified tempo. By listening to the metronome as you play
your instrument, you will be able to record your performance with more accurate timing. At the same
time, since this allows you to specify segments for
song editing by measure and beat, you can edit songs
in a more musical way.
The metronome tempo can be controlled by the
Tempo Map or Sync Track MIDI Clock. When using
this feature, set up the Tempo Map (p. 133) or Sync
Track (p. 131) beforehand. When you create a new
song, the Tempo Map default settings include a 4/4
rhythm and tempo of 120.
Using the Metronome During Recording
The metronome will begin sounding when
recording or playback begins. However you may
sometimes wish to hear a count-in on the
metronome to help you catch the tempo before
recording begins. In such cases, you can set aside
the first few measures of the recording to be only
for the count-in, and not record on those measures.
The metronome sound is only for the purpose of
helping you keep your playing in time.
1. The Metronome is output from the MONITOR
jacks. Connect your playback audio equipment to
the MONITOR jacks.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the display.
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.11-25a(sync/tempo.eps)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
-
Space
Chapter 11
A
3. After you have finished entering the letters, press
[ENTER (YES)].
This sets the text.
167
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Sync Gen. (Generator)
This selects the MIDI Clock on which the Metronome
will be based. Select “MIDIclk” if you wish to use the
Tempo Map, and “SyncTr” if you are going to use
Sync Track.
Off:
The MIDI Clock is not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted (the
metronome does not sound).
MIDIclk: The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
SyncTr: The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
Using an External MIDI Sound Source
to Play the Metronome
A MIDI sound source can be used to play the
metronome with a sound of your choosing. To do this,
use the following procedure.
1. Connect the VS-1680 and the MIDI sound generator as shown below.
fig.11-27(mt_midi.eps)
4. Press [EXIT].
The System menu icon appears in the display.
5. Press [F5 (METRO)].
fig.11-26(metro.eps)
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
and set each of the values.
Metronome Out
This selects how the metronome is output. For now,
select “INT.”
Selecting “Off” prevents you from making any settings related to the Metronome.
Off:
The metronome sound is not output.
INT:
The metronome sound is output from the
MONITOR jacks.
MIDI: The metronome signal is transmitted via the
MIDI OUT connector.
Metro Level (Metronome Level)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) of the
metronome sound.
Metronome Mode
This is for selecting when the metronome sound is
played.
Rec Only: The metronome sounds only during
recording.
Rec&Play: The metronome sounds during both
recording and playback.
7. This completes the metronome settings. Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.
168
MIDI IN
VOLUME
MIDI IN B
PHONES
MIDI Sound Generator
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “MIDI Thru,” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. Here, select “Out.”
Out: MIDI messages are sent from the VS-1680. Select
this when sending metronome sound note messages or mixer parameter settings (Control
Change messages or Exclusive messages).
Thru: This sends MIDI messages received via the
MIDI IN connector without change.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
5. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
The Sync/Tempo screen appears in the display.
fig.11-28(sync/tempo.eps)
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Sync Gen.,” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Sync Gen. (Generator)
This selects the MIDI Clock on which the Metronome
will be based. Select “MIDIclk” if you wish to use the
Tempo Map, and “SyncTr” if you are going to use
Sync Track.
Off:
The MIDI Clock is not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted (the
metronome does not sound).
MIDIclk: The Tempo Map MIDI Clock is transmitted.
SyncTr: The Sync Track MIDI Clock is transmitted.
7. Press [EXIT].
The System menu icon appears in the display.
8. Press [F5 (METRO)].
fig.11-29(mt_out.eps)
Metronome Mode
This is for selecting when the metronome sound is
played.
Rec Only:
The metronome sounds only during
recording.
Rec&Play:
The metronome sounds during both
recording and playback.
MID:Acc.Note (Accent Note)
This sets note numbers (C0–G9) for the downbeat.
When the Drum set is playing, this selects specific percussion sounds.
MID:Nrm.Note (Normal Note)
This sets note numbers (C0–G9) for the upbeats. When
the Drum set is playing, this selects specific percussion
sounds.
MID:MetroCh (Metronome Channel)
This sets the MIDI channel (1–16) for transmitting
Metronome sound Note Messages.
MID:Acc.Velo (Accent Velocity)
This sets the velocity (1–127) for the downbeat.
MID:Nrm.Velo (Normal Velocity)
This sets the velocity (1–127) for the upbeats.
10. This completes the settings for sounding the
metronome with an external MIDI device. Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
When the Disk Has Little
Remaining Space
Deleting Only Unneeded Performance
Data (Song Optimize)
9. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust
and set each of the values.
169
Chapter 11
Metronome Out
This selects how the metronome is output. At this
point, select “MIDI.”
Selecting “Off” prevents you from making any settings related to the Metronome.
Off:
The metronome sound is not output.
INT:
The metronome sound is output from the
MONITOR jacks.
MIDI: The metronome signal is transmitted via the
MIDI OUT connector.
When operations such as overdubbing and
Punch-In Recording are repeated, the old data
will remain in the disk drive. In some cases,
significant amounts of memory can be occupied by
this unnecessary data, decreasing the available space
on the current drive, and shortening the length of time
available for recording.
Deleting this unnecessary data from the disk drive and
thus freeing up available disk space on the drive is
referred to as Song Optimize. This operation cannot
be undone with the Undo function.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
The Optimize operation searches all V-tracks on the
target song, and when playing back those V-tracks,
erases the phrases that cannot be heard. For example, even if you execute the Optimize with the V-track
1 of Track 1 selected, the phrases that are heard when
V-tracks 2–16 are selected for playback are not deleted.
fig.11-30(opt.eps)
Track 1
Deleting One Song of Performance
Data (Song Erase)
When you are making a master tape or backing up songs to a Zip disk, this operation
deletes song data that has become unnecessary. This operation cannot be undone with the Undo
function.
1. Select the drive contains the song you want to
erase as the current drive.
V-Track 1
V-Track 2
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
V-Track 3
3. Press [F6 (Erase)]. If “Erase” does not appear in
[F6], first press [PAGE] until “Erase” is displayed,
and then press [F6 (Erase)].
Phrases erased in the Optimize operation
1. Select the song you want to optimize as the current song.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor
to the song you want to erase, then press [F3
(MARK)].
A mark is placed at the song. Pressing [F3 (MARK)]
alternately places or deletes the mark. When [F2
(ALL)] is pressed, you can place or remove all marks
simultaneously.
fig.11-31(sg_erase.eps)
3. Press [F5 (OPTIM)]. If “OPTIM” does not appear
in [F5], first press [PAGE] until “OPTIM” is displayed, and then press [F5 (OPTIM)].
4. ”Song Optimize, Execute?” (Execute Song
Optimize?) appears in the display. Press [F4
(EXEC)]. If you wish to cancel Song Optimize, the
press [F6 (EXIT)].
5. A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
press [NO].
6. When the optimize is finished, return to Play condition.
* Be aware that, depending on conditions, it may take some
time for the Optimize operation to be completed. This is
not a malfunction. Do not turn the power off until the
Optimize operation is completed.
6. Press [F4 (Exec)].
7. A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
then press [NO].
8. If the song you are erasing is not the current song,
“STORE Current?” then appears in the display.
9. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES];
if not, then press [NO]. If you have selected a
demo song, then press [NO].
10. When the song has been erased, return to Play
condition.
170
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Changing the Name of
Performance Data (Song Name)
You can change the names of your newly created songs and add comments that explain
simply what kind of songs they are.
1. Make the song whose name you want to change
the current song.
2. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
3. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon appears in the display.
4. Press [F3 (NAME)]. If “NAME” does not appear
in [F3], first press [PAGE] until “NAME” is displayed, and then press [F3 (NAME)].
5. If you want to change the name, press [F1
(Name)]; if you want to add a comment to the
song, press [F2 (Comnt)].
At this time, you can use the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the icons (graphic images).
6. Use [
], [
], [
], and [
] or rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to enter the song name or
comment.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown below.
8. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
9. Press [YES].
The song is saved.
10. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Rearranging the Order of
Song Data (Song Arrange)
You can move the Markers that are placed in
songs to rearrange the order of the song data,
and so create new Playlists. This operation
can be undone with the Undo function.
fig.11-33(sg_arg.eps)
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 3 Marker 4
A
B
B
C
C
A
1. Follow the procedure as described in “Using
Markers” (p. 38), preset the mark points so that
the songs are in the order you want to change to.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
3. Press [F6 (Arang)]. If “Arang” does not appear in
[F6], first press [PAGE] until “Arang” is displayed, and then press [F6 (Arang)].
fig.11-34(arrange.eps)
[F1 (Hist)]:
[F4 (Ins)]:
[F5 (Write)]:
[F6 (EXIT)]:
7. When you have finished writing the song name or
comments, press [F5 (Write)].
Chapter 11
[F2 (Clr)]:
[F3 (Del)]:
Pressing this button takes you through
a register of the last 20 song names
entered, one at a time.
Clears all characters in the window.
Deletes the character where the cursor
is positioned.
Inserts a space where the cursor is
positioned.
Confirms the song name and exits the
screen
Exits the screen without accepting the
song name.
4. Press [
], [
], [
cursor to “Arrange.”
], and [
] to move the
5. First, specify the segment comprising the beginning. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to designate
marker numbers at the start and end positions,
and press [ENTER (YES)].
171
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
6. This sets you up to specify the next segment.
Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Repeat Step 5 to designate the following
segment in the same manner as the first.
You can arrange up to a maximum of 99 separate segments. At this time, the function buttons work as
shown below.
[F1 (NEW)]: Specify the next segment.
[F2 (Clr)]:
Clears the segment designation where
the cursor is positioned.
[F3 (Del)]:
Deletes the segment where the cursor
is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a segment designation where
the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Exec)]: Executes Song Arrange.
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the Song Arrange screen.
7. When all of the segments are in order, press [
to move the cursor to “Destination Time.”
10. A confirmation message appears in the display.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
then press [NO].
11. When Song Arrange is executed, return to Play
condition.
Dividing Performance Data
Into Two Parts (Song Split)
]
fig.11-34a(arrange2.eps)
You can copy only certain tracks that you
have selected from all the V-tracks and create
on the current drive a new song that has only
those tracks copied onto it. This does not alter the current song.
New songs take on all settings (markers, locators,
Auto Mix settings, Tempo Maps, sync tracks, system
settings, etc.) except for the performance data, and a
song name is automatically given with the last character changed in the original song’s name.
Song Split cannot be carried out if there is not sufficient hard disk space. Furthermore, Song Split cannot
be undone using the Undo procedure.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
The Song menu icon is displayed.
2. Press [F1 (Split)]. If “Split” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “Split” is displayed,
and then press [F1 (Split)].
8. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Use the
TIME/VALUE dial to set the time location at
which the newly created Playlist is to begin.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F2 (NOW)]:
Enters the current time where the cursor is positioned.
[F3 (JUMP)]: Moves the current time where the cursor is positioned.
[F4 (Arrg)]:
Moves the cursor to “Arrange.”
[F5 (Exec)]:
Executes Song Arrange.
[F6 (EXIT)]:
Exits the Song Arrange screen.
* If the time for the new Playlist to begin is set at a point
earlier than the previous song end, the original Playlist
(performance data) is overwritten. Additionally, if the
time for the new Playlist to begin is set after the last mark
point of the original song, a mark point is set at the beginning of the new Playlist.
9. Press [F5 (Exec)].
172
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] or rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor to the
track you want to copy, and press [F3 (MARK)] or
[YES].
The track containing the mark is copied.
fig.11-35(split.eps)
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
4. You can check the track name by pressing [F1
(SelTr)].
If you are going to set a mark at this time, the press [F1
(Back)].
fig.11-36(sel_tr.eps)
Setting Markers
When the cursor is moved to “Track,” you can
have marks simultaneously set to or deleted from
all selected tracks. For example, if you move the
cursor to “Track 1” and press [F3 (MARK)],
marks are set in V-tracks 1–16 on Track 1.
By moving the cursor to “V-Track,” you can then
simultaneously set marks on the same number Vtrack on all the tracks. For example, if you move
the cursor to “V-Track 1” and press [F3 (MARK)],
marks are set on V-Track 1 of Tracks 1–16.
By pressing [F2 (ALL)], you can place and
remove marks from all of the tracks simultaneously.
Connecting Performance
Data (Song Combine)
All V-tracks from the other song on the current drive are moved to the current song, and
that song is deleted. Any performance data
already existing in the current song is overwritten by
the performance data that is being move to the song.
When you don’t want to make any changes to the
move source or move destination songs, first back up
the song using Song Copy or the DAT Backup procedure.
You can perform Song Combine with any songs that
have the same sample rate and recording mode.
However, what is copied to the current song is performance data (sound data) and the information that
designates the tracks to which that performance
data is recorded. Other settings such as those concerning markers, locators, automix, tempo map, sync
track or system are lost.
1. First, select the song you want to be the move destination as the current song.
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F1 (SONG)].
3. Press [F2 (Combn)]. If “Combn” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “Combn” is displayed, and then press [F2 (Combn)].
fig.11-37(sg_cbn.eps)
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
then press [NO].
8. When Song Split is executed, return to Play condition.
4. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to move the cursor
to the move source songs and press [F3 (MARK)].
The songs with the marks are combined.
By pressing [F1 (SelSg)], you can have a list of the
songs displayed. At this time, rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the song, and press [F1
(Back)].
fig.11-39(cb_sel_sg.eps)
173
Chapter 11
7. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to execute
Song Split after saving the current song, press
[YES]; if not, then press [NO].
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Adjusting the Levels for Each
Track
You can adjust the volume level of each input and
track channel without using the channel faders. You
can raise the volume when playing back tracks that
were recorded at low levels, avoid distorted sound
that may occur when adjusting the channel equalizers,
and be able to operate with the channel faders near 0
dB. Use the following procedure.
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track
channels whose volume levels you wish to adjust.
5. Press [F4 (Exec)].
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen.
Press [YES]. If you wish to cancel the procedure,
then press [NO].
2. Press [F2 (ATT)]. If “ATT” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “ATT” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (ATT)].
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.11-40(att.eps)
7. ”STORE Current?” (Store the current song?)
appears in the display. If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not, then press [NO].
8. When Song Combine is executed, return to Play
condition.
Attenuation
ATT (Attenuation)
Adjusts the volume level (-42–6 dB) of each channel’s
digital signal.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
When Using Balanced Inputs
The VS-1680 features balanced (TRS) INPUT jacks,
each one configure as follows.
fig.11-41(trs.eps)
However, some audio devices have the opposite HOT
(TIP) and COLD (RING) configuration. Using such
equipment as is may result in poor sound placement,
disintegration of the left-right balance, and a loss of
the separation between left and right sounds when
using stereo inputs. In such instances, you need to
switch the phase of each channel.
1. Press the SELECT button for the input or track
channels whose phase you wish to switch.
2. Press [F3(Phase)]. If “Phase” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “Phase” is displayed,
and then press [F3 (Phase)].
174
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
3. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
Determining Output
Phase
This selects the phase (NRM, INV) for each channel.
Usually, “NRM” is selected.
NRM: Normal phase (same phase as the input)
INV:
Inverted phase (opposite phase)
The VS-1680 features eight analog output jacks and
two digital connectors, each of which can have various
signals assigned to it. Set the output for each output
jacks or connectors using the following procedure.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
MONITOR Jacks
1. Press [MASTER].
The Master Block is displayed.
When Phase Mismatch is a Problem
The situations shown below will result in problems. In such cases, select “INV.” When using a
number of pieces of equipment, it is recommended that you prearrange the HOT and COLD leads
for all equipment.
2. Determine what is to be output from the MONITOR jacks. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to
move the cursor to the “OUTPUT (MON),” and
rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.11-44a(mon2.eps)
fig.11-42(inv.eps)
Mixer
Amplifier
Speaker
The third
HOT
The third
HOT
The second
HOT
When Phase Mismatch is Not a Problem
The situations shown below will not result in
problems. In such cases, select “NRM.”
fig.11-43(nrm.eps)
Mixer
The third
HOT
Amplifier
Speaker
The second
HOT
The second
HOT
Mixer
Equalizer
Amplifier
The third
HOT
The second
HOT
The third
HOT
Speaker
175
Chapter 11
Mon (Monitor)
This selects what sounds are heard through the MONITOR jacks.
MST:
Same sound as is heard from the
MASTER jacks (MIX bus).
EFX1:
The sounds assigned to the (EFX1)
EFFECT bus.
EFX2:
The sounds assigned to the (EFX2)
EFFECTS bus.
AUX1/EFX3: Sounds assigned to the AUX1 bus.
With EFFECT B installed, the sounds
are those assigned to the (EFX3)
EFFECT bus.
AUX2/EFX4: Sounds assigned to the AUX2 bus.
With EFFECT B installed, the sounds
are those assigned to the (EFX4)
EFFECT bus.
AUX3/AUX:
Sounds assigned to the AUX3 bus.
With EFFECT B installed, the sounds
are those assigned to the AUX bus.
REC:
All sounds assigned to the RECORDING bus.
ST IN:
Sounds assigned to Stereo In.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
3. Press [F2 (Mon)]. If “Mon” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “Mon” is displayed,
and then press [F2 (Mon)].
fig.11-44(mon.eps)
Level
Balance
(Level)
This adjusts the volume level (0–127) for the MONITOR jack. This is adjusted with the MONITOR knob
on the top panel.
(Balance)
This adjusts the left-right balance (L63–0–R63) for the
MONITOR jacks.
AUX1/EFX3: Sounds assigned to the AUX 1 bus. With
EFFECT B installed, the sounds are
those assigned to the (EFX3) EFFECT
bus.
AUX2/EFX4: Sounds assigned to the AUX2 bus. With
EFFECT B installed, the sounds are
those assigned to the (EFX4) EFFECT
bus.
AUX3/AUX: Sounds assigned to the AUX3 bus. With
EFFECT B installed, the sounds are
those assigned to the AUX bus.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Return to Play condition.
* The AUX B jacks are set in the same way. Press [F4
(AUX.B)] at Step 2.
DIGITAL OUT Connectors
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]
Return to Play condition.
1. Press [MASTER].
The Master Block is displayed.
AUX Jacks
2. Press [F5 (DOUT1)]. If “DOUT1” does not appear
in [F5], first press [PAGE] until “DOUT1” is displayed, and then press [F5 (DOUT1)].
1. Press [MASTER].
The Master Block is displayed.
2. Press [F3 (AUX.A)]. If “AUX.A” does not appear
in [F3], first press [PAGE] until “AUX.A” is displayed, and then press [F3 (AUX.A)].
3. Determine what is to be output from the DIGITAL OUT connectors by rotating the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.11-46(digi.eps)
3. Determine what is to be output from the AUX
jacks by rotating the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.11-45(aux.eps)
AUX A
This selects what sounds are heard through the AUX
A jacks.
EFX1:
The sounds assigned to the (EFX1)
EFFECT bus.
EFX2:
The sounds assigned to the (EFX2)
EFFECT bus.
176
DOUT1 (DIGITAL OUT1)
This selects what sounds are heard through the DIGITAL OUT1 (coaxial) connector.
MST:
Same sound as is heard from the MASTER jacks (MIX bus).
MON:
Same sound as is heard from the MONITOR jacks.
EFX1:
The sounds assigned to the (EFX1)
EFFECT bus.
EFX2:
The sounds assigned to the (EFX2)
EFFECT bus.
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
AUX1/EFX3: Sounds assigned to the AUX1 bus. With
EFFECT B installed, the sounds are
those assigned to the (EFX3) EFFECT
bus.
AUX2/EFX4: Sounds assigned to the AUX2 bus. With
EFFECT B installed, the sounds are
those assigned to the (EFX4) EFFECT
bus.
AUX3/AUX: Sounds assigned to the AUX3 bus. With
EFFECT B installed, the sounds are
those assigned to the AUX bus.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
* The DIGITAL OUT2 (optical) connector is set in the
same way. Press [F6 (DOUT2)] at Step 2.
9–16:
Track 1: MASTER jack (L)
Track 2: MASTER jack (R)
Track 3: AUX A jack (L)
Track 4: AUX A jack (R)
Track 5: AUX B jack (L)
Track 6: AUX B jack (R)
Track 7: MONITOR jack (L)
Track 8: MONITOR jack (R)
The sounds from Tracks 9/10–15/16 are output from the following jacks. In this case, the
settings for the MONITOR and AUX jacks
are not in effect. The sounds from Tracks 15L
and 16R are output from the PHONES jack.
Additionally, the sounds output from the
DIGITAL OUT connectors are specified in
the Master Block (p. 176).
fig (09-16.eps)
DIRECT OUT
The sounds from each of the Tracks 1–8 or Tracks
9/10–15/16 are output from separate analog jacks.
1. Press [MASTER]. The Master Block is displayed.
2. Press [F5 (DIR)]. If “DIR” does not appear in [F5],
first press [PAGE] until “DIR” is displayed, and
then press [F5 (DIR)].
fig (dir_out.eps)
DIR OUT (DIRECT OUT)
Select Tracks to be assigned as Direct Out.
Off:
Direct Out is not used.
1–8:
The sounds from Tracks 1–8 are output from
the following jacks. In this case, the settings
for the MONITOR and AUX jacks are not in
effect. The sounds from Tracks 7 and 8 are
output from the PHONES jack. Additionally,
the sounds output from the DIGITAL OUT
connectors are specified in the Master Block
(p. 176).
Track 9L:
Track 10R:
Track 11L:
Track 12R:
Track 13L:
Track 14R:
Track 15L:
Track 16R:
MASTER jack (L)
MASTER jack (R)
AUX A jack (L)
AUX A jack (R)
AUX B jack (L)
AUX B jack (R)
MONITOR jack (L)
MONITOR jack (R)
3. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
fig (01-08.eps)
Chapter 11
177
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
Confirming That a Drive is
Not Damaged (Drive Check)
You can check the drive you are using to
make sure it can be read correctly. This is
referred to as Drive Check.
This provides a way to determine whether a failure
during Song Copy (p. 113) or DAT Backup (p. 141) is
due to a problem in the song itself that was saved on
disk, whether the problem is with the connections, or
if there is a problem of some other kind.
If data cannot be read correctly, the display will indicate the song in which the error occurred.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F6 (UTILITY)].
The Utility menu icon is displayed.
2. Press [F5 (DrChk)]. If “DrChk” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “DrChk” is displayed, and then press [F5 (DrChk)].
A list of currently connected drives appears in the display.
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Select the drive you wish to check.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
[F3 (Info)]: Displays information about the drive
[F4 (Exec)]: Executes the Drive Check
[F5 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen.
fig.11-48(info.eps)
7. Drive Check is the executed. Progress of the operation is shown in the display. Do not turn off the
power until the operation is completed.
To Cancel the Drive Check
You can use the following procedure to cancel the
Drive Check.
1. Press [EXIT (NO)].
“Cancel?” appears in the display.
2. Press [YES].
Drive Check is cancelled.
8. When Drive Check is completed, the display
screen appears as shown below.
If the display indicates “No Err”
9-1. The entire disk could be read correctly. Press
[YES].
Return to Play condition.
If the display indicates “___ Err”
The underlines portion will display the number of
times that a read error occurred. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
The display will indicate “Err” for locations where an
error was found. Locations for which “OK” was displayed have no problems.
ResultList (Drive check results)
System:
Location where basic data used by the
VS-1680 for recording and playback is
stored
Song List:
Location where the saved songs are
managed
InitSong 001:
InitSong 002: Each song (in actual use, the song
name is displayed)
:
InitSong 200:
4. When you have selected the drive you wish to
check, press [F4 (Exec)].
5. A confirmation message ask you that you want to
proceed with the Drive Check appears in the display. Press [YES].
6. ”STORE Current?” appears in the display. If you
wish to save the current song, press [YES]; if not,
then press [NO]. If you have selected a demo
song, then press [NO].
178
ClusterInfo. (Cluster information)
Total:
Number of clusters on the entire disk
Defect:
Number of clusters tagged as unusable
memory
Used:
Number of clusters currently being used
Free:
Number of clusters currently not being
used
X-LinkErr: Number of cross-linked clusters
LooseArea: Number of clusters whose links are lost
IllegalDIR: Number of directories with incorrect content
Chapter 11 Other Convenient Functions
ReadError: Number of read errors detected by this
operation
Clusters
These are the smallest unit of memory that the
VS-1680 uses to manage data on a disk drive. The
smallest physical units on a disk drive are called
either sectors or blocks, and depending on the
device, the size that is handled can be selected.
For example, the VS-1680 is designed to use disks
with 512 bytes/sector. When the VS-1680 manages song data, it handles 64 sectors as a single
unit (cluster). This means that 512 (bytes) x 64
(sectors) = 32768 bytes (32 kilobytes) is one cluster.
Cross Link
This is an error in which a cluster is detected as
being included in two or more songs. In such a
case, a completely different song may be heard in
the middle of a song. Such an error condition is
referred to as a cross link.
Loose Areas
An error in which clusters not included in any
song are detected as containing valid data. In this
case, the VS-1680 will not store data in those clusters. A situation which causes this error to occur
is called a loose area.
* This procedure does not correct the disk error. All error
locations will be erased. This means that depending on the
location in which the error occurred, a take that was
recorded may no longer be playable, auto mix data may be
lost, or even the entire song itself may be erased. If the
error has occurred in the system or song list, the probability of this danger is especially high.
9-2. Press [ENTER (YES)].
A confirmation message appears on the screen.
9-3. The message “You’ll Lose Data” will appears in
the display. Press [YES].
The Recover operation is executed. If you want to cancel the operation, press [NO].
9-4. When the recovery is finished, the results are
shown on the display screen. Songs that have
been partially altered are indicated by “Adj”;
deleted songs are indicated by “Del.” Songs that
have not been changed are not indicated. Please
check the display.
RecoverResult (Recovery result)
InitSong 001:
InitSong 003: Modified songs (in actual operation,
the song name)
:
InitSong 200:
ClusterInfo. (Cluster information)
Total:
Number of clusters on the entire disk
Defect: Number of clusters marked as unusable
memory
Used: Number of clusters currently being used
Free:
Number of clusters currently unused
9-5. Press [ENTER (YES)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 11
Directories
The VS-1680 stores data such as audio data or
parameter values on disk in units called files. In
order to manage large numbers of files, the VS1680 keeps lists of file names and the locations on
disk in which the data of these files is stored.
These lists are called directories.
The “IllegalDIR” message will appear when this
list is incorrect. For example, this message will
appear if the data of a certain file is supposed to
be recorded in an area of the disk which does not
actually exist, or if the list itself becomes permanently unreadable.
If a disk error is found, it is possible to erase only the
data that was lost as a result of the error. I.e., the disk
can be restored to a correct operating condition while
keeping as much possible of the non-error data.
179
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
This section describes the settings that affect the overall functioning of the VS1680.
Switching the Display Content
In Play condition, the graphic display is separated into different areas (pane).
Use the [
], [
], [
], and [
] or buttons as well as the TIME/VALUE
dial to perform various operations in each zone. The currently active region is
outlined with a bold line. Switching the currently active area is accomplished by
pressing [SHIFT] along with [
] and [
].
Upper Part of the Display
The current time of the song being played back is displayed here in SMPTE time
code. To move the playback time, press [
] and [
] to select the time point
you want to move to, then rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to carry out the change.
Each time you press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], what appears in the display is changed.
With [
] and [
], you can select a track for scrub playback, etc.
fig.12-01(play1.eps)
SMPTE Time Code
Marker Number
Cursor
Measure
Beat
fig.12-02(play2.eps)
Icon
Sample Rate
Shift Lock Status
Song Name
Scene Number
Recording Mode
Synchronization Status
Song Capacity
Locator Bank
Comment
Remaining Disk Space
Center Part of the Display
The level meter is displayed here. Each time you hold down [SHIFT] and press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)], the meter appears or disappears from the display.
fig.12-03(levelmeter.eps)
Pre-fader / Post-fader indication
180
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Each of the function button works as shown below.
fig.12-04(tr_lvl.eps)
[F1 (LMTrk)]: This displays the track mixer level meter.
Track Channel Level
fig.12-05(in_lvl.eps)
[F2 (LM In)]:
Master Level
This displays the input mixer level meter.
Input Channel Level
fig.12-06(efx_lvl.eps)
Monitor Level
Monitor Level
Master Level
[F3 (LMAux)]: This displays the EFFECT bus and AUX bus level meters.
Effect Send Level
AUX Send Level
Monitor Level
Master Level
[F4 (PRE)] or [F4 (POST)]: This switches the display of the meter showing
the signal level before passing through the fader
(Pre) and after being adjusted by the fader (Pst).
[F5 (F/P)] or [F5 (Meter)]:
fig.12-07(f/p_lvl.eps)
This switches between the display of the level
meter and of the pan and fader positions for
each channel.
Chapter 12
Track Channel
181
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Lower Part of the Display
This area displays the Playlist. Each time you hold down [SHIFT] and press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)], the display appears or disappears.
fig.12-08(pl_w_vtr.eps)
Phrase name at the cursor position/current location
Cursor
Track name at the cursor position
Playlist
V-track status
Current track
Tracks containing recorded data
Tracks not containing recorded data
fig.12-09(playlist2.eps)
At this time, each of the function buttons works as shown below.
[F1 (ZOOM+)]: This enlarges (in three stages) the display of the Playlist in
the Track area. When the waveform is displayed, this
enlarges the display of the waveform in the level area.
fig.12-10(pl_tr_max.eps)
182
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
[F2 (ZOOM-)]: This reduces (in three stages) the display of the Playlist in the
Track area. When the waveform is displayed, this reduces the
display of the waveform in the level area.
fig.12-11(pl_tr_min.eps)
[F3 (← →)]:
This enlarges (in four stages) the display of the Playlist in the
time area. When the waveform is displayed, this enlarges the
display of the waveform in the time area.
[F4 (→ ←)]:
This reduces (in four stages) the display of the Playlist in the
time area. When the waveform is displayed, this reduces the
display of the waveform in the time area.
fig.12-12(pl_time_min.eps)
fig.12-13(pl_time_max.eps)
Chapter 12
183
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
[F5 (WAVE)]: This displays the level (waveform) of the sounds recorded on
the tracks. Pressing the button once more removes this from
the screen. You can select the desired track by both rotating
the TIME/VALUE dial or pressing [
], [
], [
], and
[
] while the lower part of the display is outlined with a
bold line.
fig.12-14(wave.eps)
Cursor
Expansion in the level direction
Expansion in the time direction
* While the waveform is displayed, if the degree of expansion in the time direction
between 16 times and 4096 times, then what is displayed may not be entirely accurate.
Think of the display as a sort of general yardstick. If you wish to have the display show
a more accurate representation, the select other expansion values.
System Settings for Each Song (System Parameters)
These are overall settings that can saved in any song. These settings are lost if
the power is turned off without the song being saved, or if the System settings
are reset to their original conditions.
Having the Volume Change as Soon as the Faders are Moved
When you press [FADER] to switch between input and track channels or to
recall Scenes, there will be times when fader positions may not correspond to
their actual volume settings. In such instances, the position of each fader is represented by a black dot, and the actual level that is set is represented by a white
circle. Use the following procedure when you wish to have the volume change
as soon as the faders are moved.
fig.12-15(fader.eps)
Actual volume level
Each fader position
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System menu icon does not appear,
then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear in [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to “Fader Match,”
then rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. If “Fader Match” is not displayed, then
press [F1 (Prm1)].
184
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Fader Match
Here, the fader is selected to control the sound if there is a discrepancy between
the current fader and the actual volume level.
Jump: The actual value will change at the instant that the fader is moved.
Null:
No change is made unless the fader or pan knob is moved to its current actual value.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Holding Level Meter Peaks
You can hold the display of maximum values (peaks) while the level meter
appears in the graphic display.
fig.12-16(peak.eps)
Peak
indication
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System menu icon does not appear,
then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear in [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor to “Peak Hold Sw,”
then rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. If “Peak Hold Sw” is not displayed, then
press [F1 (Prm1)].
Peak Hold Sw (Peak Hold Switch)
With this set to “On,” the level meter in the graphic display holds the display of
peak levels.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
When you press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], the peak display is reset (cleared). Deleting
the level meter from the display, or switching to the input level, track level, AUX
level, or other such display also resets the peak display.
Chapter 12
185
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Checking the Remaining Disk Space
When Using the Foot Switch
The amount of free disk space available for recording
the current song is displayed as “Remained” in the
upper part of the display. You can select the type of
display for this.
With an optional foot switch (such as the Roland DP-2
or BOSS FU-5U) connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack,
you can choose how the foot switch functions.
* ”Remain” does not appear while the level meter is being
displayed (p. 180).
fig.12-17(remain.eps)
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Foot Sw,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial. If “Foot Sw” is not displayed,
then press [F2 (Prm2)].
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear
in [F1], first press [PAGE] until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Remain Display,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial. If “Remain Display” is not
displayed, then press [F2 (Prm2)].
Remain Display (Remaining Display)
This selects how the remaining disk space is shown.
Time:
This indicates the time (minutes/seconds)
left for recording.
CapaMB: This shows the actual memory (in
megabytes).
Capa %: This indicates the remaining space as a
percentage of the total disk space.
Event:
This shows the number of events used in
the recording.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
186
Foot Sw (Foot Switch)
This sets the foot switch function.
Play/Stop: Pressing the switch alternately starts and
stops playback of the song.
Record:
Works the same as the [REC] button. Use
this to switch between recording and
playback during manual Punch-In
Recording.
TapMarker: Works the same as the [TAP] button.
Mark points are set when the pedal is
pressed.
Next:
Works the same as the [NEXT] button.
Each time the pedal is pressed recalls the
next start or end point of a phrase.
Pressing the switch in combination with
[SHIFT] recalls the next marker.
Previous: Works the same as the [PREVIOUS] button. Each time the pedal is pressed recalls
the previous phrase start or end point.
Pressing the switch in combination with
[SHIFT] recalls the previous marker.
GPI:
This controls start and stopping of playback of the song according to the GPI
trigger signal received from the FOOT
SWITCH jack.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Overall Settings for the VS1680 (Global Parameters)
These are setting related to the overall operation of the
VS-1680.
Holding the function of [SHIFT]
You can temporarily hold functions by pressing
[SHIFT]. This allows you to show the menu icons for
each condition and save songs with one hand.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Shift Lock,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Shift Lock (Shift Lock Switch)
Setting to “On” temporarily holds the [SHIFT] button
function.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5. Afterwards, the [SHIFT] button indicator light
goes on and off each time the button is pressed.
[SHIFT] is in effect when the indicator is lit. The
hold is lifted the next time another button is
pressed or if the TIME/VALUE dial is rotated.
To Display the Song Menu Icon
1. Press [SHIFT] and immediately release the
button.
The button indicator lights. When the level meter
is not displayed, “SHIFT” appears in the upper
part of the display and shows the shift lock function is in effect.
When Holding Down the [SHIFT] Button
If [SHIFT] is held down during the operation, the
Shift Lock function will be ignored. For example,
if you hold down the [SHIFT] and press [F1
(SONG)], Shift Lock will not be turned on when
you take your finger off [SHIFT]. The function of
[SHIFT] itself remains in effect, so the System
menu icon is displayed at this time. Additionally,
rotating the TIME/VALUE dial while holding
down the [SHIFT] button increases or decreases
the value of some parameter setting by a factor of
ten (or 1/10).
Using the Numeric Keys
When changing the time location for locator or in
Punch-In Recording, you can use the LOCATOR buttons as numeric keys to enter numbers directly. In this
case, select how the numerals are entered.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “NUMERICS Type,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
NUMERICS Type
This sets how numerals are entered when you use the
LOCATOR buttons as a ten-key pad.
Up:
Numerals are entered from lower-place
digits up (from the right).
Down:
Numerals are entered from higher-place
digits down (from the left).
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2. Press [F1 (SONG)].
The button indicator goes off, and the Song menu
icon appears in the display.
Chapter 12
187
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Example of entering numerals from lower
to higher place digits
For example, let’s see how “01h23m45s00f” is
input when the NUMERICS Type is set to “Up.”
1. Press [NUMERICS].
The button indicator lights.
2. The cursor appears at the digit furthest to the
right (in the lowest place). Press the LOCATOR buttons [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [0], and [0],
in that order.
The numerals appear in the place furthest to the
right and shift to higher places as other numerals
are entered. You can also move the cursor to the
desired place by pressing the [
] and [
]
buttons.
3. When you are finished inputting the number,
press [ENTER (YES)].
The numerical value is set, and the button indicator goes off.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Measure Display,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial. At this time, select “Always.”
Measure Display
Use this to select whether or not the measure and beat
appear in the graphic display.
Always: The measure and beat are constantly displayed.
Auto:
The measure and beat are not displayed
when the metronome is not in use.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Changing the VS-1680’s SCSI ID Number
Example of entering numerals from higher to lower place digits
Now let’s see how “01h23m45s00f” is input when
the NUMERICS Type is set to “Down.”
1. Press [NUMERICS].
The button indicator lights, and the current time
in the song is displayed.
2. The cursor appears in the digit furthest to the
left (the highest place). Press the LOCATOR
buttons [0], [1], [2], [3], [4], [5], [0], and [0], in
that order.
The numerals appear from left to right, just as
they are entered. You can also move the cursor to
the desired place by pressing the [
] and [
]
buttons.
3. When you are finished inputting the number,
press [ENTER (YES)].
The numerical value is set, and the button indicator goes off.
Displaying Measures and Beats
If both the metronome is being used and MIDI clock
messages are being transmitted, the measure and beat
of the song can be displayed in the graphic display.
When you are running in synchronization with an
external device or recording a song along with a previously-created tempo map, this allows you to operate
the VS-1680 just as though you were operating a MIDI
sequencer. Set the metronome to sound as described in
“Sounding the Metronome” (p. 167).
188
When connecting SCSI devices with the VS-1680, the
SCSI ID number of each device must be set so that
none of the devices have the same ID number. The VS1680’s SCSI ID number is set to “7” at the factory.
When connecting the VS-1680 to other SCSI devices
(for example, Zip drives or CD-R drives), be sure to set
the SCSI ID number for these other devices to a number other than “7.”
If no other SCSI ID number is vacant, it is also possible
to change the SCSI ID number of the VS-1680.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “SCSI Self ID,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
SCSI Self ID (SCSI Self ID Number)
This sets the VS-1680’s own SCSI ID number (0–7).
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
5. Press [YES].
The song is saved.
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. The new SCSI ID number
becomes effective from the next time when the VS1680 is turned on.
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
When There Is No Hard Disk Installed
Even when there is no hard disk installed in the VS1680, it still can be used with only a Zip drive connected to the SCSI connector. In such instances, it takes
approximately 30 seconds after the power is turned on
of the VS-1680 to check its internal hard disk connection status. To avoid this wait, you can preset the VS1680 not to attempt to use the internal hard disk.
Input Peak Level
This sets the volume level at which the peak indicator
lights.
CLIP:
-3dB:
-6dB:
The indicator lights when the sound distorts.
The indicator lights 3 dB before the sound distorts.
The indicator lights 6 dB before the sound distorts.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
Searching Markers Using
[PREVIOUS] and [NEXT]
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “IDE Drive,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Normally, [PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] are used to move
the current playback time to the beginning or end of
the previous or following phrase of selected track.
fig.12-18(p/n_phrase.eps)
Current Time
IDE Drive
When not using the internal hard disk, set this to
“Off.” Normally, this is set to “On.”
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].
“STORE OK?” appears in the display.
5. Press [YES].
The song is saved.
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition. The changed setting
becomes effective from the next time when the VS1680 is turned on.
Changing the Level at Which the Peak
Indicator Lights
You can also change this function so that it recalls
markers, just the way the skip button on a CD player
works.
fig.12-19(p/n_marker.eps)
M1
M2
Current Time
M3
M4
M5
You can designate the level at which the peak indicator lights for sounds input via the INPUT jacks (1–8).
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “PREVIOUS/NEXT Sw,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
189
Chapter 12
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Input Peak Level,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
PREVIOUS/NEXT Sw (PREVIOUS/NEXT Switch)
This selects how the [PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] buttons
function.
PHRASE: [PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] are used to move
the current playback time to the beginning
or end of the previous or following phrase.
MARKER:[PREVIOUS] and [NEXT] are used to move
the current playback time to the previous or
following marker.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Adjusting the Button Sensitivity
There are a number of buttons whose functions
change depending on whether the button is pressed
and immediately released or if it is held down.
Button Name Function When Pressed Function
When Held Down
STATUS button
Function When Pressed:
Changes the track status
Function When Held Down: Confirms the channel
assigned to the track
[EDIT (SOLO)]
Function When Pressed:
Edits the Master Block
Function When Held Down: Turns on the Solo function
[FADER (MUTE)]
Function When Pressed:
Switches the input/track
fader
Function When Held Down: Turns on the Mute function
You can specify the length of this time that the buttons
must be held down in order to change their functions.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Switching Time,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Switching Time
This designates the time the buttons must be held
down (0.3–2.0 seconds) in order to change functions.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
190
Stopping the Cooling Fan
When using a mic near the VS-1680 or when mixing
down from the VS-1680 to another recorder, you may
find that noise from the VS-1680’s cooling fan to be a
problem. In such cases, you can temporarily turn off
only the cooling fan.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (GLOBL)]. If “GLOBL” does not appear
in [F2], first press [PAGE] until “GLOBL” is displayed, and then press [F2 (GLOBL)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Fan Control,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Fan Control
This specifies the manner in which the cooling fan is
turned off.
Off:
The fan is not turned off (the fan operates
constantly).
Play:
The fan stops during playback and recording (including record standby) .
Rec&Play: The fan definitely stops during playback
and recording (including record standby)
for at least 10 minutes.
* Heat that can build up while the cooling fan is stopped for
long periods, for example during extended playback or
when placed in record standby for long stretches, may
damage the internal hard disk. To avoid this problem,
even when “Fan Control” is set to “Play,” you should set
the fan so that the stopping of the fan is automatically disabled (so that the fan continues to operate) as temperatures dictate.
When “Fan Control” is set to “Rec&Play,” the fan stops
during playback and recording (including record standby)
for at least 10 minutes. At this point, do not repeat
recording or playing back often.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Overall Settings for
Playback and Recording
(Play/Record Parameters)
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)]. If “PLAY” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “PLAY” is displayed, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
These are settings related to the overall workings of
the Play and Record functions.
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Marker Stop,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial. At this time, set this to “On.”
Constantly Monitoring the Input
Source
Marker Stop
When this is set to “On,” playback of the song stops
automatically when a designated marker is reached.
On channels for which Track Status is set to REC,
playing back the song in record ready mode (REC
indicator blinking) will allow you to monitor the performance that is recorded in the track, and during
recording (REC indicator lit) you will be able to monitor the input source. At this time, pressing [STATUS]
will let you switch between monitoring the track and
monitoring the input source.
It is also possible to make settings so that the input
source is always monitored.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)]. If “PLAY” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “PLAY” is displayed, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Record Monitor,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Record Monitor
This switches between track and source monitoring.
AUTO:
This switches monitoring between track
and source.
SOURCE: This sets the VS-1680 to monitor the source
at all times.
AUTO
SOURCE
While
stopped
SOURCE
SOURCE
During
playback
TRACK/SOURCE
SOURCE
During
recording
SOURCE
SOURCE
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
5. Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.
When the song reaches the location containing the
marker, playback then stops.
If Noise Between Segments is Obtrusive
In the seams or breaks that occur when recording is
begun or ended or when a phrase is copied, obtrusive
noise may occur. The VS-1680 fades-in and fades-out
these breaks so that this noise will not be heard. If
objectionable noise occurs, you can adjust the length of
the fade-in and fade-out.
* It is not possible to set the fade-in/fade-out time to 0. Thus
in some cases, such as if you copy a sustained sound such
as strings and use it elsewhere, the break may be even
more noticeable than if there had been no fade.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)]. If “PLAY” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “PLAY” is displayed, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Fade Length,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Fade Length
This sets the length (2, 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 ms) of the
fade-in or fade-out.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Stopping Automatically
Chapter 12
You can cause song playback to stop automatically at
a marker.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
191
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
Scrolling the Waveform
While the level (waveform) of the sounds is displayed
(p. 184), you can scroll the waveform display.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)]. The
System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F3 (PLAY)]. If “PLAY” does not appear in
[F3], first press [PAGE] until “PLAY” is displayed, and then press [F3 (PLAY)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor to “Waveform Scroll,” then rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Waveform Scroll
When this is set to “On,” the waveform display scrolls
following playback time.
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. Return to Play condition.
5. Press [F5 (WAVE)]. If “WAVE” does not appear
in [F5], first press [PAGE] until “WAVE” is displayed, and then press [F5 (WAVE)].
6. Press [PLAY].
The waveform display scrolls.
Resetting Mixer and System
Settings to Their Original
State
After repeatedly making new settings to the input
mixer, track mixer, and Master Block, as well as after
changing the content of settings in System condition,
you can restore the initial parameters existing when
you started to create a song.
* Even if you restore the settings to their initial state, the
song, scene, tempo map and sync track data will not be
lost. Furthermore, the IDE drive (p. 189), SCSI self ID (p.
188), Scene Mode (p. 40), Shift Lock (p. 187), and
Numerics Type (p. 187) settings will not return to their
default state.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F1 (INIT)]. If “INIT” does not appear in
[F1], first press [PAGE] until “INIT” is displayed,
and then press [F1 (INIT)].
3. ”Init Mixer/System PRM Sure?” (Do you want to
restore the initial mixer and system parameters?)
appears in the display. Press [YES]. If you want to
cancel the operation, then press [NO].
4. When the initial conditions are restored, the
System menu icon appears in the display. Press
[PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
192
Chapter 12 Making Global Settings and Checking Conditions
To Have a Message
Displayed at a Specified Time
The VS-1680 features an internal clock, allowing you
to have the unit turn on automatically on a specified
day, or a specified time (except during Drive Initialize
and other certain operations) to have a message of
your choosing appear in the display. This is refered to
as the alarm function. Use this, for example, to display birthday or Christmas greetings, or to check the
amount of time available for creating a song.
5. Press [F1 (MSG)].
The Message Edit screen appears in the display. Press
[
], [
], [
], and [
] and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to input your message.
At this time, the function buttons work as shown
below.
fig.12-21(msg.eps)
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F2 (DATE)]. If “DATE” does not appear in
[F2], first press [PAGE] until “DATE” is displayed, and then press [F2 (DATE)].
3. Press [F5 (Alarm)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Specify the date and time you wish the
message to appear.
fig.12-20(alarm.eps)
6. When you have entered your message, press [F5
(Write)].
You can store up to ten messages at a time. Repeat
Steps 4–6 if you wish to input additional any messages.
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 12
Mode
This specifies how often you want the message to
appear.
Off:
No message is displayed.
m/d/y:
Sets a specific date, including year and
month, such as 1998/April/1 (April 1,
1998) for the message to appear.
m/d/-:
Sets a specific date every year, including
the month, such as April/1 (every year on
April 1) that the message is to appear.
-/d/-:
This specifies the day of every month (such
as the first of every month) that the message is to appear.
Week:
This specifies the day of the week (Sunday
of every week, for example) that the message is to appear.
Time:
This specifies the time of day (every day at
8:00, for example) that the message is to
appear.
Every:
The sets the message to be displayed every
day.
Clears all characters in the window.
Deletes the character where the cursor
is positioned.
[F4 (Ins)]:
Inserts a space where the cursor is positioned.
[F5 (Write)]: Confirms the song name and exits the
screen
[F6 (EXIT)]: Exits the screen without accepting the
song name.
[F2 (Clr)]:
[F3 (Del)]:
193
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Along with the functions or external devices explained in earlier chapters, this
chapter explains some actual ways and gives some tips in which the VS-1680 can
be used effectively. First press [PLAY (DISPLAY)], and begin each operation
from Play condition.
Synchronizing the Operations of Two VS-1680 Units
The VS-1680 is compatible with MMC. Here, we explain how the operation of
two VS-1680 units can be synchronized. One VS-1680 acts as the MMC/MTC
master, and the other acts as the MMC/MTC slave. Make connections as
described below.
MMC (Appendices p. 64)
fig.13-01(1680x2.eps)
INPUT 7, 8
MIDI OUT
MASTER
MASTER L, R
MIDI IN
SLAVE
* In this example, you can use the master’s Stereo In function for the mix balance
between the master and slave VS-1680s (p. 165). First adjust the individual track balances on both machines. Of course, you can also send the output of the master and
slave VS-1680s to a separate mixer. However, the master and slave units cannot be
connected using digital connections.
Settings for the Master VS-1680
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System menu icon does not appear,
then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in [F4], first press [PAGE] until
“MIDI” is displayed, and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to make the settings as described below.
194
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Device ID
This sets the Device ID number (1–32) that is used
when exchanging exclusive messages (mixer parameters) with an external MIDI device. Exclusive messages can be transmitted and received between
devices which have the same Device ID number setting. Here, set this to “17.”
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. For now, set this to “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI message such as
metronome Note messages or MTC from the
VS-1680.
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from the connector without any changes.
SysEx.Tx (System Exclusive Transmit Switch)
Exclusive messages are transmitted when this is set to
“On.” At this time, set this to “On.”
MMC (MMC Mode)
This setting determines how the VS-1680 implements
MMC. Set this to “MASTER.”
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-1680 functions as the master device for external
MIDI equipment.
SLAVE:
MMC is received. The VS-1680 functions
as a slave device for external MIDI equipment.
Control Type (Mixer Control Type)
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an external MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “Off.”
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
not transmitted or received.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
messages.
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive messages.
* When “C.C.” or “Excl” is selected, making mixer adjustments on the master VS-1680 makes the same adjustments to the slave VS-1680 mixer. For more detailed
information about Exclusive messages, please refer to
“MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p. 25).
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to make the
settings as described below.
Sync Source
This determines how the VS-1680 is synchronized with
other devices. Here, set this to “INT.”
INT: The VS-1680 runs according to its own internal
clock. Select this setting when you are not synchronizing with other devices or when you
want external MIDI devices to be controlled by
synchronization signals from the VS-1680.
EXT: The VS-1680 is controlled with synchronization
signals (MTC) from the connected external
MIDI device. In this case, the VS-1680 does not
operate unless it is receiving MTC signals. Select
this setting when you want to use the MTC
from an external MIDI device to control the VS1680.
Sync Gen (Generator)
This selects the type of synchronization signal transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. For now, set
this to “MTC.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map
is transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync
track is transmitted.
Sync MTC Type (MTC Type)
This selects the type of MTC (30, 29N, 29D, 25, or 24).
Set this to conform to the type of MTC on the slave VS1680. Here, select “30.”
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Settings for the Slave VS-1680
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to make the
settings as described below.
Chapter 13
195
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Device ID
This sets the Device ID number (1–32) that is used
when exchanging exclusive messages (mixer parameters) with an external MIDI device. Exclusive messages can be transmitted and received between
devices which have the same Device ID number setting. Here, set this to “17.”
SysEx.Rx (System Exclusive Receive Switch)
Exclusive messages are received when this is set to
“On.” At this time, set this to “On.” The Exclusive
messages can be received when the VS-1680 is in Play
condition.
MMC (MMC Mode)
This setting determines how the VS-1680 implements
MMC. Set this to “SLAVE.”
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-1680 functions as the master device for external
MIDI equipment.
SLAVE: MMC is received. The VS-1680 functions as
a slave device for external MIDI equipment.
Control Type (Mixer Control Type)
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an external MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “Off.”
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
not transmitted or received.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
messages.
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive messages.
* When “C.C.” or “Excl” is selected, making mixer adjustments on the master VS-1680 makes the same adjustments to the slave VS-1680 mixer. For more detailed
information about Exclusive messages, please refer to
“MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p. 25).
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set each
of the values.
196
Sync Error Level
This sets the interval (0–10) for checking MTC receiving status when synchronize VS-1680 with MTC from
an external MIDI device. If the MTC is not being sent
continuously, the VS-1680 checks the MTC and if there
is an error, cancels synchronization. By setting a
longer interval under such circumstances, synchronization can continue, even if there is a certain degree
of error. Normally, set this to “5.”
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC so that it matches that of the master VS-1680.
Here, set this to “30.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
7. Press [EXT SYNC].
The button indicator blinks, indicating that the VS1680 is ready to receive MTC.
In this condition, the slave VS-1680 is operated
synchrony when the master VS-1680 is operated.
The EXT SYNC indicator is light during the synchronization.
Digital Connections Cannot Be Used
When Sync Source is set to “EXT,” the VS-1680
operates according to the Clock signal (MTC)
transmitted by the connected MIDI device. At
such times, if you also set the master Clock to
“DIGIN1” or “DIGIN2,” the VS-1680 then also
attempts to operate according to the Clock (digital signal) from the external digital device. This
means the internal clock becomes mismatched.
Thus, in the present example, the slave VS-1680
cannot record the digital signals transmitted by
the master VS-1680.
When the master Clock is set to “DIGIN1” or
“DIGIN2,” the VS-1680 operates according to the
Clock (digital signal) transmitted by the connected MIDI device. You can thus make MTC the
master Clock. However, in this case, the slave VS1680 attempts to operate according to the MTC
transmitted by the master VS-1680, while the
master VS-1680 attempts to operate according to
the digital signals transmitted by the slave VS1680. In such instances, since this ends up in there
being no reference clock, the VS-1680 cannot
operate correctly.
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Synchronizing with Cakewalk Pro Audio (MMC)
The VS-1680 supports MMC. This means that when two VS-1680 units are synchronized or when a VS-1680 is used in conjunction with an MMC-supporting
MIDI sequencer etc., operations such as song playback, stop and fast-forward
can be performed by operating only the master device.
MMC (Appendices p. 64)
* Some MIDI devices are not compatible with the MMC used by the VS-1680. If you are
using such a device, the VS-1680 cannot be operated in the manner described in this
Owner’s Manual. For more detailed information about MMC functions for the VS1680, please refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p. 25).
Here, we will see an example of synchronizing the VS-1680 with the Cakewalk
Pro Audio software application. Cakewalk Pro Audio is a computer-based
sequencer program compatible with MMC and MTC (for Windows 95). Make
the connections as shown below, referring to the Cakewalk owner’s manual as
you go along.
fig.13-02(cwtovs.eps)
MIDI Cable
Computer
MIDI Cable
Cakewalk
Serial Port
(IOIOI)
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
Serial MIDI MIDI
Driver
Driver
MIDI Interface
VOLUME
Computer Cable
MIDI IN B
PHONES
COMPUTER
MIDI Sound Generator
In this example, Cakewalk is the master device when MMC is used, and the VS1680 is the master device when using MTC. Cakewalk can be used to control
such operations of the VS-1680 as playback, stopping, switching track status, and
more.
* Use a MIDI interface when connecting the VS-1680 to a computer. You can also use
a MIDI interface in connecting a computer to a sound generator.
Chapter 13
197
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Settings for the VS-1680
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to make the
settings as described below.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. For now, set this to “Out.”
Out: The connector transmits MIDI message such as
metronome Note messages or MTC from the
VS-1680.
Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector are retransmitted from the connector without any changes.
SysEx.Rx (System Exclusive Receive Switch)
Exclusive messages are received when this is set to
“On.” At this time, set this to “On.” The Exclusive
messages can be received when the VS-1680 is in Play
condition.
MMC (MMC Mode)
This setting determines how the VS-1680 implements
MMC. Set this to “SLAVE.”
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-1680 functions as the master device for external
MIDI equipment.
SLAVE: MMC is received. The VS-1680 functions as
a slave device for external MIDI equipment.
Control Type (Mixer Control Type)
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an external MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “C.C.”
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
not transmitted or received.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
messages.
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive messages.
198
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set each
of the values.
Sync Source
This determines how the VS-1680 is synchronized with
other devices. Here, set this to “INT.”
INT: The VS-1680 runs according to its own internal
clock. Select this setting when you are not synchronizing with other devices or when you
want external MIDI devices to be controlled by
synchronization signals from the VS-1680.
EXT: The VS-1680 is controlled with synchronization
signals (MTC) from the connected external
MIDI device. In this case, the VS-1680 does not
operate unless it is receiving MTC signals. Select
this setting when you want to use the MTC
from an external MIDI device to control the VS1680.
Sync Gen (Generator)
This selects the type of synchronization signal transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. For now, set
this to “MTC.”
Off:
Synchronization signals are not transmitted.
MTC:
MIDI Time Code is transmitted.
MIDIClk: MIDI Clock according to the Tempo Map is
transmitted.
SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track
is transmitted.
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC of Cakewalk so that it matches that of the
master VS-1680. Here, set this to “30.”
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio
Make the settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio as described
below. For more detailed information about Cakewalk,
please refer to the Cakewalk owner’s manual.
Setting | Clock:
MTC (receives MTC)
Setting | MIDI Out:
Check “Transmit MMC” (sends MMC)
About the Recording Mode
Even when using the digital connections as
described in the example, since audio tracks are
recorded from the VS-1680 to Cakewalk, edited,
and then sent back to the VS-1680, this can be
likened to repeated track bouncing. Thus, we recommend that you to use a recording mode featuring higher quality sound, such as “MTP” or
“MAS.”
Setting | Time Format:
MTC from the VS-1680 (here, set “30”)
* ”30 Frame Drop” in Cakewalk corresponds to “29D” on
the VS-1680.
Under this condition, when playback is begun with
Cakewalk, MMC is transmitted to the VS-1680, and
upon receiving the MMC, the VS-1680 also begins
playback. During playback, MTC is sent from the
VS-1680 to Cakewalk, thus synchronizing operations.
Making Digital Connections with
Cakewalk
When you have a sound card (such as Audiomedia III
or CardD) that features digital input and output connectors installed in your computer, you can connect
Cakewalk and your VS-1680 digitally. This is convenient when, for example, you want to record the audio
tracks from the VS-1680 to Cakewalk via a digital connection, edit the material in Cakewalk, and then send
it back via the digital connection to the VS-1680 for
mixdown. Be sure to read the owner’s manuals for
Cakewalk as well as the sound card you are using.
199
Chapter 13
About Sound Cards
Even when using the digital connections as
described in the example, noise originating inside
the computer in the vicinity of the sound card
may be introduced into the sound. The level of
noise will vary according to the computer’s exterior panels, interior boards, the condition of the
cable connections, etc. In general, high-performance sound cards that tend to resist this kind of
noise better.
With sound cards that feature both analog and
digital input and output, it may be necessary to
set the card to use the digital input and output.
After carefully reading the owner’s manual for
your sound card, make the necessary settings to
enable the sound card to use the digital input and
output connectors.
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Recording to Cakewalk
1. Make the connections as shown below.
fig.13-03(cwtovs.digi.eps)
Computer
Cakewalk
MIDI Interface
Sound Card
MIDI
Driver
MIDI IN
DIGITAL
IN
MIDI OUT
coaxial or optical
DIGITAL
OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
VS-1680
2. Follow the procedure as described in “Settings for the VS-1680” (p. 198) and
“Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio” (p. 199), set up the system so that the
VS-1680 and Cakewalk are synchronized.
3. Make the settings to Cakewalk as shown below. For more detailed information, please refer to your Cakewalk owner’s manual.
Settings | Audio Options... | Advanced | SMPTE/MTC Sync: “High-Quality”
* If your computer does not feature adequate performance, even with the above settings,
you may not be able to get stable digital audio output, meaning the sound will suffer
when digital connections are used. Additionally, Cakewalk Pro Audio 5.0 and
Cakewalk Professional 5.0 do not feature the above-mentioned settings. We recommend
upgrading to Version 6.0.
In the present status/condition, when record is begun with Cakewalk, MMC
is transmitted to the VS-1680, and upon receiving the MMC, the VS-1680
also begins playback. During playback, MTC is sent from the VS-1680 to
Cakewalk, thus synchronizing operations.
200
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Recording to the VS-1680
1. Make the connections as shown below.
fig.13-04(vstocw_digi.eps)
Computer
Cakewalk
MIDI Interface
Sound Card
MIDI
Driver
MIDI IN
DIGITAL
OUT
MIDI OUT
coaxial or optical
DIGITAL
IN
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
VS-1680
2. Follow the procedure as described in “Settings for the VS-1680” (p. 198) and
“Settings for Cakewalk Pro Audio” (p. 199), set up the system so that the
VS-1680 and Cakewalk are synchronized.
3. Make the settings to Cakewalk as shown below. For more detailed information, please refer to your Cakewalk owner’s manual.
Settings | Audio Options... | Advanced | SMPTE/MTC Sync: “High-Quality”
* If your computer does not feature adequate performance, even with the above settings,
you may not be able to get stable digital audio output, meaning the sound will suffer
when digital connections are used. Additionally, Cakewalk Pro Audio 5.0 and
Cakewalk Professional 5.0 do not feature the above-mentioned settings. We recommend
upgrading to Version 6.0.
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System menu icon does not appear,
then press [F6 (EXIT)].
5. Press [F1 (SYSPM)]. If “SYSPM” does not appear in [F1], first press [PAGE]
until “SYSPM” is displayed, and then press [F1 (SYSPM)].
Chapter 13
201
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
6. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the settings as shown below.
Master Clock
This is used to select the reference clock for the VS1680 operations. Here, set this to “DIGIN1” or
“DIGIN2.”
DIGIN1: Based on the digital signal received at the
DIGITAL IN connector 1 (coaxial).
INT:
Based on the VS-1680’s internal clock.
DIGIN2: Based on the digital signal received at the
DIGITAL IN connector 2 (optical).
7. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
8. Make the settings for the VS-1680 by following the
procedure as described in “Recording Digital
Signals” (p. 74).
Under this condition, when playback is begun with
Cakewalk, MMC is transmitted to the VS-1680, and
upon receiving the MMC, the VS-1680 also begins
record. During playback, MTC is sent from the VS1680 to Cakewalk, thus synchronizing operations.
Using an External MIDI
Device to Adjust the Mixer
(Compu Mix)
The VS-1680 can send and receive the mixer settings
and movements as MIDI messages. You can use an
external MIDI controller to control the VS-1680’s
faders, and by using a MIDI sequencer to record mixer
settings and movements during playback as MIDI
song data, the mixer can be controlled automatically
by the MIDI sequencer when the song is played back
later. This is referred to as Compu Mix. Compu Mix
uses Control Change messages and Exclusive messages.
This roughly describes how things proceed when performing operations using Control Change messages.
For more detailed information, please read the appropriate pages.
202
When Using Exclusive Messages
When working in Compu Mix, you should use
normal Control Change messages. However, if
the use of Control Change messages would affect
other MIDI devices in your setup, you may use
System Exclusive message instead.
For more detailed information about Control
Change messages and Exclusive messages, please
refer to “MIDI Implementation” (Appendices p.
25).
The Correspondence Between MIDI
Channels and Controller Numbers
MIDI channels correspond to the mixer channels as
shown below. For channel pairs linked with the Stereo
Link function, Control Change messages can be
exchanged using the odd-numbered channel’s MIDI
channel. Control Change messages transmitted via the
even-numbered channel’s MIDI channel are ignored.
MIDI
Channel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input
Mixer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIGITAL L
DIGITAL R
ST IN
EFX1
EFX2
EFX3
EFX4
-
Track
Mixer
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Master
Block
Master
Block
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Controller numbers correspond to the track channel
parameters as follows.
Controller numbers correspond to the Master section
parameters as follows.
Controller Number
3
7
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Controller Number
68
70
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
102
103
104
105
106
107
Mixer Parameter
TRACK STATUS
MST Send Level
Level Meter
MST Send Pan/Balance
EQ L Freq.
EQ L Gain
EQ M Freq.
EQ M Gain
EQ M Q
EQ H Freq.
EQ H Gain
EFX1 SND Level
EFX1 SND Pan/Balance
EFX2 SND Level
EFX2 SND Pan/Balance
EFX3 SND Level
EFX3 SND Pan/Balance
EFX4 SND Level
EFX4 SND Pan/Balance
AUX Send Level
AUX Send Pan/Balance
MST Offset Level
MST Offset Balance
Mixer Parameter
Master Level
Master Balance
EFX1 SND Level
EFX1 SND Balance
EFX2 SND Level
EFX2 SND Balance
EFX3 SND Level
EFX3 SND Balance
EFX4 SND Level
EFX4 SND Balance
AUX Level
AUX Balance
Monitor Level
Monitor Balance
Monitor L Meter
Monitor R Meter
Master L Meter
Master R Meter
Controller numbers correspond to the input channel
parameters as follows.
Controller Number
68
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
Mixer Parameter
MST Send Level
MST Send Pan/Balance
EQ L Freq.
EQ L Gain
EQ M Freq.
EQ M Gain
EQ M Q
EQ H Freq.
EQ H Gain
EFX1 SND Level
EFX1 SND Pan/Balance
EFX2 SND Level
EFX2 SND Pan/Balance
EFX3 SND Level
EFX3 SND Pan/Balance
EFX4 SND Level
EFX4 SND Pan/Balance
AUX Send Level
AUX Send Pan/Balance
MST Offset Level
MST Offset Balance
Chapter 13
203
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Preparations for Compu Mix
1. Make the connections as shown below.
fig.13-07(compumix.eps)
Cntrl Local (Control Local Switch)
When this is set to “Off,” actual volume levels remain
unchanged even when the faders on the top panel are
moved (fader movements have no effect). Normally,
this is set to “On.” At this time, set the Control Local
switch to “On.”
Control Type (Mixer Control Type)
This selects the type of MIDI messages that will be
used when transmitting mixer settings to an external
MIDI device, or when MIDI messages from an external MIDI device are used to control the mixer. At this
time, set this to “C.C.”
Off: MIDI messages related to mixer operation are
not transmitted or received.
C.C.: The mixer is controlled using Control Change
messages.
Excl: The mixer is controlled using Exclusive messages.
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
5. Follow the procedure as described in
“Synchronizing with MIDI Sequencers” (p. 128),
make the necessary settings in both the VS-1680
and the MIDI sequencer to synchronize the two
machines. In addition, make sure to set the MIDI
sequencer so that MIDI messages received at the
MIDI In connector are not output from the MIDI
OUT connector.
MIDI Sequencer
2. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6 (EXIT)].
3. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in
[F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is displayed,
and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
4. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the
cursor. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the settings as shown below.
MIDI Thru (MIDI Thru Switch)
This switches the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU
connector. Here, select “Out.”
Out: MIDI messages such as metronome sound Note
messages or MTC are sent from the VS-1680.
Thru: This sends MIDI messages received via the
MIDI IN connector and sends them without
changes.
204
Recording with Compu Mix
1. Prepare the VS-1680’s mixer settings (faders, pan,
etc.) and ready for playback the song.
2. Put the MIDI sequencer in Record mode, and
begin playback with the VS-1680.
3. When playback begins, immediately hold down
[SHIFT] and press [SCENE].
The mixer’s initial condition is transmitted from the
MIDI OUT connector.
4. As you listen to the song, make adjustments to the
faders and other controls as needed.
5. When playback of the song is finished, stop the
MIDI sequencer and the VS-1680.
This completes the recording with Compu Mix. Save
the MIDI song data to a floppy disk or other storage
media. When you go back to the beginning of the
MIDI song data and the VS-1680 song, and then begin
playback on the VS-1680, the mixer is controlled
according to the Compu Mix while the song is played
back.
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
To Have the Fader Movements Ignored
When playing back songs using Compu Mix, may
be you want the actual volume levels to remain
unchanged even when the faders on the top panel
are moved. In such instances, use the following
procedure.
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System
menu icon does not appear, then press [F6
(EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear
in [F4], first press [PAGE] until “MIDI” is
displayed, and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move
the cursor to “Cntrl Local,” and rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial.
Cntrl Local (Control Local Switch)
When this is set to “Off,” actual volume levels
remain unchanged even when the faders on the
top panel are moved (fader movements have no
effect). Normally, this is set to “On.” At this time,
set the Control Local switch to “Off.”
4. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
Chapter 13
205
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Synchronizing with Video Equipment
When used in combination with the Roland SI-80S, you can control playback
and stop functions on the VS-1680 with video equipment featuring a consumer
video interface that conforms to (RCTC) time code. Make the connections as
shown below, and refer to the SI-80S owner’s manual and the owner’s manual
for your video device.
fig.13-05(si_connect.eps)
L-CONNECTORS
IN
LANC
MIDI SYNC
OUT(MTC)
MIDI IN
SI-80S
Video Cassete Recorder
VS-1680
1. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [F5 (SYSTEM)].
The System menu icon is displayed. If the System menu icon does not appear,
then press [F6 (EXIT)].
2. Press [F4 (MIDI)]. If “MIDI” does not appear in [F4], first press [PAGE] until
“MIDI” is displayed, and then press [F4 (MIDI)].
3. Press [
], [
], [
as shown below.
], and [
] to move the cursor. Make the settings
SysEx.Rx (System Exclusive Receive Switch)
Exclusive messages are received when this is set to “On.” At this time, set this to
“On.” The Exclusive messages can then be received when the VS-1680 is in Play
condition.
MMC (MMC Mode)
This setting determines how the VS-1680 implements MMC. Set this to
“SLAVE.”
Off:
MMC is neither transmitted nor received.
MASTER: MMC is transmitted. The VS-1680 functions as the master device
for external MIDI equipment.
SLAVE:
MMC is received. The VS-1680 functions as a slave device for
external MIDI equipment.
4. Hold down [SHIFT] and press [EXT SYNC].
5. Press [
], [
], [
], and [
] to move the cursor. Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to set each of the values.
206
Chapter 13 Takein Advantages of the VS-1680 (idea and examples)
Sync Error Level
This sets the interval (0–10) for checking MTC receiving status when synchronize VS-1680 with MTC from
an external MIDI device. If the MTC is not being sent
continuously, the VS-1680 checks the MTC and if there
is an error, cancels synchronization. By setting a
longer interval under such circumstances, synchronization can continue, even if there is a certain degree
of error. Normally, set this to “5.”
Sync MTC Type
This selects the MTC type (30, 29N, 29D 25, 24). Select
the MTC so that it matches that of the SI-80S (“30,”
“29D,” or “29N”).
2. Press the SELECT button on Track Channel 9/10.
The track mixer appears in the display.
3. Press [F5 (AUX)]. If “AUX” does not appear in
[F5], first press [PAGE] until “AUX” is displayed,
and then press [F5 (AUX)].
* If EFFECT B is not installed, then [F4] displays
“AUX3.”
4. Move the cursor to “AUX Sw.” Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select “Pst.”
5. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Adjust
the volume level (0–127) and pan (L63–0–R63) as
needed.
6. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
6. Press [MASTER].
The Master Block appears in the display.
7. Press [EXT SYNC].
The button indicator lights, indicating that the VS-1680
is synchronized using the MTC from the SI-80S.
In this condition, operations performed on the
video equipment are performed in synchrony on
the VS-1680.
7. Press [F3 (AUX.A)]. If “AUX.A” does not appear
in [F3], first press [PAGE] until “AUX.A” is displayed, and then press [F3 (AUX.A)].
Using External Effects
Devices
10. Press [F1 (St In)].
When using external effects devices, the AUX A/B
jacks function as effects send jacks. Here we see how
effects can be added to a performance recorded in
stereo on Track 9/10. This is handy when, for example, you want to add reverb using an external effects
device. Use the INPUT 7 and 8 jacks as the effect
return jacks.
1. Connect your effects device as shown below.
fig.13-06(ext_efx.eps)
INPUT
8. Move the cursor to “AUX A.” Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select “AUX.”
9. Press [ST IN].
11. Move the cursor to “StereoIn Select.” Rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to select “Input 7/8.”
12. Press [
] and [
] to move the cursor. Adjust
the Stereo In volume level (0–127) and left-right
balance (L63–0–R63) as needed.
13. With this, you are now ready for add the external
effect. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].
Return to Play condition.
14. While playing back the song, adjust the sound of
the effect.
When the input mixer is in effect (when the IN indicator is lit), you can adjust the Stereo In (effect sound)
volume level directly with the (ST IN) channel faders.
OUTPUT
Chapter 13
207
Index
R: Page Number of Owner’s Manual
A: Page Number of Appendices
(Numeric)
(E)
(M)
10-band graphic equalizer
............................................A102, A122
2-channel RSS.....................A85, A113
3-band Isolator .................A108, A126
4-band parametric equalizer
............................................A101, A122
Effect ..................R30, R103, A74, A81
Effect bus .............................R24, R106
Equalizer .............................R75, A110
Error level ..........................R130, R196
Event ...............................................R22
Exclusive message ...............R195, A4
External effects device ................R207
MD ........................................R80, R140
MIDI ......................................R128, A4
MIDI clock....................................R131
MIDI implementation chart ........A58
MIDI machine control (MMC)
..............................................R194, A64
MIDI time code (MTC)......R128, A64
Marker....................................R36, R38
Mask fader ...................................R159
Master tape.....................................R80
Metronome...................................R167
Mic simulator ..............................A107
Micro edit .....................................R159
Mix bus ...........................................R24
Mix down .......................................R80
Multi tap delay..............................A97
Mute ..............................................R162
(A)
Alarm function ............................R193
Analog flanger .................A109, A127
Analog phaser ..................A109, A128
Automix........................................R156
(C)
CD player.............................R74, R123
CD player function .....................R123
CD-R backup ...............................R125
CD-R disc .....................................R120
CD-R recover.....................R126, R148
Channel...........................................R21
Channel fader........................R15, R26
Chorus RSS ....................................A86
Coaxial.........................R19, R74, R140
Compu-mix ..................................R202
Contrast ..........................................R17
Control change message .....R139, A4
Current drive .................................R20
Current song .........................R32, A63
(D)
DAT ......................................R80, R140
DAT backup.................................R141
DAT name ....................................R145
DAT recover.................................R143
DAT verify ...................................R146
DCC...............................................R140
Delay....................................A82, A111
Delay RSS.......................................A86
Destructive edit .............................R27
Digital disk recorder.....................R27
Digital in connector..............R19, R71
Direct out......................................R177
Disk drive .....................R20, R111, A5
Drive check ..................................R178
Drive initialize .............................R111
Drive select...................................R116
Drop frame...................................R129
Dual compressor/limiter.............A95
208
(F)
Fader edit .....................................A124
Fader match.......................R158, R185
Finalize ................................R122, A63
Foot switch ..........................R64, R186
Frame ...................................R128, A63
Frame rate ....................................R128
(G)
GPI ........................................R64, R186
Gate reverb .........................A96, A119
Gradation .....................................R157
Graphic display .............................R16
Guitar amp simulator .......A92, A115
Guitar multi 1 ................................A87
Guitar multi 2 ................................A88
Guitar multi 3 ................................A89
(H)
Headphones ........................R18, R144
Hum canceler ...................A103, A123
(I)
IDE .........................................R13, A64
Initialize (Mixer/System)...........R192
Input channel ........................R22, R61
Insert.....................................R72, R103
(L)
Lo-fi processor .................A100, A121
Locator ...................................R36, R37
Locator bank ..................................R37
Loop recording ..............................R66
(N)
Noise suppressor ........................A115
Non-destructive edit.....................R27
Non-drop frame ..........................R129
Note message........................R116, A4
Numeric keys ....................R167, R187
(O)
Optical .........................R19, R74, R140
Over dubbing.................................R68
(P)
Partition ..........................................R20
Patch.....................................R108, A74
Peaking type (Equalizer)...R76, A110
Phrase..............................................R21
Phrase copy ....................................R93
Phrase delete..................................R99
Phrase move...................................R96
Phrase name.................................R102
Phrase new ...................................R101
Phrase split...................................R100
Playlist..................................R21, R182
Post level ......................................R180
Pre level ........................................R180
Preview.........................................R154
Program change message ...R138, A4
Punch in..........................................R63
Punch out .......................................R63
Index
(R)
RSS .........................................A64, A85
Random access ..............................R27
Realtime........................................R158
Realtime modify filter .....A100, A121
Recording bus................................R24
Recording mode ............................R58
Removable disk ......................R5, A64
Reverb .................................A81, A110
Reverb 2 ..............................A99, A120
Rotary ..................................A91, A117
(S)
(T)
TOC ......................................R122, A65
Take.................................................R21
Tap marker function ............R36, R38
Tape Echo 201 ..................A108, A127
Tempo map .......................R133, R167
Terminator..............................A5, A63
Terminator power .................A5, A65
Track ...............................................R21
Track bouncing ...................R77, R121
Track channel ........................R22, R77
Track copy......................................R83
Track cut .........................................R88
Track erase .....................................R89
Track exchange..............................R86
Track import ..................................R92
Track insert ....................................R87
Track move.....................................R85
Track name.....................................R91
Track number ..............................R124
Track time compression/expansion
.........................................................R90
Trim in ............................................R97
Trim out..........................................R98
(U)
Undo .............................................R160
(V)
V-track....................................R29, R68
VS8F-1 .............................................R13
VS8F-2 ..................................R13, R103
Vari pitch......................................R166
Vocal canceler ..................A104, A123
Vocal multi ....................................A90
Vocoder ...............................A85, A113
Vocoder 2 ..........................A106, A124
Voice transformer ............A105, A123
(Z)
Zero return .....................................R17
Zip disk.........................................R111
Zip drive..............................R111, A64
209
Chapter 13
S/P DIF .........................R19, R74, A64
SCMS........................................R5, A64
SCSI ........................................R111, A5
SMPTE time code .................R36, A65
Sample rate..........................R58, R120
Scene.....................................R39, R138
Scrub .............................................R154
Send/Return .......................R30, R106
Sequential access ...........................R27
Shelving type (Equalizer) .R76, A110
Shotdown ..............................R32, A64
Slave ...................................R130, R195
Snapshot .......................................R157
Solo function ................................R162
Song.................................................R21
Song arrange ................................R171
Song combine...............................R173
Song copy (Archives extract)
.............................................R119, R148
Song copy (Archives store)........R117
Song copy (Playable) ..................R114
Song erase.....................................R170
Song export ..................................R150
Song import .................................R148
Song name ...........................R58, R171
Song new ........................................R58
Song optimize ..............................R169
Song protect ...................................R81
Song split......................................R169
Source .............................................R21
Space chorus.....................A100, A120
Status ....................................R36, R138
Stereo delay chorus ......................A83
Stereo flanger .....................A94, A115
Stereo in ........................................R165
Stereo link ............................R62, R164
Stereo multi ...................................A98
Stereo phaser ......................A93, A116
Stereo pitch shifter delay..A84, A113
Sub frame .......................................R36
Sync source........................R195, R198
Sync track ..........................R131, R167
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
P.O. Box 2904,
El Horrieh Heliopolos, Cairo,
EGYPT
TEL: (02) 4185531
REUNION
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules MermanZL
Chaudron - BP79 97491
Ste Clotilde REUNION
TEL: 28 29 16
SOUTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle Street (Cnr Melle and
Juta Street)
Braamfontein 2001
Republic of SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont
7700
Republic of SOUTH AFRICA
P.O. Box 23032
Claremont, Cape Town
SOUTH AFRICA, 7735
TEL: (021) 64 4030
ASIA
CHINA
Beijing Xinghai Musical
Instruments Co., Ltd.
6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang
District, Beijing, CHINA
TEL: (010) 6774 7491
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
POLAND
Productos Superiores, S.A.
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
A. Chahine & Fils
150 Sims Drive,
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 748-1669
Apartado 655 - Panama 1
REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: (507) 270-2200
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
URUGUAY
PORTUGAL
P.O. Box 16-5857 Gergi Zeidan St.
Chahine Building, Achrafieh
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 335799
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 243 9555
Cuareim 1488, Montevideo,
URUGUAY
TEL: 5982-924-2335
Swee Lee Company
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
VIETNAM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
AUSTRALIA
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation (NZ) Ltd.
97 Mt. Eden Road, Mt. Eden,
Auckland 3, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
INDIA
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
INDONESIA
PT Citra Inti Rama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
Service Station
261 2nd Floor Nak-Won Arcade
Jong-Ro ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 742 8844
MALAYSIA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Florida 656 2nd Floor
Office Number 206A
Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA, CP1005
TEL: (54-11) 4- 393-6057
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
R. Coronel Octaviano da Silveira
203 05522-010
Sao Paulo BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 3743 9377
CHILE
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Avenida Rancagua #0330
Providencia Santiago, CHILE
TEL: 56-2-373-9100
Bentley Music SDN BHD
EL SALVADOR
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2443333
OMNI MUSIC
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
75 Avenida Notre y Alameda
Juan Pablo 2 No. 4010
San Salvador, EL SALVADOR
TEL: (503) 262-0788
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323 Col. Olivar de
los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (525) 668 04 80
La Casa Wagner de
Guadalajara s.a. de c.v.
Av. Corona No. 202 S.J.
Guadalajara, Jalisco Mexico
C.P.44100 MEXICO
TEL: (3) 613 1414
210
Todo Musica
VENEZUELA
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
RUA SANTA CATARINA
131 - 4000 Porto -PORTUGAL
TEL: (02) 208 44 56
Musicland Digital C.A.
ROMANIA
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
VENEZUELA
TEL: (02) 285 9218
Plata Libertatii 1.
RO-4200 Cheorgheni
TEL: (066) 164-609
FBS LINES
RUSSIA
EUROPE
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
BELGIUM/HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3 B-2260 Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
DENMARK
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
TEL: 2415 0911
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 498 3079
LEBANON
PANAMA
SINGAPORE
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
TEL: (039)16 6200
FRANCE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK
Parc de l'Esplanade F 77 462 St.
Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
26422 Patras, GREECE
TEL: 061-435400
HUNGARY
Intermusica Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
P.O. Box 2154 ALKHOBAR 31952,
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
SYRIA
Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona,
SPAIN
TEL: (93) 308 1000
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (08) 702 0020
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Musitronic AG
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
TEL: 273 0074
TURKEY
Barkat Muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat limited ireketi
Siraselviler Cad. Billurcu Sok.
Mucadelle Cikmeze No. 11-13
Taksim. Istanbul. TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
UKRAINE
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor DUBAI
U.A.E.
P.O. Box 8050 DUBAI, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 360715
TIC-TAC
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co.
NORTH AMERICA
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 700139
MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
Bab Al Bahrain Road,
P.O. Box 20077
State of BAHRAIN
TEL: 211 005
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17 Diagorou St., P.O. Box 2046,
Nicosia CYPRUS
TEL: (02) 453 426
CANADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (0604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office)
Unit 2, 109 Woodbine Downs
Blvd, Etobicoke, ON
M9W 6Y1 CANADA
TEL: (0416) 213 9707
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Sons Ltd.
AMMAN Trading Agency
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Khaled Ibn Al Walid St.
P.O. Box 13520
Damascus - SYRIA
TEL: (011) 2235 384
U.A.E.
ITALY
NORWAY
Technical Light & Sound
Center
Gerberstrasse 5, CH-4410 Liestal,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 921 1615
8 Retzif Fa'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yaho ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
Viale delle Industrie, 8
20020 Arese Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
P.O. Box 62,
DOHA QATAR
TEL: 423554
SPAIN
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Badie Studio & Stores
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
UNITED KINGDOM
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
TEL: (040) 52 60090
QATAR
SAUDI ARABIA
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente
Handelsgesellschaft mbH.
P.O. Box 889 Muscat
Sultanate of OMAN
TEL: 959085
Sadojava-Triumfalnaja st., 16
103006 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: 095 209 2193
FINLAND
GERMANY
OHI Electronics & Trading
Co. LLC
Slami Music Company
Mira Str. 19/108
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Lauttasaarentie 54 B
Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND
TEL: (9) 682 4020
OMAN
JORDAN
Prince Mohammed St. P.O. Box
825 Amman 11118 JORDAN
TEL: (06) 4641200
KUWAIT
Easa Husain Al-Yousifi
P.O. Box 126 Safat 13002
KUWAIT
TEL: 5719499
As of June 11, 1999
Cover.e
04.8.19 10:23 AM
Page 2
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION: RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
For EU Countries
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer.
Discard used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Apparatus containing
Lithium batteries
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING - When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read all the instructions before using the product.
2. Do not use this product near water — for example, near a
bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near
a swimming pool, or the like.
3. This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is
recommended by the manufacturer.
4. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier
and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do
not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level
or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any
hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist.
5. The product should be located so that its location or position
does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
6. The product should be located away from heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce
heat.
7. The product should be connected to a power supply only of
the type described in the operating instructions or as marked
on the product.
8. The power-supply cord of the product should be unplugged
from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
9. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids
are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
10.The product should be serviced by qualified service
personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the
product; or
C. The product has been exposed to rain; or
D. The product does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure
damaged.
11.Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described
in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
ADVARSEL!
VARNING
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved
fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af
samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til
leverandøren.
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en
ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt
fabrikantens instruktion.
ADVARSEL
VAROITUS
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av
batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en
tilsvarende type anbefalt av
apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til
fabrikantens instruks joner.
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on
virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan
laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
For EU Countries
This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
For the USA
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a path of least resistance for
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock.
This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be
plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a
qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded.
Do not modify the plug provided with the product — if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified
electrician.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
For the U.K.
WARNING:
THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: EARTH, BLUE: NEUTRAL, BROWN: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the
letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
The product which is equipped with a THREE WIRE GROUNDING TYPE LINE PLUG must be grounded.
2
211
Cover.e
04.8.18 5:06 PM
Page 1
®
Concerning Copyright
SCMS (Appendices p. 64)
Disclaimer of liability
Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other damages” which may result from your use of the VS-1680.
These damages may include but are not limited to the following events which can
occur when using the VS-1680.
● Any loss of profit that may occur to you
● Permanent loss of your music or data
● Inability to continue using the VS-1680 itself or a connected device
OWNER'S MANUAL
OWNER'S MANUAL
The law prohibits the unauthorized recording, public performance, broadcast, sale,
or distribution etc. of a work (CD recording, video recording, broadcast, etc.) whose
copyright is owned by a third party.
The VS-1680 does not implement SCMS. This design decision was made with the
intent that SCMS should not restrict the creation of original compositions which do
not violate copyright law. Roland will take no responsibility for any infringement
of copyright that you may commit in using the VS-1680.
About the License Agreement
The VS-1680 and its CD-R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright, or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, reproduction of music CDs or other copyrighted material without the permission of the copyright owner, other than for your
own personal use and enjoyment (private use) constitutes copyright infringement,
which may incur penalties. Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for
more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders.
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
* Windows® 95 is known officially as: “Microsoft® Windows® 95 operating system.”
* Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
* Iomega is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* ZIP is a trademark of Iomega Corporation.
* Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* Cakewalk Pro Audio and Cakewalk Professional are trademarks of Twelve Tone systems, Inc.
* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
01349123
'99-10-AB2-61T
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p.
3, 4), and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit.
Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good
grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Quick Start,
Owner’s Manual, and Appendices should be read in its entirety. The
manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 1998 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form
without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement